Logic Pro X

Control Surfaces Support

For OS X
KKApple Inc. Because Apple frequently releases new versions and updates
Copyright © 2013 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. to its system software, applications, and Internet sites, images
shown in this manual may be slightly different from what you
Your rights to the software are governed by the accompanying see on your screen.
software license agreement. The owner or authorized user
of a valid copy of Logic Pro software may reproduce this Apple
publication for the purpose of learning to use such software. 1 Infinite Loop
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted Cupertino, CA 95014
for commercial purposes, such as selling copies of this 408-996-1010
publication or for providing paid for support services. www.apple.com
Apple, the Apple logo, Apple, FireWire, GarageBand, iPod, and
The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in Logic are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
the U.S. and other countries. Use of the “keyboard” Apple other countries.
logo (Shift-Option-K) for commercial purposes without the
prior written consent of Apple may constitute trademark Intel, Intel Core, and Xeon are trademarks of Intel Corp. in the
infringement and unfair competition in violation of federal and U.S. and other countries.
state laws.
Other company and product names mentioned herein
Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in are trademarks of their respective companies. Mention of
this manual is accurate. Apple is not responsible for printing or third-party products is for informational purposes only and
clerical errors. constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation.
Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the
performance or use of these products.

019-2551
 Contents

11 Chapter 1:  Control surfaces

11 Control surfaces overview

12 Chapter 2:  Basic control surface setup

12 Control surface requirements
13 Connect control surfaces
15 Add a control surface to Logic Pro
16 Create control surface groups
18 Control surface inspector
18 Control surface inspector overview
19 Device parameters
19 Special parameters
20 Control Surface Group parameters
26 Control surfaces preferences
26 Open Control Surfaces preferences
26 General Control Surfaces preferences
28 Help Tags preferences
29 Modal dialog display
30 Control surface use tips
31 Control surfaces supported by Logic Pro
33 Software and firmware

34 Chapter 3:  Controller assignments

34 Controller assignments overview
35 Controller Assignments Easy view
35 Use Controller Assignments Easy view
36 Assign and delete controllers in Easy view
38 Controller Assignments Expert view
38 Use Expert view
39 Expert view parameters
41 Assign and delete controllers in Expert view
42 Use zones and modes
44 Control Name and Label fields
44 Flip Group and Exclusive parameters
45 Class pop-up menu parameters
48 Expert view Input Message parameters
49 OSC Message Paths
49 Expert view Value parameters
52 Assign buttons to key commands

3
54 Chapter 4:  Mackie Control
54 Mackie Control overview
55 Mackie Control displays
55 Mackie Control displays overview
55 Mackie Control display control buttons
57 Mackie Control channel strips
57 Mackie Control channel strips overview
57 Mackie Control V-Pots
58 Mackie Control channel strip buttons and LEDs
59 Mackie Control faders
60 Mackie Control assignment buttons
60 Mackie Control Assignment buttons overview
60 Mackie Control assignment views
60 Mackie Control Track button
63 Mackie Control Pan/Surround button
66 Mackie Control EQ button
68 Mackie Control Send button
70 Mackie Control Plug-in button
73 Mackie Control Instrument button
75 Mackie Control fader bank buttons
75 Mackie Control Bank buttons
76 Mackie Control Channel buttons
76 Mackie Control Flip button
77 Mackie Control Global View buttons
77 Mackie Control function keys
78 Mackie Control modifier buttons
79 Mackie Control automation buttons
80 Mackie Control Group button
81 Mackie Control utilities buttons
82 Mackie Control transport buttons
82 Mackie Control transport buttons overview
83 Mackie Control Marker button
84 Mackie Control Nudge button
86 Use the Mackie Control Cycle button
87 Use the Mackie Control Drop button
88 Mackie Control Replace, Click, and Solo buttons
88 Use Mackie Control cursor and zoom keys
89 Mackie Control Jog/Scrub wheel
89 Mackie Control programmable user modes
90 Mackie Control foot switches
90 Mackie Control assignments
90 Mackie Control assignments overview
91 Mackie Control Display buttons
91 Mackie Control channel strips (1 to 8)
94 Mackie Control Assignment buttons
95 Mackie Control function keys
97 Mackie Control Global View buttons
98 Mackie Control modifier buttons
99 Mackie Control automation buttons
99 Mackie Control utilities buttons

Contents 4
100 Mackie Control transport buttons
101 Mackie Control cursor keys
103 Mackie Control Jog/Scrub wheel
103 Mackie Control external inputs

104 Chapter 5:  M-Audio iControl

104 iControl overview
105 iControl Assignment buttons
106 iControl Arrow buttons
107 iControl channel strip controls
107 iControl Mixer and Channel view
108 Use the iControl Jog Wheel
108 iControl transport controls
109 Use iControl locators and Cycle mode
109 iControl Master fader
110 iControl assignments
110 iControl assignments overview
110 iControl Assignment button functions
111 iControl channel strip functions
111 iControl Jog Wheel functions
112 iControl transport functions

113 Chapter 6:  Euphonix devices

113 Set up your Euphonix device
114 Change the Euphonix track display
114 Set up MC Professional Soft Key assignments
115 Choose Euphonix automation modes
116 Euphonix fader strips
116 Control of plug-ins with Euphonix devices
117 Euphonix knobsets
117 Euphonix knobsets overview
118 Use the Inserts knobset
119 Use the Input knobset
121 Use the EQ knobset
122 Use the Aux or Sends knobset
123 Use the Pan/Surround knobset
123 Use the Group knobset
124 Use the Mix or Output knobset
124 Euphonix Logic Pro features

Contents 5
125 Chapter 7:  CM Labs Motormix
125 Set up your Motormix
126 Motormix assignments
126 Motormix Select buttons
127 Motormix faders and pots
130 Motormix multi buttons
131 Motormix burn buttons
132 Motormix Solo and Mute buttons
132 Motormix view controls
133 Motormix left function buttons
134 Motormix right function buttons

135 Chapter 8:  Frontier Design TranzPort

135 Set up your TranzPort
135 TranzPort LCD
136 TranzPort assignments
136 TranzPort channel strip
137 TranzPort master controls

140 Chapter 9:  JLCooper CS-32 MiniDesk

140 Set up your CS-32 MiniDesk
140 CS-32 MiniDesk assignments
140 CS-32 MiniDesk assignments overview
141 CS-32 MiniDesk display
142 CS-32 MiniDesk pots
143 CS-32 MiniDesk channel strips
144 CS-32 MiniDesk bank button
145 CS-32 MiniDesk F keys
146 CS-32 MiniDesk cursor controls
146 CS-32 MiniDesk transport controls
147 CS-32 MiniDesk Jog wheel controls

148 Chapter 10:  JLCooper FaderMaster 4/100

148 Set up your FaderMaster 4/100
148 FaderMaster 4/100 assignments

149 Chapter 11:  JLCooper MCS3

149 Set up your MCS3
149 MCS3 assignments
149 MCS3 assignments overview
150 MCS3 F1 to F6 buttons
150 MCS3 W1 to W7 buttons
150 MCS3 cursor controls
151 MCS3 Jog wheel and Shuttle ring
151 MCS3 transport controls

Contents 6
152 Chapter 12:  Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49
152 Set up microKONTROL and KONTROL49
153 microKONTROL and KONTROL49 assignments
153 microKONTROL and KONTROL49 Pads
155 microKONTROL and KONTROL49 main controls
157 microKONTROL and KONTROL49 channel strips
157 microKONTROL and KONTROL49 external input

158 Chapter 13:  Mackie Baby HUI

158 Set up your Baby HUI
158 Baby HUI assignments
158 Baby HUI assignments overview
159 Baby HUI channel strips
159 Baby HUI encoder assignment controls
160 Baby HUI automation controls
160 Baby HUI display controls
160 Baby HUI utility controls
161 Baby HUI navigation controls
161 Baby HUI transport controls

162 Chapter 14:  Mackie HUI

162 Set up your HUI
163 HUI assignments
163 HUI assignments overview
164 HUI assign controls
165 HUI fader bank buttons
166 HUI window controls
166 HUI keyboard shortcuts
167 HUI channel strips
169 HUI DSP controls
171 HUI function keys
172 HUI global controls
173 HUI automation controls
174 HUI status/group controls
174 HUI editing controls
175 HUI time display
175 HUI numeric keypad controls
177 HUI transport controls
178 HUI cursor buttons
179 HUI Jog Wheel
179 HUI foot switches

Contents 7
180 Chapter 15:  Mackie C4
180 Set up of your C4
180 C4 V-Pots and V-Select buttons
181 Use C4 views
186 C4 function buttons
187 C4 Assignment buttons
187 C4 Assignment buttons overview
188 C4 Marker overlay
188 C4 Track overlay
188 C4 Channel Strip overlay
189 C4 Function overlay
190 C4 modifier buttons
191 C4 Parameter, Track, and Slot buttons

192 Chapter 16:  Radikal Technologies SAC-2K

192 Set up your SAC-2K
192 SAC-2K assignments
192 SAC-2K assignments overview
193 SAC-2K LCDs and encoders
194 SAC-2K channel strips
195 SAC-2K Mixer view controls
198 SAC-2K software navigation controls
198 SAC-2K locator display
199 SAC-2K marker controls
200 SAC-2K transport controls
200 SAC-2K Channel view controls
200 SAC-2K troubleshooting

201 Chapter 17:  Recording Light

201 Set up Recording Light
201 Recording Light parameters

203 Chapter 18:  Roland SI-24

203 Set up your SI-24
203 SI-24 assignments
203 SI-24 assignments overview
204 SI-24 channel strips
206 SI-24 status mode controls
206 SI-24 channel assign controls
207 SI-24 surround/pan controls
208 SI-24 numeric key controls
209 SI-24 transport controls

Contents 8
210 Chapter 19:  Tascam FW-1884
210 Set up FW-1884, FE-8, or FW-1082
210 FW-1884 assignments
210 FW-1884 assignments overview
211 Encoders (FW-1884, FE-8)
212 Shortcut controls (FW-1884 only)
213 Channel strips (FW-1884, FE-8, FW-1082)
214 EQ controls (FW-1884 only)
215 Encoders and controls (FW-1082 only)
218 Automation controls (FW-1884 only)
219 Mode controls (FW-1082 only)
219 Master controls (FW-1884, FE-8, FW-1082)

221 Chapter 20:  Tascam US-2400

221 Set up your US-2400
221 US-2400 assignments
221 US-2400 assignments overview
222 US-2400 channel strips
223 US-2400 encoders
225 US-2400 master channel
226 US-2400 encoder assignments
228 US-2400 master section controls

230 Chapter 21:  Tascam US-428 and US-224

230 Set up your US-428 or US-224
230 US-428 and US-224 assignments
230 US-428 and US-224 assignments overview
231 US-428 and US-224 channel strips
232 US-428 and US-224 EQ controls
233 US-428 and US-224 master controls
234 US-428 and US-224 Locate controls
234 US-428 and US-224 Bank controls
234 US-428 and US-224 transport controls

235 Chapter 22:  Yamaha 01V96

235 Set up your 01V96
235 01V96 assignments
235 01V96 assignments overview
236 01V96 Display Access controls
237 01V96 Fader Mode controls
239 01V96 LCD controls
240 01V96 LCD display modes
241 01V96 Selected Channel control
241 01V96 data entry controls
242 01V96 channel strips
243 01V96 assignable keys

Contents 9
247 Chapter 23:  Yamaha 02R96
247 Set up your 02R96
247 02R96 assignments
247 02R96 assignments overview
248 02R96 Display Access control
248 02R96 Aux Select controls
248 02R96 Encoder and Fader Mode controls
249 02R96 Effect/Plug-in controls
250 02R96 LCD
251 02R96 assignable keys
252 02R96 channel strips
252 02R96 Machine Control parameters
253 02R96 data entry controls

254 Chapter 24:  Yamaha DM1000

254 Set up your DM1000
254 DM1000 assignments
254 DM1000 assignments overview
255 DM1000 Display Access controls
256 DM1000 Aux Select controls
257 DM1000 Encoder and Fader Mode controls
258 DM1000 LCD controls
258 DM1000 LCD display modes
260 DM1000 data entry controls
261 DM1000 channel strips
261 DM1000 stereo channel strip control
262 DM1000 assignable keys

266 Chapter 25:  Yamaha DM2000

266 Set up your DM2000
266 DM2000 assignments
266 DM2000 assignments overview
267 DM2000 Matrix Select controls
268 DM2000 Aux Select controls
269 DM2000 Encoder and Fader Mode controls
269 DM2000 Display Access controls
270 DM2000 Effect/Plug-in controls
271 DM2000 LCD
271 DM2000 Track Arming controls
272 DM2000 Automix controls
274 DM2000 Locator controls
275 DM2000 transport and cursor controls
277 DM2000 channel strips
278 DM2000 assignable keys

Contents 10
Control surfaces
1
Control surfaces overview
Control surfaces are hardware devices that feature a variety of controls, which can include faders,
rotary knobs, buttons, and displays. Control surfaces typically allow you to select parameters for
editing or to select particular tracks/channel strips or banks (of channel strips). Many also offer
a Jog Wheel, which allows you to move the playhead precisely; transport buttons, such as Play,
Rewind, and so on; and other controls.

Some simple control surfaces only provide (non-motorized) faders and knobs. More
sophisticated units include motorized faders, rotary encoders, LED rings, and programmable
displays. The additional feedback these control surfaces provide makes them easier to use—
without having to refer to your computer screen to know what mode the device is in or what
current parameter values are.

You can use hardware control surfaces to control and automate transport, mixing, recording, and
other tasks in Logic Pro.

All Logic Pro Mixer controls, such as level and pan, can be adjusted onscreen—using your mouse
and computer keyboard. This is not, however, an ideal method for precise real-time control. You
can enhance your creative flow and achieve greater flexibility and precision by connecting a
hardware control surface to your computer.

Control surfaces are ideal for creating a dynamic live (onstage) performance when used with a
portable computer, MIDI keyboard, and audio and MIDI interfaces. In the studio, you can record
control surface automation (even when Logic is not in record mode). Track automation appears
in the Logic Tracks window and in the Piano Roll Editor.

When you move a fader on the control surface, the corresponding fader in the Logic Mixer
moves with it. EQ or other parameters can be altered by turning rotary knobs on the control
surface, with assigned parameters updating instantly in Logic.

Because communication between Logic and your control surface is bidirectional, adjustments
to parameters onscreen are immediately reflected by the corresponding control on the
control surface.

Note:  When you use a supported control surface with Logic Pro, some controls are pre-mapped
to common functions. You can map unassigned controls to other Logic Pro commands and
functions (see Controller assignments overview on page 34).

11
Basic control surface setup
2
Control surface requirements
Regardless of the control surface being used, you first need to connect, add, and configure
your device for use with Logic Pro. The setup procedures and preferences are common to all
control surfaces.

To use one or more control surfaces with Logic Pro, you will need:
•• An installed, authorized copy of Logic Pro
•• For USB- or FireWire-equipped devices: An available USB or FireWire port. Ideally, this should be a
direct USB or FireWire connection with the computer, rather than through a hub. Refer to the
documentation provided by the manufacturer of your control surface.
•• For devices that are only equipped with MIDI ports: A MIDI interface with free MIDI input and
output ports for each device. For example, if you are using a MIDI interface with eight MIDI
input ports and eight MIDI output ports—with one Mackie Control and one Mackie Control XT
unit—you will need to use two MIDI interface MIDI In ports and two MIDI interface MIDI
Out ports.
•• An installed driver (if required by your control surface) that is supported by the operating
system you are using on your computer

Important:  Your MIDI interface must feature driver software that supports SysEx communication.
Consult the documentation that shipped with your MIDI interface (or MIDI interface drivers).

The number of devices that can be used simultaneously depends on the number of free
ports of the appropriate type (USB, FireWire, or other) available on your system. Using
multiple control surfaces allows you to control more tracks and channels, effects, and other
parameters simultaneously.

In a standard control surface configuration, you can use a single control surface or one
accompanied by one or more expansion devices. You can also create control surface groups, as
described in Create control surface groups on page 16.

12
 Connect control surfaces
Logic Pro supports many control surfaces that connect to your computer using FireWire, USB,
and other connection protocols. Be sure to check the type of connection that your device
features and that it is supported by your computer. Before connecting the device, read the
installation instructions included with it, and install the latest version of any appropriate firmware
or driver software, if needed. For more information, refer to the documentation that came with
the device.

Note:  Some control surfaces allow you to connect footswitches or pedals as additional

controllers. If your control surface features suitable connectors, you can connect optional
footswitches to remotely control playback and other functions. This frees your hands for
other controls and can also be helpful when using guitars or other instruments that require
two-handed playing.

Connect a FireWire or USB control surface

1 Connect your FireWire or USB control surface directly to your computer.
FireWire and USB devices transmit and receive data through a single cable, if the device supports
bidirectional communication. The diagram illustrates a typical setup using a FireWire or USB
cable:

FireWire/USB cable
Computer Control Surface

Important:  It is recommended that you connect FireWire and USB devices directly to your
computer, rather than through a hub. Daisy-chaining devices can result in errors and other
problems, due to the amount of data transmitted in real time.
2 Once connected, press the power switch on your control surface.
When powered, the displays (such as an LCD, if your device has one) or LEDs are lit. Some LCDs
display a welcome message, which includes the firmware version number. On most control
surfaces with motorized faders, each fader slides to its top position, then back to its bottom
or center position. This self-diagnostic initialization procedure indicates that your units are
functioning correctly.
Note:  Generally, you can turn on your computer either before or after you turn on the control
surface. Some devices, however, may require the computer to be turned on before or after the
device has initialized. Check the device documentation, and manufacturer website.

Chapter 2    Basic control surface setup 13

 Connect a networked control surface
1 Connect your control surface to the network (LAN) ports of your Mac computer, using a standard
(CAT5 or CAT6) networking cable.
Most devices connected in this way also incorporate audio I/O and digital audio converters, plus
built-in MIDI ports, making the addition of these peripherals a simple, single cable (and driver)
installation.
Important:  It is recommended that such devices are directly connected to the computer, rather
than through a network hub or switch.
2 Once connected, press the power switch on your control surface.
When powered, the displays (such as an LCD, if your device has one) or LEDs are lit. Some LCDs
display a welcome message, which includes the firmware version number. On most control
surfaces with motorized faders, each fader slides to its top position, then back to its bottom
or center position. This self-diagnostic initialization procedure indicates that your units are
functioning correctly.
Note:  Generally, you can turn on your computer either before or after you turn on the control
surface. Some devices, however, may require the computer to be turned on before or after the
device has initialized. Check the device documentation, and manufacturer website.

Connect a MIDI control surface

1 Connect your MIDI control surface to a MIDI interface, and connect the MIDI interface to your
computer.
MIDI interfaces are typically connected to your computer via the USB or FireWire connection
protocols. MIDI uses separate ports for input and output, and you must connect both the MIDI
input and output to use the device with Logic Pro. The diagram illustrates a typical setup using
MIDI input and output:

MIDI
interface
Out port In port

In port Out port

Computer Control surface

Important:  It is recommended that you do not daisy-chain other MIDI devices via MIDI through
to the MIDI In or Out ports used by control surfaces. Daisy-chaining can result in errors and other
problems due to the amount of data transmitted in real time.
2 Once connected, press the power switch on your control surface.
When powered, the displays (such as an LCD, if your device has one) or LEDs are lit. Some LCDs
display a welcome message, which includes the firmware version number. On most control
surfaces with motorized faders, each fader slides to its top position, then back to its bottom
or center position. This self-diagnostic initialization procedure indicates that your units are
functioning correctly.
Note:  Generally, you can turn on your computer either before or after you turn on the control
surface. Some devices, however, may require the computer to be turned on before or after the
device has initialized. Check the device documentation, and manufacturer website.

Chapter 2    Basic control surface setup 14

 Add a control surface to Logic Pro
Some control surfaces (such as the Mackie Control) are detected automatically when you
open Logic Pro. You can add other devices that are not detected automatically using the Setup
window. Installation is covered in the setup section for your particular device. Some devices may
require different or additional steps, but in most cases you only need to select the name of the
device you want to use with Logic Pro, then add it.

Add a control surface by scanning

1 To open the Control Surfaces Setup window, choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Setup.
2 In the Setup window, choose New > Install, and then select the device from the list. You can
select more than one model by Command-clicking multiple entries in the list. If you select more
than one model, Logic Pro performs the operation for each model, in turn.
Note:  If you don’t want to select the models to be scanned, you can choose New > Scan All in
the Setup window: Logic Pro searches for all supported control surface units on all ports. This
process may take a few minutes.
3 Click the Scan button. You can also press Enter, or double-click the device name to initiate the
scan.
Logic Pro scans your system for connected devices, and automatically installs (and connects to)
those it finds.
4 When you finish, close the window.

Add a control surface manually

Some control surfaces don’t support automatic scanning. Such devices must be added manually
to your setup. When you add a device manually, you also need to assign the appropriate MIDI In
and Out port parameters.

Note:  It is preferable to install devices by scanning, whenever possible. Logic Pro is able to gather
more information about devices through scanning than with manual installation.
1 To open the Control Surfaces Setup window, choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Setup.
2 In the Setup window, choose New > Install, and select the device you want from the list.
3 Click the Add button.
4 Close the Install window when you finish.
If another control surface of the selected type already exists in your setup, a warning dialog asks
you to confirm the addition of the new device.
You need to manually alter the MIDI In and Out port values (in the Device parameters of the
Setup window) to match those of the connected unit.
Note:  You can reinitialize the support of all connected control surfaces by choosing Logic Pro >
Control Surfaces > Rebuild Defaults.

Chapter 2    Basic control surface setup 15

 Create control surface groups
If you have multiple control surface units in your system, you can define how they relate to each
other by creating control surface groups. A control surface group consists of multiple devices
that you combine to create a single, unified virtual control surface.

You can create up to 20 control surface groups. Each group can consist of any number of
physical devices. The only limiting factor is the number of available ports.

You can independently determine the default behavior of each device in a group. For more
information, see Device parameters on page 19.

Create a control surface group

1 To open the Control Surfaces Setup window, choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Setup.
2 In the Setup window, drag the icons of the control surfaces you want to group so that they form
a single horizontal row.

The order of the icons from left to right defines the order in which tracks and parameters are
arranged and displayed on the devices.

Use two control surfaces independently

1 To open the Control Surfaces Setup window, choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Setup.
2 In the Setup window, arrange the icons for the control surfaces in separate rows—that is, one
above the other.

Chapter 2    Basic control surface setup 16

Pictured below is a multiple group example with two Mackie Controls, three Mackie Control XTs,
and one HUI:

The top row, consisting of the Mackie Control #1, Mackie Control XT #1, and Mackie Control XT
#2, forms a single control surface group with 24 channels. Mackie Control #1 controls channels 1
to 8, XT #1 controls channels 9 to 16, and XT #2 handles channels 17 to 24.

In the second row, the Mackie Control #2 and Mackie Control XT #3 form a second control
surface group, controlling instruments (on channels 1 to 8) and auxes (on channels 9 to 16).

In the third row, the HUI forms a single unit control surface group.

Each group has individual settings, such as Flip mode, Display mode, Plug-in Parameter Bank
Offset, and others. This allows you to access, edit, and automate different sections of the Logic
Pro Mixer.

In the example above, the three units in the top row could be used to control audio and
MIDI channel strips. In the second row, Mackie Control #2 could be used to control software
instrument channel strips 1 to 8, and XT #3 could be used to control aux channel strips 1 to 8.
The HUI could be used to edit group definitions. The physical placement of units and the way
you use them are completely flexible.

Note:  In most situations, the placement of your control surface units in relation to each other
should be the same onscreen as in the real world.

Once you have created a control surface group, you can configure it in the Setup window. For
more information, see Control Surface Group parameters overview on page 20.

Chapter 2    Basic control surface setup 17

Control surface inspector
Control surface inspector overview
The inspector at the left side of the Control Surfaces Setup window contains two or three
parameter areas: Device parameters, Special parameters, and Control Surface Group parameters.
You can configure your control surface setup to meet your needs by editing these parameters.

Important:  Any changes to settings (in the Setup window or from the device) are saved in a
preferences file, named “com.apple.logic.pro.cs.” It is found here: ~/Library/Containers/com.
apple.logic10/Data/Library/Preferences/. This file is saved independently of the Logic Pro
Preferences file.

Chapter 2    Basic control surface setup 18

Device parameters

Device parameters
•• Out Port pop-up menu: Choose the MIDI output port from the pop-up menu.

•• Input pop-up menu: Choose the MIDI input port from the pop-up menu.
Each control surface must be connected to an independent MIDI In and Out port (or
corresponding USB/FireWire port, designated as a MIDI port by the device driver). When the
device is added, the automatic setup or scan procedure sets the appropriate MIDI input and
output port settings for the device. If the MIDI port settings are incorrect, you can manually
choose them from the Input and Out Port pop-up menus.
•• Module: Shows the name of the control surface.
•• Model: Shows the model name of the control surface.
•• Version: Shows the firmware version for some control surfaces.
•• Color: Click to select the color that indicates which tracks are being controlled by this control
surface. Choose the color from the color picker that opens. In the Tracks window, the tracks
controlled by this device are colored along the left edge of the track list when control surface
bars are displayed.

Special parameters
Some control surfaces such as the Mackie Control allow you to define “special” parameters
such as fader touch sensitivity. When a device that offers special parameters is connected, the
special parameters area appears in the inspector. For more information about supported special
parameters, refer to the documentation for your device.

Chapter 2    Basic control surface setup 19

Control Surface Group parameters
Control Surface Group parameters overview
If you have created one or more control surface groups, you can configure these groups in the
Control Surface Group parameters. These parameters apply to the group associated with the
selected device and allow you to set up each group to meet your needs. Many group parameters
can also be changed directly from the control surface.

Control Surface Group parameters are divided into several areas. See Control Surface Group
display parameters, Control Surface Group send and plug-in parameters, and Control Surface
Group other parameters.

Chapter 2    Basic control surface setup 20

Control Surface Group display parameters
The parameters at the top of the Control Surface Group parameters give you control over
aspects of the device displays.

Display parameters
•• Flip Mode pop-up menu: Choose the functions for the faders and rotary encoders of the
channel strips on the device. For control surfaces that contain a fader and a rotary encoder for
each channel strip, Flip mode allows you to assign both controls to the same parameter, or to
swap their assignments. The choices are:
•• Off: Standard mode, with the fader acting as a volume control.
•• Duplicate: Assigns both the fader and encoder to the currently selected encoder parameter.
•• Swap: Switches the fader and encoder assignments, making the fader a pan control and the
encoder a channel volume control, for example.
•• Mute: Disables the fader. This is useful when recording in the same room as the control
surface and you want to avoid the mechanical noise of the faders. Any existing automation
still functions normally.
•• Display Mode: Click to limit the device display to only the name or only the value of the current
parameter. This is helpful if there is insufficient space for the display of both the parameter
name and value.
•• Clock Display: If your control surface features a position display, this parameter determines how
the playhead position is represented. Click to switch between Beats (musical values) or SMPTE
(absolute time values).
Note:  The exact elements displayed, and thus their positions, depend on the selected SMPTE
or bar/beat display option defined in the Logic Pro Preferences.
•• Channel Strip View Mode pop-up menu: Choose one of the following views:
•• Arrange: The channel strips on the device correspond to Logic Pro channel strips as they
appear in the Mixer window. The layout of channel strips matches the way tracks are laid
out in the Tracks window. Channel strip 1 in the Mixer window is equivalent to channel 1
on the control surface, channel strip 2 in the Mixer is equivalent to channel 2, and so on.
Instruments and channels used by multiple tracks are merged into one channel. This is the
default mode of most devices, including the Mackie Control.
•• All: The channel strips on the device correspond to Logic Pro channel strips of certain types,
such as MIDI or aux channels, independent of their use in tracks. Control surfaces that
support this view generally allow you to define which channel types you want to display.
The contents of the Logic Pro Mixer window automatically follow the state of the control
surface, provided that the View > Link Control Surfaces option is turned on.
•• Tracks: This view is similar to Arrange view, but individual channel strips are shown when
multiple tracks address the same channel. Typically, this is a software or MIDI instrument
channel, with several tracks routed to it.

Chapter 2    Basic control surface setup 21

 •• Single: This view shows a single channel and its routing to auxes and so on. You
can determine which parameters are edited by the channel strip controllers on the
control surface.
Note:  The View is a property of the control surface group, not a global setting. One group can
display busses, while the other shows tracks, for example.
•• Fader Bank for Tracks View: Drag vertically, or enter an integer value to offset which tracks are
controlled by the channel strips of the device in Tracks view. For example, if your device has
eight channel strips, these might normally be assigned to audio channel strips 1–8 in Logic
Pro. If you set this parameter to 2, the device channel strips would control Logic Pro Mixer
channel strips 3–10 (1 + 2 = 3).
•• Fader Bank for All View: Drag vertically, or enter an integer value to offset which Logic Pro
channel strips are controlled by the device in All view. This parameter is only available when
multiple channel strip types are displayed in the Mixer. When single channel strip types are
displayed, there are separate fader bank parameters. (These aren’t displayed in the parameter
list.)
•• Channel Strip Parameter pop-up menu: Choose which function is controlled by the channel strip
encoders on the device. The choices are:
•• Volume: Encoders adjust channel volume.
•• Pan: Encoders adjust channel panorama position.
•• Format: Encoders adjust or select channel format.
•• Input: Encoders adjust or select channel input source.
•• Output: Encoders adjust or select channel output (main outs/auxes/surround).
•• Automation: Encoders adjust or select channel automation mode.
•• Group: Encoders adjust group membership of the track. Editing the parameter allows you
to set either “no group” or a single group. Enabling membership of multiple groups is not
possible. (This can only be done directly in the Logic Pro Mixer.)
•• Displayed Par.: Encoders adjust the automation parameter selected in the Tracks window. This
is especially useful if you set the control surface to Arrange view, and your Tracks window
shows multiple automation subtracks with Logic Pro parameters.
•• Surround Parameter pop-up menu: Choose the surround parameter that the rotary encoders
will control. The choices are:
•• Angle: Encoders adjust surround angle.
•• Diversity: Encoders adjust surround diversity (direction).
•• LFE: Encoders adjust LFE level.
•• Spread: Encoders adjust the Spread parameter of Stereo to Surround channel strips.
•• X: Encoders adjust surround X position.
•• Y: Encoders adjust surround Y position.
•• Center: Encoders adjust the Center channel level.
Note:  The X and Y parameters are a different representation of the Angle and Diversity
parameters, and thus are independent of them. The X and Y parameters support the use of
surround joysticks.
•• EQ Band: Drag vertically, or enter an integer value to set the current EQ band, enabling you
to edit a particular Channel EQ or Linear Phase EQ parameter for all tracks in the EQ Multi
Channel View.

Chapter 2    Basic control surface setup 22

•• EQ Parameter pop-up menu: Choose which parameter of the selected EQ band is controlled by
the encoders in EQ Multi Channel View. The choices are:
•• Frequency: Encoders adjust the frequency of the selected band.
•• Gain: Encoders adjust the gain of the selected band. For the Low Cut (band 1) and High Cut
(band 8) bands of the Channel and Linear Phase EQ, this parameter controls the slope.
•• Q: Encoders adjust the Q factor of the selected band.
•• On/Off: Encoders bypass the selected EQ band.
•• EQ Parameter Page: Drag vertically, or enter an integer value to set the EQ parameter displayed
in EQ Channel Strip view.
The Channel and Linear Phase EQs feature eight bands per audio channel, with each band
offering four parameters. All of these parameters can be accessed with your control surface.
If your control surface does not display all EQ parameters at once, you view them by stepping
through the parameter pages in sequence. For example, if your control surface has eight
channel strips, you can directly control parameters 1 to 8 with knobs or sliders 1 to 8 when
you switch to EQ Channel Strip Edit view. You then need to switch by a page to access
parameters 9 to 16.

Control Surface Group send and plug-in parameters

The parameters in the middle of the Control Surface Group parameters let you control different
operational aspects when working with send and plug-in parameters.

Send and plug-in parameters

•• Send Slot: Drag vertically, or enter an integer value to set the currently selected Send slot. The
default is 1, which sets the first (top) Send on each channel as the Send slot. A value of 2 sets
the second send as the Send slot, a value of 3, the third Send slot, and so on.
•• Send Parameter pop-up menu: Choose the Send parameter controlled by the encoders when in
the Send Multi Channel view. The choices are:
•• Destination: Encoder is used to determine the bus channel number for the Send slot.
•• Level: Encoder is used to adjust the Send level.
•• Position: Encoders set Pre, Post, or Post Pan fader modes.
•• Mute: Encoders mute/unmute the selected Send slot.
•• Send Parameter Page: Drag vertically, or enter an integer value to set the current page for the
Send parameters. Up to 32 parameters are available in Send Channel Strip view for a given
channel (eight Send slots multiplied by the four parameters listed above).
•• Split: no. of upper parameter: Drag vertically, or enter an integer value to set the number
of encoders that belong to Split Upper, for control surfaces that support Split mode. The
remaining encoders belong to Split Lower. A value of 0 means that Split mode is off—all
encoders are assigned to the Split Upper area.

Chapter 2    Basic control surface setup 23

 Control surfaces that support Split mode allow the display of two separate parameter sections
within one plug-in (or even different plug-ins). They are called Split Upper and Split Lower.
•• Instrument Parameter Page: Drag vertically, or enter an integer value to determine which
parameter is assigned to the leftmost encoder when editing a software instrument. The next
instrument parameter is assigned to encoder 2, and so on. This applies to Split Upper when
Split mode is turned on.
•• Inst Param Page (Split Lower): Drag vertically, or enter an integer value to set the parameter that
is assigned to the leftmost encoder of Split Lower when editing a software instrument when
Split mode is turned on. The next instrument parameter is assigned to encoder 2, and so on.
•• Insert Slot: Drag vertically, or enter an integer value to set the current Insert slot number, both
for selecting a plug-in (in Plug-in Channel Strip view) and for editing its parameters. The
default is 1, which sets the first (top) plug-in slot on each channel as the Insert slot. A value
of 2 sets the second plug-in slot as the Insert slot, and so on. This applies only to Split Upper
when Split mode is turned on.
•• Insert Slot (Split Lower): Drag vertically, or enter an integer value to set the current Insert slot
number for Split Lower when selecting or editing a plug-in when Split mode is turned on.
Note:  The effect plug-in and instrument page parameters are kept separate because this
allows you to quickly switch between editing an instrument and editing an effect plug-in on a
channel, without adjusting the parameter page every time.
•• Plug-in Parameter Page: Drag vertically, or enter an integer value to define which parameter
is assigned to the leftmost encoder when editing a plug-in. The next plug-in parameter
is assigned to encoder 2, and so on. This applies only to Split Upper when Split mode is
turned on.
•• Plug-in Param Page (Split Lower): Drag vertically, or enter an integer value to define which
parameter is assigned to the leftmost encoder of Split Lower when editing a plug-in with Split
mode turned on. The next plug-in parameter is assigned to encoder 2, and so on.
•• Channel Strip Track: Drag vertically, or enter an integer value to define which track is displayed
for Channel Strip views. This applies only to Split Upper when Split mode is turned on.
•• Channel Strip Track (Split Lower): Drag vertically, or enter an integer value to define which track
is displayed in the Split Lower section of the control surface for Channel Strip views, when
Split mode is turned on.
•• Track Lock checkbox: Click to determine how the control surface responds when a track is
selected in Logic Pro—in essence, this remotely affects the Track and Track (Split Lower)
parameters. When Track Lock is turned on, the control surface group continues to display the
same track, independent of the currently selected track in Logic Pro. When Track Lock is turned
off, the control surface group automatically switches to the track selected in Logic Pro.

Chapter 2    Basic control surface setup 24

Control Surface Group other parameters
The parameters at the bottom of the Control Surface Group parameters area let you set global
group parameters.

Other parameters
•• Track Name Format: Choose whether the track name display shows only the track name or the
track name and number.
•• Parameter Page Shift Mode: Choose whether the parameter is shifted by one page or by
one parameter.
•• Relative Change Mode: Choose the mode for controller assignments that support a Relative
Value Change mode (rotary encoders, for example). The choices are:
•• Coarse: The parameter is adjusted in coarse steps.
•• Full: Rotating the encoder to the right sets the maximum value and rotating it to the left
sets the minimum value. The encoder also stops at its default value. For example, when the
Pan knob is left of center, turning the encoder to the right initially sets the Pan parameter
to the center position (its default value). A further turn to the right sets Pan to full right (its
maximum value).
•• Fine: The parameter is incremented or decremented in fine steps—by one tick or other unit.
In this mode, the highest possible resolution is used. For example, when editing the Sample
Delay plug-in’s Delay parameter, every encoder tick increases or decreases the value by 1
sample, regardless of the resolution value.
•• Mix Group: Drag vertically, or enter an integer value to determine which group is edited when
in Group Edit mode.
•• Group Parameter Page: Drag vertically, or enter an integer value to define which parameter of
the edited group is assigned to the leftmost encoder.

Chapter 2    Basic control surface setup 25

 Control surfaces preferences
Open Control Surfaces preferences
Settings that affect the onscreen appearance and performance of control surfaces are changed
in the Control Surfaces preferences window. There are two preferences tabs: General Control
Surfaces preferences and Help Tags preferences.

Important:  If you want to make changes to the default assignments of control surfaces, you
need to use the Controller Assignments window Easy view or Expert view. See Controller
assignments overview. Easy view is available only when you click the Show Advanced Tools
checkbox in the Advanced Logic Pro preferences. Expert view is available only when you click
the Show Advanced Tools checkbox and the Control Surfaces checkbox in the Advanced Logic
Pro preferences.

Open the Control Surfaces preferences window

mm Choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Preferences (or use the Open Control Surfaces Preferences
key command).
Click the General or Help Tags tab to access the associated preferences.

Temporarily disable your control surfaces

mm Choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Bypass all Control Surfaces.
This command is useful for silencing motorized control surface faders when recording in
the same room. It is also handy when troubleshooting MIDI data errors or for reducing MIDI
bandwidth requirements.

General Control Surfaces preferences

General Control Surfaces preferences include resolution of relative controls, maximum MIDI
bandwidth, and other functions.

General preferences
•• Bypass All while in background checkbox: Turn on to allow your control surface to be shared
with other applications, when Logic Pro is not the active program.
•• Resolution of Relative Controls slider: Drag to set the resolution of controls that change values
in a relative manner. The default resolution is 128 steps. Choose a higher resolution value to
divide the value range into finer increments.

Chapter 2    Basic control surface setup 26

•• Maximum MIDI Bandwidth slider: Drag to set the maximum amount of MIDI bandwidth that
your control surface can use. This is set to a default of 50%, which should be suitable for most
situations. You can adjust the value if MIDI or automation playback is being affected.
•• Touching fader selects track checkbox: Turn on to select the track corresponding to the fader
when you touch a fader on the control surface.
Note:  This feature works only with devices that have touch-sensitive faders.
•• Control surface follows track selection checkbox: Turn on to automatically select the
corresponding track or channel on the control surface when you select a track in the
Tracks window.
•• Jog resolution depends on horizontal zoom checkbox: Turn on to link the precision of scrubbing
(using the Jog/Shuttle Wheel of your control surface) with the horizontal zoom level of Logic
Pro. Your control surface must feature a Jog/Shuttle Wheel (or similar control) for this to
have an effect. To retain a consistent resolution, regardless of Logic Pro window zoom levels,
deselect this checkbox.
•• Pickup Mode checkbox: Turn on to use your control surface in Pickup mode (if this mode is
available).
Some control surfaces, typically those without motorized faders or knobs, do not show
parameter changes—caused by playing back existing automation data—on their interface.
Such control surfaces usually offer a Pickup mode. In Pickup mode, the controller must reach
(“pick up”) the current value before the value starts to change. This feature prevents sudden
jumps of parameter values caused by playing back automation. Your device may provide a
display (usually a pair of arrow LEDs) that indicates the direction or distance you need to move
the controller, in order to match the settings shown in Logic Pro (also known as NULL). Once
you have matched the onscreen values, deactivate Pickup mode and start automating. When
Pickup mode is turned off, adjusting a fader modifies the parameter immediately (which can
result in parameter value jumps).
•• Flash Mute and Solo buttons checkbox: Turn on to make the Mute and Solo buttons on the
control surface blink (flash) on and off when mute or solo modes are engaged.
•• Multiple Controls per Parameter pop-up menu: Choose the maximum number of encoders used
for each parameter when editing plug-ins or audio instruments. The choices are:
•• 1: Parameters are always displayed using one encoder per parameter, with the least space
available for the parameter name and value in the LCD.
•• 2: On each unit, encoders 1 and 2 are used for the first parameter, encoders 3 and 4 for the
second, and so on.
•• 4: On each unit, encoders 1 to 4 are used for the first parameter, encoders 5 to 8 for the
second, and so on.
•• 8: On each unit, encoders 1 to 8 are used for the first parameter, encoders 9 to 16 for the
second, and so on.
When multiple encoders are used per parameter, the encoders are divided into groups (1/2,
3/4, 5/6, 7/8, for example). The first encoder of each group controls the parameter shown in
the display. The remaining encoders are inactive. Using more than one encoder per parameter
shows fewer parameters at any given time, but you gain space on the LCD to cater to longer
parameter names and values. The more control surfaces you have within a control surface
group, the more you benefit from this feature.
•• Only when all parameters fit on one page checkbox: Turn on to use the defined number of
encoders only when there are sufficient encoders available to show all parameters without
changing pages.

Chapter 2    Basic control surface setup 27

 For example, if you have a Mackie Control and two Mackie Control XTs (giving you a total
of 24 encoders), a plug-in with 13 parameters is shown with one encoder per parameter.
Eleven encoders remain unused. A plug-in with 11 parameters is shown with two encoders
per parameter. Two encoders remain unused (as do the inactive encoders of the subdivisions
mentioned above). When this parameter is turned off, multiple encoders are used for each
parameter, which may require scrolling. This is not the case if only one encoder is used for
each parameter.
•• Show value units for checkboxes: Turn on the two checkboxes to add the measurement unit
to parameter values, where applicable—“Hz” or “%,” for example. You can set this option
separately for instrument and plug-in parameters, and for volume and other channel strip
parameters. Turn off this option if viewing units makes the display too cluttered.
•• Controller Assignments button: Click to open the Controller Assignments window.
Important:  Easy view is available only when you click the Show Advanced Tools checkbox
in the Advanced Logic Pro preferences. Expert view is available only when you select the
Show Advanced Tools checkbox and the Control Surfaces checkbox in the Advanced Logic
Pro preferences.
•• Setup button: Click to open the Control Surfaces Setup window.

Help Tags preferences

For control surfaces that feature programmable displays with more than six characters per line or
segment of the display, you can change the way help tags are shown. Control surface help tags
show additional information during use.

Help Tags preferences

•• While editing show long names for checkboxes: Turn on the two checkboxes in this section to
determine how parameter names and values are displayed on the LCD of the control surface.
•• Parameter name checkbox: Turn on to show the full parameter name in the upper LCD line
when you edit a parameter.
•• Parameter value checkbox: Turn on to show the full parameter value in the lower LCD line
when you edit a parameter. If the Show value units for checkboxes (see below) are turned
on, the value is appended by the measurement unit, where applicable (for example, dB, Hz,
or %).
Note:  The following options only have an effect if at least one of the two parameters
described above is active.

Chapter 2    Basic control surface setup 28

•• Display Duration slider: Drag to adjust the time that parameter names and values remain on
the LCD, following selection and adjustments.
•• Show info for multiple parameters checkbox: Turn on to show the long name and information
in the LCD until the most recently edited parameter’s information display times out. This may
cause overlapping text. Turn off to limit the long name display to show only the most recently
edited parameter, which can cause screen flicker.
•• Show info when selecting tracks checkbox: Turn on to show “Selected” in the upper row of the
LCD and the selected track name in the lower LCD row when you select a track.
•• Show info when editing volume checkbox: Turn on to show “Volume” in the upper row of the
LCD and the edited value in the lower LCD row when you edit a track’s volume.
•• Show value units for checkboxes: Turn on to show the appropriate measurement unit (Hz or %,
for example) after parameter values. You can set this option separately for Instrument/plug-in
parameters and Volume and other parameters. If you can work without value units, the display
is less cluttered.
Note:  This parameter applies only while you are editing the relevant values.

Modal dialog display

All modal dialogs (except File Open dialogs) appear on the LCD display of control surfaces
that feature text displays. Examples of modal dialogs include authorization warnings, edit
confirmations, or error messages.

Important:  You cannot perform actions in any other window while a modal dialog is visible.

The modal dialog text appears in the upper row of the LCD. If the dialog text does not fit in
the LCD’s upper row, it scrolls after three seconds. You can scroll the dialog text manually with
an appropriate control for your device. Once you start scrolling the text manually, automatic
scrolling is disabled.
•• If your control surface has an Enter or OK button, pressing it triggers the dialog’s default
button, where applicable.
•• If your control surface has a Cancel or an Exit button, pressing it triggers the button labeled
Cancel or Abort, where applicable.
•• All buttons in the modal dialog (push buttons, including Enter, Default, and Cancel, as well as
checkboxes and radio buttons, but not pop-up menus) appear in the display’s lower row.

Pressing a control surface button below the display triggers the appropriate function in the
dialog, if applicable. Once you press an Enter or a Cancel button on the control surface or click it
onscreen, the dialog disappears, and all controls and displays return to their previous state.

When a File Open dialog appears onscreen, the “There is a file select dialog on the screen”
message appears on the LCD.

Chapter 2    Basic control surface setup 29

Control surface use tips
You may find that using control surfaces changes the way you use Logic Pro. Slight changes to
your working methods can help you to use control surfaces more effectively. The following hints
may streamline your Logic Pro control surface workflow.
•• Customize your templates
•• Set up screensets 1–7 as your most frequently used screensets. You can access these directly
on some control surfaces. On a Mackie Control, for example, you can access them with
function keys F1 to F7, while function key 8 (F8) closes the topmost window.
•• Assign a full-screen Tracks window, with track automation view set to On (for all tracks), as
one of your screensets.
•• Assign a full-screen Mixer window as another screenset.
•• Make use of markers
Markers allow you to quickly navigate from location to location in a project. Most control
surfaces feature a number of shortcuts that allow you to rapidly move between markers,
which is an effective way to move between positions in your projects.
Markers are also useful for creating or selecting cycle areas and a number of other tasks, such
as punch and replace recording.
If you tend to follow a particular song structure or like to work with a certain number of bars
(4, 8, 16 bars, and so on) for verse and chorus sections, set up a number of markers at suitable
locations in your templates.

Chapter 2    Basic control surface setup 30

Control surfaces supported by Logic Pro
The table shows control surfaces directly supported by Logic Pro.

Supported control surfaces communicate with Logic Pro via special plug-in files that are installed
with the application. The plug-in files are located in the /Contents/MIDI Device Plug-ins subfolder
of the Logic Pro application bundle. To view the bundle contents, Control-click the Logic Pro
application icon, and choose Show Package Contents from the shortcut menu. Logic Pro also
checks for control surface plug-ins installed in the ~/Library/Application Support/MIDI Device
Plug-ins and ~/Library/Application Support/MIDI Device Plug-ins folders.

When new control surface plug-ins are released independently of a Logic Pro update (or
supplied directly by the device manufacturer), place them in the folders described above or as
advised in the documentation supplied with the plug-in.

Supported devices Manufacturer Notes

01V96 Yamaha The Yamaha 01V96 emulates two
HUI units, using two virtual MIDI In
and Out connections over a USB
cable. See Set up your 01V96 on
page 235.
01X Yamaha The Yamaha 01X emulates a
Mackie Control. It does not
feature all controls available to
the Mackie units, however. Refer
to the 01X documentation for
details. Logic Pro recognizes the
01X as an 01X, and displays a
custom icon, but communication
is as with a Mackie Control unit.
See Mackie Control overview on
page 54.
02R96 Yamaha The Yamaha 02R96 emulates three
HUI units, using three virtual MIDI
In and Out connections over a USB
cable. See Set up your 02R96 on
page 247.
Baby HUI Mackie The Baby HUI is a smaller version
of the HUI. See Set up your
Baby HUI on page 158.
C4 Mackie The Mackie C4 is directly
supported. See Set up of your
C4 on page 180.
CM408T (System 5-MC) Euphonix See Set up your Euphonix
device on page 113.
CS-32 MiniDesk JLCooper See Set up your CS-32 MiniDesk on
page 140.
DM1000 Yamaha The Yamaha DM1000 emulates two
HUI units, using two virtual MIDI In
and Out connections over a USB
cable. See Set up your DM1000 on
page 254.

Chapter 2    Basic control surface setup 31

Supported devices Manufacturer Notes
DM2000 Yamaha The Yamaha DM2000 emulates
three HUI units, using three virtual
MIDI In and Out connections
over a USB cable. See Set up your
DM2000 on page 266.
FaderMaster 4/100 JLCooper See Set up your FaderMaster
4/100 on page 148.
FE-8/FW-1082/FW-1884 Tascam See Set up FW-1884, FE-8, or
FW-1082 on page 210.
HUI Mackie See Set up your HUI on page 162.
iControl M-Audio See iControl overview on page 104.
KONTROL49/microKONTROL Korg A larger version of the
microKONTROL. See Set
up microKONTROL and
KONTROL49 on page 152.
Logic Control Mackie/Emagic See Mackie Control overview on
page 54 for more details.
Logic Control XT Mackie/Emagic This is the extension unit for
the Logic Control. It only offers
the channel strip section,
making it less useful without a
Logic (or Mackie) Control. See
Mackie Control overview on
page 54.
Mackie Control Mackie The Mackie Control hardware is
similar to the Logic Control. The
front panel legend is different,
however. If your unit has firmware
version 1.02 or later, you can
use either the Logic Control
or Mackie Control mode. See
Mackie Control overview on
page 54.
Mackie Control Extender Mackie Mackie-badged version of the
Logic Control XT. If you have
firmware version 1.02 or later, you
can use either the Logic Control
or Mackie Control mode. See
Mackie Control overview on
page 54.
Mackie Control Universal Mackie A Mackie Control with
Logic Control silk screening
(legend) and firmware version 2.0
or later (including HUI emulation).
If your unit has firmware version
1.02 or later, you can use either the
Logic Control or Mackie Control
mode. See Mackie Control
overview on page 54.
MC Euphonix See Set up your Euphonix
device on page 113.
MCS3 JLCooper See Set up your MCS3 on page 149.

Chapter 2    Basic control surface setup 32

Supported devices Manufacturer Notes
microKONTROL Korg See Set up microKONTROL and
KONTROL49 on page 152.
Motormix CM Labs See Set up your Motormix on
page 125.
SAC-2.2/2k Radikal Technologies The SAC-2.2/2k’s native mode is
directly supported, but it can also
emulate a Mackie Control. You
should use the native mode. See
Set up your SAC-2K on page 192.
SI-24 Roland See Set up your SI-24 on page 203.
TranzPort Frontier Design Group See Set up your TranzPort on
page 135.
US-224/US-428 Tascam See Set up your US-428 or
US-224 on page 230.
US-2400 Tascam Use the US-2400’s native mode.
In contrast to its Mackie Control
mode, all controls, including the
joystick, are supported. See Set up
your US-2400 on page 221.

Software and firmware

Most control surfaces depend on Logic Pro for their functionality and cannot be operated if
Logic Pro is not running. They do not provide any additional functionality that is not available in
Logic Pro itself. One advantage of this approach is that as new functions are added to Logic Pro,
or as you create new assignments, your control surface can access and control them.

Most control surface units do include a form of software called firmware. Firmware is similar to
the low-level boot software found in your computer, mobile phone, iPod, and so on.

New behaviors, such as improved control of motorized faders and changes to the display, can be
provided by firmware updates. You should periodically visit the manufacturer’s website for your
device to check for updates that may enhance use or performance.

The firmware is usually stored on an EEPROM (Electronically Erasable Programmable Read-Only

Memory) chip. It can often be updated via a MIDI dump procedure, in the form of a MIDI file.
Should new firmware become available, you can download the appropriate MIDI file and play
it from Logic Pro to your control surface. The steps required to perform a firmware update are
outlined in the documentation that accompanies the MIDI file. Read all supplied documentation
before attempting any update.

Note:  Some control surfaces may require a hardware chip replacement for firmware updates.
Contact the manufacturer of your device for details.

Chapter 2    Basic control surface setup 33

Controller assignments
3
Controller assignments overview
You can assign any controller capable of generating a MIDI message to a parameter in Logic
Pro. Assigning controllers to Logic Pro parameters lets you use faders, knobs, switches, and other
controllers to remotely control Logic Pro functions. These can be used directly or in conjunction
with modifier keys.

Most supported control surfaces include preset controller assignments that become active when
you add the device to your system. You can change existing assignments for supported control
surfaces and create new assignments for both supported and unsupported devices. For example,
the default assignments of the F1 to F7 buttons on the Mackie Control open screensets 1 to 7
in Logic Pro. You can reassign these control surface buttons to other Logic commands—either
alone or in conjunction with the Command, Shift, Option, and Control modifier buttons on the
control surface—in any combination.

You can assign controllers to parameters in the Logic Pro Controller Assignments window, using
the Learn process. The Controller Assignments window has two views: a compact Easy view,
where you can assign channel strip and plug-in parameters, and the more extensive Expert view,
where you can create and edit any type of controller assignment, including global, automation,
and control surface group assignments. See Use Controller Assignments Easy view and Use
Expert view.

Important:  Easy view is available only when you select the Show Advanced Tools checkbox
in the Advanced Logic Pro preferences. Expert view is available only when you select the
Show Advanced Tools checkbox and the Control Surfaces checkbox in the Advanced Logic
Pro preferences.

The current controller assignments and all Control Surfaces preferences are stored in the ~/
Library/Containers/com.apple.logic10/Data/Library/Preferences/com.apple.logic.pro.cs file.

You do not need to explicitly save controller assignments or related preferences and settings.
These are automatically stored when you quit Logic Pro.

34
 Controller Assignments Easy view
Use Controller Assignments Easy view
Easy view allows you to see and assign controllers to channel strip and plug-in parameters and
to change the target track that assignments apply to.

Important:  Easy view is available only when you select the Show Advanced Tools checkbox in
the Advanced Logic Pro preferences.

The Easy view of the Controller Assignments window contains the following fields and buttons:
•• Expert View button: Click to open the editor in Expert view.
•• Back/Forward buttons: Click to move back and forth between assignments.
•• Link button: Turn on to automatically select the assignment that matches the most recently
received MIDI message.
•• Parameter field: Displays the name of the selected parameter.
•• Channel Strip pop-up menu: Choose whether the assignment applies to the selected track or
matches the channel strip number entered in the field beside the pop-up menu (as shown in
the Mixer’s All view).
•• Input message field: Displays the incoming MIDI message data of the controller being assigned
to a function.

Open the Controller Assignments window Easy view

mm Choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Controller Assignments (or press Command-K), then click
the Easy View button.

Chapter 3    Controller assignments 35

 Assign and delete controllers in Easy view
Only one set of assignment parameters is visible at a time in Easy view. You use the Learn process
to assign controllers to channel strip and plug-in parameters by moving a controller on your
control surface. This sends a MIDI message to Logic Pro, thus “teaching” it which controller you
are assigning to the chosen parameter.

Assign a controller in Easy view

1 In the Mixer, or in any plug-in window, select the parameter you want Logic Pro to learn as a
controller assignment.
2 Choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Learn Assignment for [parameter name]. (Alternatively,
you can use the Learn new Controller Assignment key command, default: Command-L, to open
the Controller Assignments window, and activate Learn mode.)
The Controller Assignments window opens in Easy view, with the Learn Mode button activated.
In most cases, the name of the selected parameter is shown in the Parameter field.
3 Move the hardware controller you want to assign to the selected parameter.
Moving the controller sends a MIDI message to Logic Pro, which appears in the “Input message”
field. This memorizes the controller assignment, and you can click the Learn Mode button to
complete the Learn process.
If you do not click the Learn Mode button, Learn mode remains active, allowing you to make
further assignments.
4 To make another assignment, select the parameter you want to assign in Logic Pro, then move
the controller on the control surface.
5 Click the Learn Mode button (or press Command-L) to complete the Learn process.

Assign a controller using a modifier key

1 To open the Controller Assignments window, choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Learn
Assignment for [parameter name] (or press Command-L).
2 Hold down the modifier key you want to use (Command, for example) as you select the
parameter you want to assign, while moving the control.
3 Click the Learn Mode button to complete the Learn process.
If Logic Pro receives a MIDI message from the device while you are holding down the modifier
key, the Learn Mode button is deactivated when you release the key, and the Learn process is
complete. If you release the modifier key before Logic Pro receives a MIDI message, the Learn
Mode button remains active, so you can still move a controller to send a MIDI message. In this
situation, be sure to click the Learn Mode button when you are finished to end the Learn process.

Assign a series of controllers to a series of parameters

Logic Pro includes a shortcut that makes it easy to assign a series of controllers to a series of
similar parameters. For example, you can use this shortcut to assign a series of faders to volume;
to assign a series of knobs or switches to other channel strip parameters such as pan, solo, or
mute; or to assign a series of controllers to a set of plug-in parameters.
1 In the Mixer, or in any plug-in window, select the parameter you want Logic Pro to learn as a
controller assignment.
2 Choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Learn Assignment for [parameter name]. (Alternatively,
you can use the Learn new Controller Assignment key command, default: Command-L, to open
the Controller Assignments window, and activate Learn mode.)

Chapter 3    Controller assignments 36

 The Controller Assignments window opens in Easy view, with the Learn Mode button activated.
In most cases, the name of the selected parameter is shown in the Parameter field.
3 Assign the first controller in the series to the first parameter (assign fader 1 to control volume for
channel strip 1, for example).
4 Assign the last controller in the series to the last parameter (assign fader 16 to control volume for
channel strip 16, for example). The number of controllers between the first and last in the series
must match the number of parameters between the first and last parameter. In the example, the
distance between 1 and 16 would equal 15.
A “Do you want to fill up in between?” dialog appears.
5 To automatically fill the controllers between the first and last with the corresponding
assignments, click OK.
Note:  You can only use shortcuts for knobs that send a single channel message, where the
first data byte is the controller number and the second data byte is the value. Alternatively, the
controller number can be encoded in the MIDI channel, with a fixed first data byte. Consult the
documentation that came with your device for information on its data structure.

Delete a controller assignment in Easy view

mm Select the assignment you want to remove in the Controller Assignments Easy View window,
then click the Delete button.

Chapter 3    Controller assignments 37

Controller Assignments Expert view
Use Expert view
You can use Expert view to make advanced controller assignments. These include Logic Pro
parameters other than channel strip and plug-in parameters. For example, you can assign
controllers to global, automation, and control surface group parameters in Expert view. You can
also edit controller assignments in Expert view and define zones and modes that let you switch
between groups of controllers.

Important:  Expert view is available only when you select the Show Advanced Tools checkbox
and the Control Surfaces checkbox in the Advanced Logic Pro preferences.

The Learn process opens the Controller Assignments window in Easy view, which shows the
basic parameters for the current assignment. To make assignments other than channel strip or
plug-in assignments or to edit other assignment parameters, you need to switch to Expert view.

Tip:  You can only switch back to Easy view if a track or plug-in parameter is selected.
Zone list Control/Parameter list

Controller Assignment
Parameter area

Input Message area

OSC Message Paths

area

Value area

Mode list

The Expert view of the Controller Assignments window contains the following:
•• Zone list: Displays the available zones for the device. The first entry “(No Zone)” is for zoneless
assignments—assignments that are always active, regardless of the active zone. Select a zone
in the list to see its modes (in the Mode list), and its current assignments (in the Control/
Parameter list). You can also double-click a zone to rename it. See Use zones and modes on
page 42.
•• Mode list: Displays the modes for the currently selected zone. The first entry “(No Mode)” is
for modeless assignments. Select a mode in the list to see its assignments in the Control/
Parameter list, and make it the selected zone’s active mode. You can also double-click a mode
to rename it. See Use zones and modes on page 42.
•• Control/Parameter list: Select the assignment you want to edit. The left column displays the
name of the control and the right column displays the (abbreviated) name of the parameter
being controlled. The parameters of the selected assignment appear in the fields to the right
of the list. See Expert view parameters on page 39.

Chapter 3    Controller assignments 38

 Note:  You can select multiple assignments in the list, but only the parameters of the first
selected assignment are displayed. When multiple assignments are selected, operations
performed via the Edit menu can be applied to all selected assignments. All other operations
apply only to the first assignment.
•• Controller Assignment Parameter area: All aspects of the selected controller assignment
parameter are shown, and can be changed, in this area. See Expert view parameters on
page 39.
•• Input Message area: The port and MIDI input message can be altered directly. Some fields
in this section are merely displays and cannot be changed. See Expert view Input Message
parameters on page 48.
•• Value area: The range of values, and response, of the controller assignment to incoming
messages is determined in this area. Feedback to the display of control surfaces can also be
determined here. See Expert view Value parameters on page 49.

Open the Controller Assignments window Expert view

mm Choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Controller Assignments (or press Command-K), then click
the Expert View button.

Expert view parameters

This section outlines each parameter shown in the fields on the right side of the Controller
Assignments window when in Expert view.

Controller Assignment parameters

•• Control Name field: Displays the name of the controller for supported devices. For unsupported
devices, Learned is displayed. See Control Name and Label fields on page 44.
•• Label field: Displays characters that represent the label for the assignment on the control
surface’s display. You can view this much like a scribble strip on a mixer. See Control Name and
Label fields on page 44.
•• Flip Group field: Enter an integer to define a flip group for the assignment. See Flip Group and
Exclusive parameters on page 44.
•• Class pop-up menu: Choose the class of parameter (parameter type) you want to assign. See
Class pop-up menu parameters on page 45.
Note:  Depending on the chosen class, different fields and pop-up menus for that class appear
below the Class pop-up menu.
•• Parameter/Mode pop-up menu and field: Depending on your choice in the Class pop-up menu,
you can choose from dozens of different parameters and modes. The options available change
as different classes are selected.

Chapter 3    Controller assignments 39

•• Group/Track/Command/Key field pop-up menu: These options also change depending on your
choice in the Class pop-up menu.
•• Bank Type pop-up menu: This pop-up menu determines the bank relationship of the assigned
parameter. This can be as per the Group setting, By One, or By Bank.

Input Message parameters

The area at the center right shows the following parameters. See Expert view Input Message
parameters on page 48 for details.
•• MIDI Input pop-up menu: Choose a MIDI input source (MIDI Port or Caps Lock Keyboard). This
can be changed by incoming MIDI messages, shown in the Value Change field.
•• Value Change field: Displays incoming MIDI messages that cause a value change.
•• Touch/Release field: Enter an integer value to force incoming MIDI messages to change the
touch/release state of the selected parameter. This only applies to control surfaces that
provide touch-sensitive controls (where touching or releasing a fader, for example, enables or
disables reception of data from the control surface).

Value parameters
The area at the bottom right shows the following parameters. See Expert view Value
parameters on page 49 for details.
•• Min and Max fields: Enter integer values to set the range of incoming MIDI values.
•• Format pop-up menu: Choose the format used to encode negative values.
•• Multiply field: Enter a value to scale incoming MIDI values.
•• Mode pop-up menu: Choose the mode used by incoming values to modify the current
parameter value.
•• Feedback pop-up menu and checkboxes: Choose the display format of the parameter value (on
the control surface display, if applicable).

Chapter 3    Controller assignments 40

 Assign and delete controllers in Expert view
You can use the Learn process to assign controllers in the Controller Assignments window
Expert view, just as you would in Easy view. You can also assign controllers to classes of Logic Pro
parameters that are not accessible in Easy view.

The procedure for reassigning an active controller (an assigned controller in the active mode) is
different from that of an inactive controller (one with an assignment in an inactive mode). See
Use zones and modes for information on modes.

Learn a controller for a non-channel strip or plug-in parameter

1 Choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Controller Assignments (or press Command-K), then click
the Expert View button.
2 Choose a zone or mode unless you want to make a modeless assignment, then click the plus
button in the lower-left corner of the Control/Parameter list.
A new, blank assignment appears in the Control/Parameter list.
3 Click the Learn Mode button to start the Learn process.
4 Move the controller that you want to assign to the selected parameter.
Moving the controller sends a MIDI message to Logic Pro, thus “teaching” Logic Pro which
controller you are assigning. The Learn Mode button remains active, allowing you to make
further assignments. The incoming MIDI message appears in the Input message field.
5 Choose the class of parameter you want to assign from the Class pop-up menu.
6 Assign the parameter by making choices in the pop-up menus and fields that appear below the
Class pop-up menu.
Note:  A detailed explanation of classes and other assignment parameters can be found in Class
pop-up menu parameters on page 45.
7 Click the Learn Mode button (or press Command-L) to complete the Learn process.
Tip:  You can use the shortcut described in Assign a series of controllers to a series of
parameters on page 36 to assign a series of controllers to a series of similar parameters.

Delete an assignment in Expert view

Should you accidentally move the wrong controller in Learn mode, you can easily delete an
unwanted assignment.
1 Select the assignment you want to delete in the Control/Parameter list.
2 Choose Edit > Delete (or press the Delete key).

Reassign an active controller

mm Use the Learn process to assign an active controller (one with an assignment in the active mode),
then choose one of the options shown in the dialog:

•• Cancel: Click to delete the new assignment, retaining the existing assignment.
•• Keep both: Click to retain the new and old assignments.
This is generally used when one knob controls multiple parameters as a macro.

Chapter 3    Controller assignments 41

 •• Reassign: Click to delete all existing active assignments for this parameter.
Use this option to reassign a function key such as F1 to F8 to a new key command.

Reassign an inactive controller

Supported control surfaces generally have empty user pages available, allowing for new encoder
assignments. You would select a particular user page mode (page 3, for example), then learn an
assignment for the encoder.
mm Use the Learn process to assign a controller in an inactive mode.
Note:  The new assignment becomes part of the active mode in the same zone that contained
the previous, inactive assignment.

Use zones and modes

You can define a group of controllers as a zone in Expert view and switch all controls in a zone
to different parameters. Using a Mackie Control, for example, you can define the eight rotary
encoders as a zone and switch them between pan, send level, and plug-in parameters. You can
also define multiple zones for a control surface: one zone for the encoders, and a second zone
that switches the function keys (F1 to F8) to different functions.

Each set of zone parameters is called a mode. A zone can contain one or more modes, but only
one mode can be active at any given time. A zone can also contain assignments that are always
active, regardless of the active mode. These are known as modeless assignments.

The simultaneous use of modal and modeless assignments allows you to do things such as:
•• Define a zone that switches between two modes or functions by pressing and releasing a
control surface modifier button (such as Shift or Option)—while using a particular function
button on the control surface.
•• Define a zone that allows you to use modeless assignments for display updates, transport
functions, and Save or Undo operations. The same zone could contain a modal assignment
for all Volume and Pan controls. Switching to another mode could provide access to EQ
parameters. In both modal situations, the display, transport, and Save or Undo functions would
be available.

A mode can contain any number of assignments. Only the assignments for the active mode are
processed by Logic Pro. Assignments of inactive modes are ignored. You can switch the active
mode for a zone by making special assignments.

Zones and modes can be defined across multiple control surfaces to support the use of control
surface groups.

The illustration shows one possible hierarchical arrangement of zones and modes.

Zone 1 Zone 2

Modeless Assignment A Mode 3 (inactive)

Modeless Assignment B Modal Assignment A

Mode 1 (inactive) Mode 4 (active)

Modal Assignment A Modal Assignment A
Modal Assignment B
Mode 5 (inactive)
Mode 2 (active) Modal Assignment A
Modal Assignment A Modal Assignment B
Modal Assignment B Modal Assignment C
Modal Assignment C Modal Assignment D

Chapter 3    Controller assignments 42

 Define a zone
1 Choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Controller Assignments (or press Command-K), then click
the Expert View button.

2 Click the Add button in the lower-left corner of the Zone list.
A new, blank zone appears in the Zone list. It is highlighted, allowing you to immediately
rename it.
3 Enter a name for the zone.
If you want to add controllers to the zone, see Assign and delete controllers in Expert view on
page 41.

Define a mode
1 Choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Controller Assignments (or press Command-K), then click
the Expert View button.
2 Click the Add button in the lower-left corner of the Mode list.
A new, blank mode appears in the Mode list. It is highlighted, allowing you to immediately
rename it.
3 Enter a name for the mode.

Chapter 3    Controller assignments 43

Control Name and Label fields
The Control Name and Label fields are shown at the top right of the Controller Assignment
parameters in the Expert View window.

Control Name and Label parameters

•• Control Name field: Shows the name of the control. For supported devices, the control surface
name is used. For assignments created with the Learn process on unsupported control
surfaces, the control name defaults to “Learned.” You can enter a new name in the field. The
control name is for display only and has no effect on function.
•• Label field: Shows characters that represent the label for the assignment that appears on the
control surface display—for supported control surfaces. Unsupported control surfaces can
only send information, not receive it, and therefore cannot display an assignment label.
If the field contains fixed text, it can contain any number of characters. When used as a
placeholder for dynamically created text, however, the field contains three characters that
represent the label. The first character is always @, followed by two additional characters. For
example, “Send@s#” translates as “Send1,” “Send2,” and so on.
•• Second Character: This character is used to define a type for the event label. For example:
t=track, r=surround, s=send slot, S=number of sends, e=EQ band, E=number of EQs, p=insert
slot, i=instrument slot, and so on.
•• Third Character: This character is used to define a value for the chosen event label type, such
as the track number or name. For example: #=number of track, send slot, EQ band, insert slot,
and so on, n=name, p=name of parameter addressed by the assignment, P=name of first
parameter, o=parameter offset—counted from 1, O=maximum parameter offset—counted
from 1, b=parameter bank offset or bank size—counted from 1, B=total number of banks—
counted from 1.

Flip Group and Exclusive parameters

The Flip Group field and Exclusive checkbox are shown in the Controller Assignment parameters
at the top right of the Expert View window.

Flip Group and Exclusive parameters

•• Flip Group Field: Enter the same integer value for two assignments to define a counterpart for
Flip mode—for supported control surfaces that provide Flip mode. By setting a fader and an
encoder to the same flip group, for example, they are coupled. To set “none,” enter a value of 0.
For unsupported devices, you need to set up two active assignments, both of which use the
same flip group. One assignment needs to be absolute (using a fader, for example), and the
other assignment needs to be relative (an encoder, for example).
•• Exclusive checkbox: Turn on to deactivate all other assignments that have Exclusive turned
off for the same control on supported control surfaces. This limits a modeless assignment to
particular modes. For example, faders normally control volume. To create a mode where faders
control the send level, select Exclusive.

Chapter 3    Controller assignments 44

Class pop-up menu parameters
Choose the class of assignment (the type of destination parameter controlled) from the pop-up
menu. Different options appear below the Class pop-up menu when you choose a class. The
following describes the different classes, and the options available for each.

Class pop-up menu parameters

•• Mode Change: Choose to use an assignment to switch from one mode to another. An
additional Mode pop-up menu appears below the Class pop-up menu, allowing you to choose
between available modes. For example, Mackie Control assignment buttons can be used to
choose different modes for the encoders. The mode chosen in the Mode pop-up menu is
activated only when the Mode menu is set to Direct. If any other Mode menu item is chosen,
the following applies:
•• Toggle: The assignment toggles between the zone’s first mode and the chosen mode. The
mode change assignment must be located in the same zone.
•• Relative: Use to step up and down through modes in a zone (using two buttons) or to
choose a mode with an encoder. The minimum destination parameter represents this
zone’s first mode, and the maximum represents the zone’s last mode. The mode change
assignment must be located in the same zone.
•• Rotate: Use to step through all available modes with a single button press. For example, if
used with a Jog Wheel, a single button press would cycle between Off, Scrub, Shuttle, and
then back to Off. The minimum destination parameter represents this zone’s first mode,
and the maximum represents the zone’s last mode. The mode change assignment must be
located in the same zone.
•• Global: Choose to use an assignment to control global parameters. A Parameter pop-up menu
appears below the Class pop-up menu, showing the parameters listed below. These only work
in relative mode, where changes are relative to the starting value or position.
•• Playhead: Controls the position of the playhead; feedback is sent in the format chosen in the
control surface group’s Clock Display parameter.
•• Playhead (Beats): As above, but feedback is sent in beats format.
•• Playhead (Time Code): As above, but feedback is sent in SMPTE timecode format.
•• Playhead (Beats, Scrubbing): Moving the controller initiates scrubbing. The format is
defined by the control surface group’s Format parameter. The controller value defines the
scrubbing speed.
•• Move Locators: Moves the left and right locators.
•• Left Locator: Sets the left locator.
•• Right Locator: Sets the right locator.
•• Move Punch Locators: Moves the punch in and punch out locators.
•• Left Locator: Sets the punch in locator.
•• Right Locator: Sets the punch out locator.
•• Marker Position: Edits the position of the current marker.
•• Marker Length: Edits the length of the current marker.
•• Nudge selected Regions/Events: Nudges the selected regions or events by the chosen nudge
value. (See “Nudge Value” below.)
•• Any Solo: Feedback only. On if any (track or region) Solo button is active.
•• Nudge Value: Sets the value used for Nudge selected Regions/Events. Choose from: tick,
division, beat, bar, frame, and 1/2 frame.

Chapter 3    Controller assignments 45

 •• Scrub Status: Sets the scrubbing status for the Playhead parameter (beats, scrubbing). Choose
from: set clock, audio scrubbing, shuttle.
•• Automation of all tracks: Switches the automation state of all tracks between the following
values: Off, Read, Touch, Latch, and Write.
•• Alert Text, Alert Button, Alert Icon: Used by plug-ins to define a special Alert mode. This is
mainly of use to control surface developers.
•• Dummy: Used to temporarily disable a modeless assignment, by using the Exclusive
checkbox. See Flip Group and Exclusive parameters on page 44.
•• Cycle: Turns Cycle mode on and off.
•• Autopunch: Turns Autopunch mode on and off.
•• Go to Marker: Moves the playhead to a marker number. An additional number field below
the Parameter pop-up menu is used to determine the destination marker number.
•• Group Clutch: Sets the automation group clutch; automation groups are disabled when the
clutch is enabled. For buttons, sets the group clutch to 1 when the button is pressed, and
sets it to 0 when the button is released.
•• Active Sense: Used by some control surfaces such as the HUI to process incoming Active
Sensing messages.
•• Shuttle Speed: Sets the forward and backward shuttle speed. Use this for controllers that send
an absolute, rather than relative, value.
•• Waveform Zoom: Sets the waveform zoom level in the key focus window.
•• Quantize Value: Sets the Quantize value in the key focus window.
•• Division: Sets the Division value in the key focus window.
•• Horizontal Zoom: Sets the horizontal zoom level in the key focus window.
•• Vertical Zoom: Sets the vertical zoom level in the key focus window.
•• Channel Strip: Choose to use an assignment to set a channel strip parameter. A Channel Strip
pop-up menu appears below the Class pop-up menu, showing the following parameters.
•• Selected track: Corresponds to the selected track except when the control surface group’s
Track Lock parameter is active. In this case, the selected track is the one that was chosen
when Track Lock was enabled.
•• Fader Bank: Addresses a channel strip in the control surface group’s current View (Arrange,
All, Tracks, Single). This is dependent on the current Fader Bank value for this mode. For
example, if the View is All, the All view Fader Bank is five, and the number next to this
parameter is two. Thus, the eighth channel strip in the All view is addressed (Fader Bank and
No. are zero-based, so add 1).
•• Index: Same as the Fader Bank setting, but is not dependent on the current Fader Bank value.
•• Audio: An audio channel. The numerical value (No.) determines which audio channel is
addressed (zero-based; to address audio channel 2, use a value of 1).
•• Software Instrument: A software instrument channel. The numerical value (No.) determines
which channel is addressed (zero-based; to address channel 2, use a value of 1).
•• Bus: A Bus channel. The numerical value (No.) determines which channel is addressed (zero-
based; to address Bus 2, use a value of 1).
•• Auxiliary: An Aux channel. The numerical value (No.) determines which channel is addressed
(zero-based; to address Bus 2, use a value of 1).
•• Output: An Output channel. The numerical value (No.) determines which channel is
addressed (zero-based; to address Bus 2, use a value of 1).

Chapter 3    Controller assignments 46

 •• Master: The Master channel strip; if it does not exist in the project, the first output channel
strip is addressed.
If you choose the Fader Bank, Index, Audio, Software Instrument, Bus, Auxiliary, Output, or
Master setting from the Channel Strip pop-up menu, the following two parameters become
available:
•• Number field: A zero-based offset, which is added to the channel strip number. The typical
use for this field is for sequential controls: Fader 1 uses offset 0, Fader 2 uses offset 1, and
so on.
•• Parameter field: Text description of the addressed parameter. Can only be set by choosing
the Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Learn Assignment for [parameter name] menu item. Note
that for plug-in and instrument parameters, Parameter Page offsets apply, allowing you to
shift the parameter addressing up and down by page.
•• Key: Choose to use assignments to emulate computer keyboard keystrokes. You can enter
the key to emulate in the Key field, which appears below the Class pop-up menu. This is not
case-sensitive.
•• Key Command: Choose to use an assignment to perform a key command. You can enter the
key command in the Command field, which appears below the Class pop-up menu. Some key
commands provide on/off or enabled/disabled feedback.
If you want your key command assignment to be executed repeatedly, select the Key Repeat
checkbox at the bottom of the Controller Assignments window. For further information, see
Expert view Value parameters on page 49. Click the Show button to open the Key Commands
window. The key command shown in the Command field is automatically selected and shown
in the Key Commands window.
•• Control Surface Group: Choose to set a property for the control surface group that the
assignment belongs to. When you choose this class, a Parameter pop-up menu appears below
the Class pop-up menu. This pop-up menu allows you to choose a Control Surface Group
parameter (see Control Surface Group parameters overview on page 20), or one from those
listed below.
Note:  Assignments for unsupported control surfaces always belong to the first control
surface group.
•• Fader Bank for Current View: Maps to the fader bank for the currently used View allowing you
to use one assignment per left or right button for all View modes.
•• Filter for All View: Choose to show eight additional checkboxes (for the eight channel strip
types) when the View is All. Depending on the Value mode, these switches define which
channel strips are displayed (by using Direct mode) or which are toggled (by using X-OR
mode).
•• Fader Bank for: Channel strip choices are: MIDI, Input, Audio, Instrument, Aux, Bus, Output.
These fader bank parameters are used in All View when only one channel strip type is
displayed. This allows you to switch between several channel strip types, while retaining the
current fader bank for each type.
If you choose one of the fader bank or parameter page settings from the Parameter pop-up
menu, the following Bank Type options appear below the pop-up menu.
•• By One: The fader bank or parameter page is shifted by one channel strip or parameter.
•• By Bank: The fader bank or parameter page is shifted by the number of displayed channel
strips or parameters.
•• CS Group Setting: The fader bank or parameter page is shifted by the value defined for the
Parameter Page Shift Mode control surface group parameter.

Chapter 3    Controller assignments 47

•• Automation Group: Choose to use the assignment to set an automation group parameter.
When chosen, a Group field appears below the Class pop-up menu. You can determine the
edited group by entering a number in the field. Entering a “0” sets this parameter to the group
selected for the Automation Group parameter (in the control surface group parameters). A
Parameter pop-up menu also appears below the Group field, allowing you to choose the
automation group parameter for the assignment. For further information, see the Group
Settings section of the Logic Pro Help.

Expert view Input Message parameters

The parameters in this section let you control different aspects of MIDI input.

Input Message parameters

•• MIDI Input pop-up menu: Choose a MIDI input port to change all assignments that use the
same input port. If the assignment belongs to a supported control surface, the device’s MIDI
input also changes in the Setup window.
This makes it easy for you to create default assignments for a new control surface. These new
assignments can be moved to other computers by copying and pasting your preferences
file into the Preferences folder of another computer. You can then open the Controller
Assignments window in Expert view on the other computer and change the MIDI Input
parameter of one assignment.
•• Value Change field: Shows incoming MIDI messages that cause a value change in the
destination parameter, and lets you edit these MIDI messages.
The Value Change field displays the message as a sequence of hexadecimal bytes. The plain
language meaning appears below the field. The placeholders for the variable part of the
message are:
•• Lo7: Low 7 bits of the value (LSB or Least Significant Bits)
•• Hi7: High 7 bits of the value (MSB or Most Significant Bits)
For messages containing only a Lo7 placeholder, the value is treated as 7 bit. For messages
containing both a Lo7 and Hi7 placeholder, the value is treated as 14 bit. The order of Lo7 and
Hi7 is honored, and there may be constant bytes in between. This allows you to define Control
Change LSB and MSB portions. For example, B0 08 Hi7 B0 28 Lo7 indicates a 14-bit message.
Note:  When you enter multiple MIDI messages, always enter each message completely, being
sure to repeat the status byte, even if it’s the same. It may help to write out the message
to ensure that the correct byte works, as you can’t know what status the previously sent
message had.
For messages containing neither Lo7 nor Hi7 placeholders, Logic Pro assumes an incoming
value of 1. This is typical for pressed or released buttons. Also see Multiply field in Expert view
Value parameters on page 49.
•• Touch/Release field: Enter an integer value to use the incoming MIDI message for status
changes of the destination parameter from touched to released, or vice versa. A non-zero
value means touched; a value of 0 means released. The messages are shown and edited in the
same way as the Value Change field.
Note:  The Touch/Release setting applies only to the Channel Strip assignment class and to
parameters that can be automated.

Chapter 3    Controller assignments 48

OSC Message Paths
The parameters in this section let you edit the OSC paths used to communicate with OSC
devices. The OSC protocol allows for realtime communication between software and hardware
over a network, or using USB or other serial interfaces. The current OSC implementation in Logic
supports UDP and IPv4 network connections only.

OSC Message Path parameters

•• Value field: Determine the message for sending the parameter value. Normally the value is a
normalized float, such as 0.0 to 1.0.
Note:  There is an exception to the normalized value rule: feedback for global and control
surface group parameters is always sent non-normalized. As an example, the current fader
bank is sent as per its integer form, but in float format (0.0, 1.0, 2.0 and so on).
•• Touch/Release field: Choose from the following values: 1.0 indicates touched and a value of 0.0
indicates released.
•• Label field: Displays the parameter name.
•• Value String field: Displays the current parameter value.

Expert view Value parameters

The parameters in this section let you control different aspects of the values for incoming
MIDI messages.

Value parameters
•• Min and Max fields: Enter an integer value to set the minimum and maximum range for
incoming values represented by Lo7 and Hi7. Typically, the minimum defaults to 0, and the
maximum defaults to 127. Some control surfaces (such as the CM Labs Motor Mix) may use the
same message, with different value ranges, for different controls. For more specific information,
refer to the documentation that came with your device.
•• Format pop-up menu: Choose the encoding format for negative values in the 7-bit portions
sent over MIDI. The choices are:
•• Unsigned: No negative values are possible. The full 7- or 14-bit range is treated as a positive
number. The value range is 0 to 127 (7 bit) or 0 to 16383 (14 bit).
•• 2’s complement: If the most significant bit is set, the value is negative. To obtain the absolute
value, invert all bits and add 1. The value range is from –128 (7 bit) to 127 or –8192 to 8191 (14
bit).
•• 1’s complement: If the most significant bit is set, the value is negative. To set the absolute
value, invert all bits. Note that this allows two possible encoding values for zero. The value
range is –127 to 127 (7 bit) or –8191 to 8191 (14 bit).
•• Sign Magnitude: If the most significant bit is set, the value is negative. To set the absolute
value, clear the most significant bit. Note that this allows two possible encoding values for
zero. The value range is –127 to 127 (7 bit) or –8191 to 8191 (14 bit).

Chapter 3    Controller assignments 49

 Note:  The appropriate format for a device is usually specified in its documentation.
If unavailable, check the control surface manufacturer’s website or contact them for
more information.
•• Multiply field: Enter a scaling value for incoming values. This is useful for button presses that
have a value of 1. For example:
•• To set the automation mode to Write: Set Multiply to 4.00, and Mode to Direct.
•• To decrement a parameter by 1 with a button press: Set Multiply to –1.00, and Mode to Relative.
•• Mode pop-up menu: Choose the mode used by incoming values to modify the current
parameter value. The choices are:
•• Direct: The incoming value is used as the parameter value.
•• Toggle: If the parameter’s current value is 0, it is set to the incoming value. All other values
set the parameter value to 0. This option is useful for buttons that toggle a value, such as
Mute or Solo.
•• Scaled: The incoming value is scaled from its value range to the destination parameter’s
value range. This is useful for faders and rotary encoders.
•• Relative: The incoming value is added to the parameter’s current value. This is commonly
used for encoders but is also useful for buttons that increment or decrement by a certain
amount—specified by the Multiply parameter.
•• Rotate: The incoming value is added to the parameter’s current value, cycling between
maximum and minimum values. This is useful for button presses that cycle between modes,
such as automation mode.
•• X-OR: The value defines a bit mask (a filter), which is applied to the parameter’s current
value with the “exclusive or” Boolean operation. This is useful for enabling or disabling single
channel strip types in All view.
Note:  For On/Off parameters, Mode is set to Toggle by default. It is set to Scaled for absolute
controls (faders and knobs, for example) or to Relative for encoders.
•• Feedback pop-up menu: Choose the display format for the parameter’s current value on the
control surface display. The choices are:
•• None: No feedback is sent.
•• Single Dot/Line: LED rings: only one LED; LCDs: a single vertical line.
•• Left to Right Bar: A bar from the minimum to the current value.
•• Bar from Center: A bar from the center position to the current value.
•• Right to Left Bar: A bar from the current value to the maximum.
•• Q/Spread: Two equal bars from the center to the current value.
•• Ascending Bar: A bar from the bottom to the current value.
•• Descending Bar: A bar from the top to the current value.
•• Text Only: LED rings: no feedback; LCDs: no feedback as a graphics element.
•• Automatic: Depending on the currently assigned parameter, the most suitable feedback
mode is used: Plug-in and Instrument parameters carry this information, Pan displays a
single dot or line (Single Dot/Line), and all other parameters display a bar that runs from left
to right (Left to Right Bar).
Note:  Feedback only works for supported control surfaces, and not all settings are available for
all controls.

Chapter 3    Controller assignments 50

•• Text Feedback checkbox: Turn on to send a text representation of the current value to the
control surface’s display. The control surface display capabilities determine the display position
and number of characters that are used.
•• Local Feedback (Fader/Knob) checkbox: Turn on to stop feedback while the parameter is in
Touch mode. This prevents motorized faders from “fighting” against the user.
•• Key Repeat checkbox: Turn on to repeatedly execute the assignment. The Key Repeat Rate
slider—set in OS X Keyboard preferences—determines how quickly Logic Pro repeats the
assignment. The duration that the button must be held for before the assignment is repeated
is set with the Delay Until Repeat slider in Keyboard preferences.
Key Repeat is useful for the zoom function. For example, if you assign a Key Repeat command
to the Mackie Control Zoom buttons, holding the Zoom In button will continuously zoom in
the Logic Pro window until the button is released. The alternative is to repeatedly press the
Mackie Control Zoom buttons to zoom in or out more than one level.
Note:  The Key Repeat checkbox is available only for key commands, key presses, and relative
value changes. If any other assignment class is selected, the checkbox is dimmed.
The default key command assignments support the Key Repeat function if useful or applicable
to the control surface or device, making changes unnecessary to use this function. If you
want to enable the Key Repeat function for your own assignments, you may need to use the
re-learn option for the assigned message. Key Repeat messages must include the Lo7 byte,
which provides information on the up (released) or down (pressed) state of the assigned
button. Logic Pro guides you through the re-learning process. The current MIDI message
is automatically cleared, Learn mode is activated, and a help tag prompts you to send the
required MIDI message. Releasing the assigned button—after learning the MIDI message—
automatically creates the Lo7 byte, and assigns the Lo7 value (for the button release message)
to the Min parameter. The Lo7 value for the button pressed message is automatically assigned
to the Max parameter. Typically, the value range of 1 to 127 is used for the button pressed
message. The zero (0) value is generally used for the button release message.
Note:  Some control surfaces, such as CM Labs Motormix, may use different value ranges.
Assigning appropriate Min and Max values ensures that the Key Repeat function works with
such devices. Take care when manually changing the Min or Max value for a key command
because the complete assignment does not work in cases where the Min and Max values
do not match the button pressed (on) and button released (off) states. Consult your control
surface manual for further information about the values it uses.

Chapter 3    Controller assignments 51

 Assign buttons to key commands
In addition to assigning controllers to parameters, you can assign control surface buttons—and
button or key release messages—to key commands.

Assign a control surface button to a key command

1 To open the Key Commands window, choose Logic Pro > Key Commands.

2 In the Command list, click the disclosure triangle next to the category whose commands you
want to reveal, then select the key command you want to assign. You can also search for the key
command in the Search field.
3 Click the Learn New Assignment button.
4 Press the control surface button that you want to assign to the key command. This sends a MIDI
message to Logic Pro.
The name of the controller appears in the Assignments field.
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to make additional assignments.
6 To exit the window, click the close button.

Assign a button or key release message to a key command

1 To open the Key Commands window, choose Logic Pro > Key Commands.
2 In the Command list, click the disclosure triangle to reveal the commands for a category, then
select the key command you want to assign (or use the Search field).
3 Hold down the control surface button or key that you want to assign to the key command.
4 Click the Learn New Assignment button.
5 Release the button or key.
The name of the button or key appears in the Assignments field.
6 To exit the window, click the close button.

Chapter 3    Controller assignments 52

 Delete a key command assignment
1 To open the Key Commands window, choose Logic Pro > Key Commands.
2 Select the key command with an assignment you want to delete in the Command list.
3 Select the assignment for the key command in the Assignments field.
4 Press the Delete key.

Chapter 3    Controller assignments 53

Mackie Control
4
Mackie Control overview
You can control Logic Pro with a Mackie Control and can extend its functionality with several
expansion devices, such as the XT and C4 units.

The controls of the Mackie Control are physically grouped into different areas that are clearly
labeled and distinguished by different shades of gray on the device. The Mackie Control features
and functions described in the documentation are organized by these groupings.

Any powered Mackie Control unit that is connected to your system is automatically detected
when you open Logic Pro. You can use the Mackie Control immediately—with the default
settings—or you can customize its settings, as described in Controller assignments overview on
page 34.

Once set up, you can use the Mackie Control to control Logic Pro in the following ways, or
perhaps take an alternate approach that best meets your working preferences.
•• With your project open in the Tracks window, select the channel strips you want to control by
pressing the fader bank buttons on the Mackie Control. See Mackie Control Bank buttons.
•• Select the parameters you want to edit, and whether you want to edit multiple channels
(Mixer view) or a single channel (Channel view), using the Assignment buttons. See
Mackie Control Assignment buttons overview on page 60.
•• Start playback, and move the playhead to the position where you want to work, using the
Mackie Control transport buttons and Jog Wheel. See Mackie Control transport buttons
overview on page 82 and Mackie Control Jog/Scrub wheel on page 89.
•• Edit the project with the channel strip controls. See Mackie Control channel strips overview on
page 57 and Mackie Control V-Pots.

Note:  The term Mackie Control is used for the Mackie Control Universal, the original
Mackie Control, the Logic Control, and the Mackie (or Logic) Control Extender (XT) throughout
the documentation.

54
Mackie Control displays
Mackie Control displays overview
The displays are located along the top of the Mackie Control. Each shows different information:

Displays
•• Main Liquid Crystal Display (LCD): The main LCD is divided into eight columns, each with two
lines of text. Each column displays information for the channel strip controls directly below it.
The information displayed changes when you edit different parameters and when Mixer view
or Channel view is active. In general, the upper row of each column displays the abbreviated
track (or channel) name, and the lower row displays the abbreviated parameter name and
its value.
In some modes, a long parameter name (or other text) appears briefly onscreen while you are
moving the corresponding control. You can set the display and duration of long parameter
names in Control Surfaces preferences. For information on setting preferences, see Open
Control Surfaces preferences on page 26.
Note:  On the LCD, 8-bit ASCII characters such as curly quotes and umlauts are replaced with
the best-possible 7-bit ASCII equivalent.
•• Assignment display: The Assignment display (also referred to as the mode display), to the right
of the main LCD, shows a two-digit abbreviation for the current assignment state. A period (.)
appears at the bottom-right corner of the display when Channel view is active.
•• Time display: The Time display, to the right of the Assignment display, shows the current
playhead position, either in musical time divisions (BEATS) or in SMPTE timecode format
(SMPTE). A small LED to the left of the display indicates the current display format.
•• When the format is set to Beats, the four segments of the Time display show the current
playhead position as bars, beats, beat subdivisions, and ticks.
•• When the format is set to SMPTE, the four segments of the Time display show the current
playhead position as hours, minutes, seconds, and frames.
Press the SMPTE/BEATS button to switch between formats. You can also set the default format
with the Clock Display parameter in the Control Surfaces Setup window. See Control surface
inspector overview on page 18.
•• Solo LED: The Solo LED (Rude Solo on the Mackie Control) is lit when a channel strip is set to
solo or when Solo mode is turned on. It is a helpful reminder in situations where you have
soloed a channel strip, then switched the fader bank, resulting in the Solo LED of the soloed
channel strip being hidden on the control surface.

Mackie Control display control buttons

The control buttons, located just below the left edge of the Time display, affect what you see in
the main LCD and Time display.

Display buttons
•• SMPTE/BEATS: Press the SMPTE/BEATS button to switch between the two time formats (SMPTE
time or beats). See Mackie Control displays overview on page 55.
•• NAME/VALUE: Press the NAME/VALUE button to switch between the two parameter display
formats (either the parameter name or value is shown) on the main LCD.
Hold down the SHIFT button, then press the NAME/VALUE button to cycle through three level
meter modes on the main LCD:

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 55

 •• Vertical: In this mode, the last character of each channel (in both LCD rows) is overlaid by a
vertical bar that shows the channel level. The text characters reappear when the level meter
is not visible.
•• Horizontal with Peak Hold: In this mode, the lower row of the LCD is replaced by horizontal
channel level bars. Peak Hold appears as a hollow box, which disappears after a few seconds.
Signal overloads (clipping) are indicated by an asterisk, which remains on the LCD display
until cleared.
•• Off: In this mode, no level meter bars are displayed in the main LCD.
In all three modes, the SIGNAL LEDs of the channel strips function as per usual, indicating the
presence of a signal.
Hold down the CONTROL button, then press the NAME/VALUE button to clear any overload
(clipping) indicators in the Logic Pro Mixer and in the LCD if the Horizontal with Peak Hold
mode is active.
Hold down the CMD/ALT or OPTION button, then press the NAME/VALUE button to turn on
Control Surface Group Settings mode. This mode lets you edit the outlined control surface
group settings, some of which are not accessible with a single button.
You can exit Control Surface Group Settings mode by pressing NAME/VALUE or by entering
one of the Marker or Nudge modes. See Mackie Control Marker button overview and
Mackie Control Nudge button overview.

Control Action
V-POT 5 Sets the track name display format.
•• Name: Displays the track name only.
•• No: Name: Displays the track number and name.
V-POT 6 Switches Channel view to Lock mode.
•• Off: The standard mode, in which selecting a
channel strip makes it the active (currently being
edited) channel strip.
•• On: Locks the active channel strip. Selection
of another channel strip has no impact on the
channel strip being edited.
When you switch from On to Off, the channel strip is
also updated.
V-POT 7 Switches the LCD display format.
•• Name: The upper line of the LCD displays global
information, and the lower line displays parameter
names.
•• Value: The upper line of the LCD displays parameter
names, and the lower line displays parameter
values.
Functionally, this is identical to pressing the NAME/
VALUE button.
V-POT 8 Switches the Clock display format.
•• Beats: Clock is displayed in bars, beats, beat
subdivisions, and ticks.
•• SMPTE: Clock is displayed in SMPTE format.
Functionally, this is identical to pressing the SMPTE/
BEATS button.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 56

Mackie Control channel strips
Mackie Control channel strips overview
Directly below the main LCD display are eight sets of channel strip controls. You can use these
to control Logic Pro channel strip parameters, plug-in parameters, and other functions. Each
channel strip of both the Mackie Control and XT units includes the controls described in the
linked sections:
•• V-Pot rotary encoder with button. See Mackie Control V-Pots on page 57.
•• REC/RDY button and LED. See Mackie Control channel strip buttons and LEDs on page 58.
•• Touch-sensitive motorized fader. The Mackie Control also provides a dedicated Master fader.
See Mackie Control faders on page 59.

Mackie Control V-Pots

The V-Pot is a rotary encoder, with an integrated button (accessed by pressing down on the top
of the encoder). You can use the V-Pot to adjust the channel’s send level and pan/balance (in
Channel view) or to adjust effect or instrument plug-in parameters. The V-Pot can also be used to
scroll through and choose items such as plug-ins, software instruments, and more from menus,
and to determine send destinations. The faster you turn the V-Pot, the quicker it changes values,
scrolls through menus, and so on.

The top of each V-Pot has an integrated push button, which typically sets a default parameter
value (if a parameter has more than two possible values) or switches between two parameter
values (on/off). The button can also be used to activate a function you have selected with the
V-Pot. For example, you can turn the V-Pot to scroll through a list of effect plug-ins for one of the
channel Insert slots. Once the effect you want is displayed in the main LCD, press the top of the
V-Pot to select and insert the effect, and open the plug-in window. The button is also sometimes
used to switch to a special assignment mode.

When a value or name (such as a plug-in) has been preselected, but not confirmed or inserted,
the value (or name) flashes on the main LCD until you press the V-Pot button.

The current value of the parameter you are adjusting with the V-Pot is displayed on the main
LCD (depending on the Name/Value setting) and is also indicated by the ring of LEDs encircling
the V-Pot. The way that parameter values are displayed on the LED ring varies depending on the
type of parameter being displayed.

Hold down the CMD/ALT button to set V-Pots to high-resolution (fine) mode, for parameters
where this mode applies.

Hold down the OPTION button and turn a V-Pot to switch between the minimum, default, and
maximum values for the parameter.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 57

Mackie Control channel strip buttons and LEDs
Each channel strip provides identical buttons and LEDs.

Channel strip buttons

•• REC/RDY button: Press the REC/RDY button to arm the channel strip for recording. If the
channel is currently armed, pressing the REC/RDY button disarms it. Each REC/RDY button
features a red LED, which is illuminated when the channel is armed for recording.
Hold down the OPTION button while pressing the REC/RDY button of any channel strip to
disarm all channel strips.
•• SOLO button: Press the SOLO button to hear the channel strip in isolation. Each SOLO button
has an amber LED that is lit when the channel strip is soloed. The Rude Solo LED on the right
edge is also lit whenever any channel is soloed.
Hold down the OPTION button while pressing any channel strip SOLO button to disable solo
for all channel strips.
In the Send Destination/Level view (see Mackie Control Send button overview on page 68),
the SOLO button controls the Pre/Post mode selection for both Mixer view and Channel view.
•• MUTE button: Press the MUTE button to silence the channel. Each MUTE button has a red LED
that is lit when the channel is muted.
Hold down the OPTION button while pressing any channel strip MUTE button to unmute all
muted channel strips.
In the EQ Frequency/Gain and Send Destination/Level views, the MUTE button controls the EQ
bypass or Send Mute function. This affects both Mixer and Channel views.
•• SELECT button: Press the SELECT button to choose and activate the channel for channel-based
editing or assignment commands. Each SELECT button has a green LED that is lit when the
channel is selected.
Hold down the SHIFT button while pressing a channel strip SELECT button to set the channel
volume to unity level (0 dB).
Note:  While holding down the SHIFT button, the SELECT button LED indicates if the channel
volume is set to 0 dB.
Hold down the OPTION button while pressing the SELECT button of any channel strip to
create a new track—assigned to the same channel strip as the selected track.
Hold down the SHIFT and OPTION buttons while pressing a channel strip SELECT button to
create a new track with the next channel strip (the one following the selected track).
•• Signal LED: Indicates the presence of an outgoing MIDI or audio signal. During recording, it
indicates the presence of an incoming signal.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 58

Mackie Control faders
The motorized fader of each channel strip is generally used to control the channel level, just like
a volume fader on a mixing console. You can, however, also assign the fader to control other
parameters by using Flip mode.

Flip mode is activated by pressing the FLIP button, just above the MASTER fader. When Flip
mode is activated, you can control the parameter that is currently assigned to the channel’s V-Pot
with the fader. This allows more precise control of pans, aux returns, MIDI track parameters, EQs,
effects, software instrument, or other channel parameters.

You can switch between channels being controlled with the eight faders by pressing one of
the CHANNEL or FADER BANK buttons. See Mackie Control Channel buttons on page 76 and
Mackie Control Bank buttons on page 75.

The behavior of the faders changes in different modes, as outlined below:

•• In Flip mode: Duplicates or swaps parameters with the V-Pot on the same channel.
•• In Surround Angle/Diversity view: Adjusts surround diversity.
•• In EQ Frequency/Gain view: Adjusts the gain of the selected EQ band.
•• In Send Destination/Level Mixer view: Adjusts the send level of the selected send.
•• In Send Destination/Level Channel view: Adjusts the send level of the send on the selected
channel strip.

The Mackie Control also provides a Master fader that controls the level of the primary master
channel strip in the Logic Pro Mixer. This raises or lowers the level of all output channel strips,
without changing their relative levels.

When no Master channel strip exists in the project, the Mackie Control Master fader is mapped to
output channel strip 1–2.

If you use multiple audio systems simultaneously, the Master fader only controls the Master
channel strip of the first device (matching the order shown in the Audio Preferences window).

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 59

Mackie Control assignment buttons
Mackie Control Assignment buttons overview
Directly below the Assignment LED are six ASSIGNMENT buttons.

Press one of the ASSIGNMENT buttons to select the type of parameter that you want to control
or edit with the channel strip V-Pots, faders, and switches. The corresponding LED is lit to indicate
the currently active assignment, and the Assignment display shows a two-digit abbreviation of
the assignment type.

The ASSIGNMENT buttons work in both Single and All views. Views are discussed in
Mackie Control assignment views on page 60.

Mackie Control assignment views

Each ASSIGNMENT button has two views: Mixer view and Channel view. These views provide two
ways to edit parameters in your project.
•• Mixer view: Displays, and allows you to edit, a single parameter in multiple channels.
•• Channel view: Displays, and allows you to edit, multiple parameters for a single channel. The
mode display shows a period (.) in the lower-right corner when Channel view is active.

Pressing an ASSIGNMENT button once selects it, and switches to Mixer view, except when
switching between Instrument Edit view and Plug-in Edit view. In this case, the mode remains in
Channel view.

Note:  For each of the ASSIGNMENT buttons, the parameters you can edit change, depending on
the active view.

The NAME/VALUE button also affects what is shown on the main LCD when in the Mixer and
Channel views. For more information, see Mackie Control function keys on page 77.

Mackie Control Track button

Mackie Control Track button overview
Press the TRACK button to select Channel view and assign the channel strip controls to edit
channel strip parameters.
•• Press the TRACK button once to edit a single parameter in multiple channel strips and to
activate Mixer view.
•• Press the TRACK button again to edit multiple parameters for a single channel strip and switch
to Channel view.
•• Hold down the TRACK button to display the Track shortcut menu on the LCD.
•• Hold down the TRACK button to display the Track shortcut menu on the LCD, then press V-Pot
8 or F8 to switch to Channel strip setup view.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 60

Mixer view
Mixer view allows you to edit a single parameter in multiple channel strips: volume, pan, input
format, input assignment, output assignment, or automation mode. When you switch to Mixer
view, the parameter being edited is briefly displayed on the right side of the main LCD. The mode
display shows “tr” (for track), and the upper row of the LCD shows track names.

Press NAME/VALUE to display parameter values on the lower row of the LCD. These are shown
when you turn a V-Pot, or press its button.

You can manipulate the following controls for editing in Mixer view:
•• Rotating the V-Pots changes the associated channel strip parameter.
•• Pressing the button on a V-Pot sets the parameter to its default value.
•• The Cursor Left/Cursor Right buttons switch to the next or previous channel strip parameter.
The selected parameter is displayed briefly in the upper row of the LCD.

Note:  Ensure that the ZOOM button isn’t active when using the cursor buttons.

Channel view
Channel view allows you to edit the most important channel strip parameters for a single
channel strip: volume, pan, instrument, Insert slot 1 assignment, Insert slot 2 assignment, Send 1
level, Send 2 level, and Send 3 level. When you switch to Channel view, the mode display shows
“tr.,” and the upper row of the LCD shows the name of the channel strip.

Press NAME/VALUE to show parameter names in the upper row and parameter values in the
lower row.

The table outlines V-Pot edits in Channel view:

Control Action
V-Pot 1 Edits volume. The current value is shown in the lower
row of the LCD.
V-Pot 2 Edits pan. The current value appears in the lower row
of the LCD.
V-Pot 3 For software instrument tracks, turn to choose the
instrument. Press the V-Pot 3 button to confirm your
choice, insert the instrument, and open the plug-in
window.
V-Pot 4 For audio and software instrument tracks, turn to
choose the plug-in used on Insert slot 1. Press the
V-Pot 4 button to confirm your choice, insert the
effect, and open the plug-in window.
V-Pot 5 For audio and software instrument tracks, turn to
choose the plug-in used on Insert slot 2. Press the
V-Pot 4 button to confirm your choice, insert the
effect, and open the plug-in window.
V-Pot 6 Edits the send level of Send 1.
V-Pot 7 Edits the send level of Send 2.
V-Pot 8 Edits the send level of Send 3.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 61

Hold down SHIFT while pressing one of the MUTE or V-Pot buttons to switch between mute
and bypass.

Control Action
V-Pot 1 or Mute 1 Mutes (or unmutes) the channel strip.
V-Pot 2 or Mute 2 Mutes (or unmutes) the channel strip.
V-Pot 3 or Mute 3 For software instrument tracks, mutes (or unmutes)
the software instrument used on the channel strip.
V-Pot 4 or Mute 4 For audio and software instrument tracks, bypasses
the effect plug-in used in Insert slot 1.
V-Pot 5 or Mute 5 For audio and software instrument tracks, bypasses
the effect plug-in used in Insert slot 2.
V-Pot 6 or Mute 6 Mutes (or unmutes) Send 1.
V-Pot 7 or Mute 7 Mutes (or unmutes) Send 2.
V-Pot 8 or Mute 8 Mutes (or unmutes) Send 3.

Track shortcut menu

Hold down the TRACK button to display the Track shortcut menu on the LCD. When this menu
is active, the mode display shows “t_” (for Track shortcuts). Press one of the V-Pot or Function
buttons to make the outlined changes.

Control Action
V-Pot 1 or F1 Switches to Mixer view, and selects volume as the
parameter edited by the V-Pot.
V-Pot 2 or F2 Switches to Mixer view, and selects pan as the
parameter edited by the V-Pot.
V-Pot 3 or F3 Switches to Mixer view, and selects input format as
the parameter edited by the V-Pot.
V-Pot 4 or F4 Switches to Mixer view, and selects the input
assignment as the parameter edited by the V-Pot.
V-Pot 5 or F5 Switches to Mixer view, and selects the output
assignment as the parameter edited by the V-Pot.
V-Pot 6 or F6 Switches to Mixer view, and selects the automation
mode as the parameter edited by the V-Pot.
V-Pot 7 or F7 Switches to Mixer view, switches Logic Pro to Arrange
view, and selects the automation parameter selected
in the Tracks window.
V-Pot 8 or F8 Switches to Channel Strip Setup view.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 62

Channel strip setup view
Hold down the TRACK button to display the Track shortcut menu on the LCD, then press V-Pot 8
or F8 to enter Channel Strip Setup view. In this view, you can edit the listed parameters for the
selected channel strip.

Control Action
V-Pot 1 Edits the channel strip format (mono, stereo, left, right,
and surround).
V-Pot 2 Edits the Spread parameter.
V-Pot 3 Selects the channel strip input assignment. Confirm
by pressing V-Pot 6.
V-Pot 4 Selects the channel strip output assignment. Confirm
by pressing V-Pot 7.
V-Pot 5 Edits the automation mode.
V-Pot 6 Edits group membership. You can only choose one
group or Off. To make a channel strip a member of
multiple groups, use Group Edit mode.

Mackie Control Pan/Surround button

Mackie Control Pan/Surround button overview
Press the PAN/SURROUND button once to activate Pan/Surround Mixer view.

Press the PAN/SURROUND button repeatedly to switch between Pan/Surround Mixer view and
Pan/Surround Channel view.

Hold down the PAN/SURROUND button to display the Alternative Pan/Surround mode options
submenu on the LCD.

Pan/Surround Mixer view

Pan/Surround Mixer view allows you to edit one pan/surround parameter for all channel strips:
Angle or Pan (on non-surround channel strips), Diversity, LFE, and Spread (on surround channel
strips). The parameter being edited is displayed briefly when switching to this mode. Regardless
of the selected (and active) surround parameter, non-surround channel strips always display the
standard Pan control.

In a project containing both surround and non-surround channel strips, you can edit a specified
surround parameter for surround channel strips, while the V-Pots of non-surround channel strips
edit pan position, as usual.

In Pan/Surround Mixer view:

•• The mode display shows “Pn” (for Pan).
•• The upper row of the LCD shows channel strip names.
•• Rotating the V-Pots changes the current pan/surround parameter.
•• The Surround Angle parameter rotates between 0 and 359 degrees, avoiding any angle limits.
•• Pressing the button on a V-Pot sets the parameter to its default value.
•• The Cursor Left/Cursor Right buttons switch to the next or previous surround parameter. The
selected parameter appears briefly in the upper row of the LCD.

Note:  Ensure that the ZOOM button isn’t active when using the cursor buttons.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 63

Pan/Surround Channel view
Pan/Surround Channel view allows you to edit all surround parameters for the selected
channel strip.
•• The mode display shows “Pn” (for Pan).
•• The upper LCD row shows the name of the channel strip and “Pan/Surround.”

Control Action
V-Pot 1 Edits angle (or pan on non-surround channel strips).
V-Pot 2 Edits diversity.
V-Pot 3 Edits LFE level.
V-Pot 4 Edits spread.
V-Pot 5 Edits Surround X.
V-Pot 6 Edits Surround Y.

Note:  The Angle/Diversity and X/Y pairs influence each other. Only the Angle/Diversity
parameters are automated and recorded.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 64

Alternative Pan/Surround mode options
Hold down the PAN/SURROUND button to display the alternate Pan/Surround mode options
submenu on the LCD. The V-Pots and function keys allow you to make the changes outlined in
the table.

Control Action
V-Pot 1 or F1 Switches to Pan/Surround Mixer view and selects
Angle.
V-Pot 2 or F2 Switches to Pan/Surround Mixer view and selects
Diversity.
V-Pot 3 or F3 Switches to Pan/Surround Mixer view and selects LFE
level.
V-Pot 4 or F4 Switches to Pan/Surround Mixer view and selects
Spread.
V-Pot 5 —
V-Pot 6 or F5 Switches to Pan/Surround Channel view.
V-Pot 7 or F6 Switches to Surround Angle/Diversity Mixer view.
•• The mode display shows “Ad” (Angle/Diversity).
•• The upper LCD row shows channel strip names.
•• The lower LCD row shows the surround angle
currently assigned to each channel strip.
•• Rotating a V-Pot changes the surround angle (or
adjusts pan position on non-surround channel
strips).
•• Pressing a V-Pot sets the surround angle to its
default value.
•• The faders edit surround diversity.
V-Pot 8 or F7 Switches to Surround X/Y Mixer view.
•• The mode display shows “XY.”
•• The upper LCD row shows channel strip names.
•• The lower LCD row shows the surround X value
currently assigned to each channel strip.
•• Rotating a V-Pot changes the surround X value
(or adjusts pan position on non-surround channel
strips).
•• Pressing a V-Pot sets surround X to its default value.
•• The faders edit surround Y.

Note:  The X and Y parameters are limited to a rectangular coordinate system. As such, value
pairs outside the surround circle are not possible. If you try to set a Y value that is invalid, the X
coordinate is automatically adjusted to a valid position, and vice versa. For example, moving Y to
+1000 results in an X coordinate value of 0. When only one coordinate value is edited, the other
coordinate value defaults to the setting of the most recently selected channel strip. This helps
you to create linear movements. X and Y have a value range of –1000 to +1000, but the resolution
is not that high because surround positions are currently recorded as 7-bit data.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 65

Mackie Control EQ button
Mackie Control EQ button overview
Press the EQ button to activate EQ Mixer view.

Press the EQ button repeatedly to switch between EQ Mixer view and EQ Channel view.

Hold down the EQ button to access the Alternate EQ edit mode options submenu in the LCD.

Note:  If no Channel or Linear Phase EQ is present on the selected channel strip, a Channel EQ is
inserted automatically when you enter EQ Channel view.

EQ Mixer view
EQ Mixer view allows you to edit one equalizer parameter for all channel strips: Frequency, Gain,
Q, or EQ bypass. The EQ band number, and parameter being edited, are displayed briefly when
you switch to this mode.
•• The mode display shows E1 to E8, indicating the selected EQ band.
•• The upper LCD row shows channel strip names.
•• Rotating the V-Pots changes the current EQ parameter.
•• Pressing a V-Pot button sets the parameter to its default value.
•• The Cursor Up/Cursor Down buttons switch to the next or previous EQ band.
•• The Cursor Left/Cursor Right buttons switch to the next or previous EQ parameter. The
selected parameter is displayed briefly in the upper LCD row.
•• Pressing a MUTE button while holding down the SHIFT button switches the current EQ band’s
Bypass state.
•• When Flip mode is turned on, the MUTE buttons display, and switch, the current EQ band’s
Bypass state.

Note:  Ensure that the ZOOM button isn’t active when using the cursor buttons.

EQ Channel view
EQ Channel view allows you to edit all EQ parameters—in all bands—for the selected
channel strip.
•• The mode display shows EQ (EQ channel strip).
•• The upper row of the LCD shows the name of the channel strip, EQs, the page number, and
the total number of pages (for example: “Page 1/2”).

Control Action
V-Pot 1 Edits the frequency of odd-numbered EQ bands.
V-Pot 2 Edits the gain of odd-numbered EQ bands.
V-Pot 3 Edits the Q-factor of odd-numbered EQ bands.
V-Pot 4 Switches the bypass state of odd-numbered EQ
bands.
V-Pot 5 Edits the frequency of even-numbered EQ bands.
V-Pot 6 Edits the gain of even-numbered EQ bands.
V-Pot 7 Edits the Q-factor of even-numbered EQ bands.
V-Pot 8 Switches the bypass state of even-numbered EQ
bands.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 66

The Cursor Left and Cursor Right buttons switch to the next or previous EQ band. The LCD
displays two EQ bands. If you have one or more connected Mackie Control (XT) units, each XT
can display two EQ bands—up to a total of eight bands.

Note:  Ensure that the ZOOM button isn’t active when using the cursor buttons.

Alternate EQ edit mode options

Hold down the EQ button to access the alternate EQ edit mode options submenu in the LCD. The
mode display shows E_ or E_., depending on whether you are in EQ Mixer or EQ Channel view.

Control Action
V-Pot 1 or F1 Switches to EQ Mixer view and selects frequency.
V-Pot 2 or F2 Switches to EQ Mixer view and selects gain.
V-Pot 3 or F3 Switches to EQ Mixer view and selects Q.
V-Pot 4 or F4 Switches to EQ Mixer view and selects bypass.
V-Pot 6 or F6 Switches to EQ Channel view.
V-Pot 7 or F7 Switches to Frequency/Gain Mixer view. In this mode,
you can edit the frequency and gain parameters of a
specific EQ band (1 to 8) for all channel strips.
•• The mode display shows F1 to F8, indicating the
selected EQ band.
•• The upper LCD row shows channel strip names.
•• The lower LCD row shows the frequency of the
selected EQ band.
•• Rotating a V-Pot changes EQ frequency.
•• Pressing a V-Pot sets the EQ frequency to its default
value.
•• Use the Mute buttons to bypass the EQ.
•• Use the faders to adjust the EQ gain.
V-Pot 8 or F8 Switches to Frequency/Gain Channel view. In
this mode, you can edit the frequency and gain
parameters for all EQ bands of the selected channel
strip. Each pair of channel strips corresponds to one
EQ band.
•• The mode display shows FG.
•• V-Pots 1 to 8 control the frequency of EQ bands 1
to 8.
•• Mute buttons 1 to 8 control the bypass of EQ bands
1 to 8.
•• Faders 1 to 8 control the gain of EQ bands 1 to 8.

Note:  The faders form a frequency response curve in this mode, if the EQ bands have ascending
frequency values.

Tip:  You can edit another channel strip’s EQ without leaving this view by selecting the channel
strip in Logic Pro or by pressing the appropriate SELECT button on the Mackie Control.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 67

Mackie Control Send button
Mackie Control Send button overview
Press the SEND button to activate Send Mixer view.

Press the SEND button repeatedly to switch between Send Mixer view and Send Channel view.

Hold down the SEND button to access the Alternate Send edit mode options submenu in
the LCD.

Send Mixer view

Send Mixer view allows you to edit one send parameter for all channel strips: Destination, Level,
Position, or Mute. The Send slot number and the parameter being edited are displayed briefly on
the LCD when switching to this mode.
•• The mode display shows S1 to S8, indicating the selected Send slot.
•• The upper LCD row shows channel strip names.
•• Rotating the V-Pots changes the current send parameter.
•• Pressing a V-Pot confirms the preselected send destination and sets the other send parameters
to their defaults.
•• Cursor Up/Cursor Down switches to the next or previous Send slot.
•• Cursor Left/Cursor Right switches to the next or previous send parameter. The selected
parameter appears briefly in the upper LCD row.
•• Pressing a MUTE button while holding down the SHIFT button switches the current send’s
mute state.
•• When Flip mode is turned on, the MUTE buttons display and edit the current send’s
mute state.

Note:  Ensure that the ZOOM button isn’t active when using the cursor buttons.

Send Channel view

Send Channel view allows you to edit all send parameters for the selected channel strip. The
mode display shows “SE.” (for send channel strip). The upper row of the LCD shows the name of
the channel strip, the text “Sends,” the page number and the total number of pages—“Page 1/4,”
for example.

Control Action
V-Pot 1 Edits the destination of odd-numbered sends.
V-Pot 2 Edits the level of odd-numbered sends.
V-Pot 3 Edits the position (pre/post) of odd-numbered sends.
V-Pot 4 Sets the mute state of odd-numbered sends.
V-Pot 5 Edits the destination of even-numbered sends.
V-Pot 6 Edits the level of even-numbered sends.
V-Pot 7 Edits the position (pre/post) of even-numbered sends.
V-Pot 8 Sets the mute state of even-numbered sends.

The Cursor Left and Cursor Right buttons shift between pages. The number of sends that can be
displayed simultaneously depends on the number of Mackie Control XTs you have.

Note:  Make sure that the ZOOM button isn’t active when using the cursor buttons.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 68

Alternate Send edit mode options
Hold down the SEND button to access the alternate Send edit mode options submenu in the
LCD. The mode display shows S_ or S_., depending on whether you are in Send Mixer view or
Send Channel view.

Control Action
V-Pot 1 or F1 Switches to Send Mixer view and selects destination.
V-Pot 2 or F2 Switches to Send Mixer view and selects send level.
V-Pot 3 or F3 Switches to Send Mixer view and selects position.
V-Pot 4 or F4 Switches to Send Mixer view and selects mute.
V-Pot 5 or F5 Switches to Send Channel view.
V-Pot 6 or F6 Switches to Send Channel Strip 2 view: This mode
is similar to Send Channel view, but parameters are
arranged in a slightly different way. You can control
one parameter for all Send slots used in the selected
channel strip.
•• The mode display shows “SE.” (Send channel strip).
•• The upper LCD row shows the name of the channel
strip, the text “Sends,” the page number, and total
number of pages.
•• V-Pots 1 to 8 edit the displayed parameter.
•• The horizontal cursor buttons shift between pages.
The number of parameters that can be displayed
simultaneously depends on the number of
Mackie Control XTs you have.
V-Pot 7 or F7 Switches to Destination/Level Mixer view. In this
mode, you can control one Send slot for all channel
strips. Each channel strip corresponds to the channel
strip name shown in the upper LCD row.
•• The mode display shows d1 to d8, indicating the
selected send.
•• The upper LCD row shows channel strip names.
•• The lower LCD row shows the destination of the
selected send.
•• Rotating a V-Pot preselects the send destination.
•• Pressing a V-Pot confirms the preselected send
destination.
•• The SOLO buttons edit send position—a lit SOLO
LED indicates Pre Fader mode.
•• The MUTE buttons set the send mute state.
•• The faders edit the send level.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 69

Control Action
V-Pot 8 or F8 Switches to Destination/Level Channel view. You can
control all Send slots for the selected channel strip
in this mode. Each channel strip corresponds to the
(embossed) send number shown below the LCD.
•• The mode display shows “dL.”
•• Rotating a V-Pot preselects the corresponding send
destination.
•• Pressing a V-Pot confirms a preselected send
destination.
•• The Solo buttons edit send position—a lit Solo LED
indicates Pre Fader mode.
•• The MUTE buttons set the send mute state.
•• The faders edit the send gain.

If one or more sends are activated on multiple channels, you can switch between them while in
the Channel views by pressing the SELECT button of the channel.

Mackie Control Plug-in button

Mackie Control Plug-in button overview
A single press of the PLUG-IN button activates Plug-in Mixer view.

Press the PLUG-IN button repeatedly to switch between Plug-in Mixer view and Plug-in Channel
view.

Note:  There is one exception to this behavior. If you are in Instrument Edit view, pressing the
PLUG-IN button switches to Plug-in edit view. For more information, see Instrument edit view on
page 74.

Plug-in Mixer view

In this view, you can edit the plug-ins associated with a particular Insert slot for all channels. The
mode display shows P1 to P9, or 10 to 16, indicating the selected Insert slot number.

Note:  If a software instrument channel is selected, the display shows P1 to P9 and 10 to 15.
In Plug-in Mixer view:
•• The upper row of the LCD shows channel strip names.
•• The lower row of the LCD shows the currently selected plug-in for the active Insert slot. Muted
plug-ins are shown with an asterisk (*) that precedes the plug-in name.
•• Rotating the V-Pots preselects a new plug-in. The plug-in name flashes until confirmed by
pressing the V-Pot button.
•• Rotating another channel’s V-Pot cancels any earlier preselection, and starts preselection on
the newly selected channel strip.
•• Pressing a V-Pot button:
•• Confirms or activates the preselected plug-in (assuming that you’ve made your preselection
by rotating the V-Pot).
•• Opens a plug-in window, if none is open. If a plug-in window is open and Link mode is
turned on, the selection of another plug-in replaces the existing plug-in window.
•• Switches to Plug-in Edit view.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 70

 •• The Cursor Up/Cursor Down buttons change the currently displayed plug-in Insert slot (1 to
15).
•• Pressing a V-Pot or MUTE button while the SHIFT button is held down mutes or unmutes the
plug-in.

Note:  Ensure that the ZOOM button isn’t active when using the cursor buttons.

Remove a plug-in
mm Preselect the “--” value (by rotating the V-Pot fully counterclockwise), then press the V-Pot button
of the appropriate Insert slot.
The Mackie Control does not switch to Plug-in Edit view, and no plug-in window opens when the
“--” value is chosen. If a plug-in window is open, it closes (if Link mode is inactive).

Plug-in Channel view

This view shows the plug-ins associated with all Insert slots for the selected channel.

In Plug-in Channel view:

•• The mode display shows the text “PL.”
•• The upper LCD row shows Ins1Pl through Ins8Pl.
•• The lower LCD row shows the plug-in that is currently selected for this Insert slot. Muted plug-
ins are indicated by an asterisk (*), which precedes the plug-in name.
•• Rotating the V-Pots preselects a new plug-in. The plug-in name flashes until activated.
•• Rotating another channel’s V-Pot cancels any previous preselection and starts preselection on
the newly selected channel strip.
•• Pressing a V-Pot button:
•• Activates the preselected plug-in (assuming that you’ve made your preselection by rotating
the V-Pot).
•• Opens a plug-in window if none is open. (If a plug-in window is open and Link mode is
turned on, the selection of another plug-in replaces the existing plug-in.)
•• Switches to Plug-in Edit view.
•• Pressing a V-Pot button while the SHIFT button is held down mutes/unmutes the plug-in.

Remove a plug-in
mm Preselect the “--” value (by rotating the V-Pot fully counterclockwise), then press the V-Pot linked
to the appropriate Insert slot.
The Mackie Control does not switch to Plug-in Edit view, and no plug-in window opens. If one
was previously opened, it closes (if Link mode is inactive).

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 71

Plug-in edit view
You can view and edit plug-in parameters in this mode.

Note:  Mackie Control can edit all plug-ins that can be automated. The plug-in type (Logic
Pro native or Audio Units) is irrelevant. Some third-party manufacturer plug-ins don’t provide
parameter names or values as text. In such cases, parameters are named and enumerated as
“Control #1,” “Control #2,” and so on, with values displayed as numbers ranging between 0 and
1000. Contact the plug-in manufacturer to obtain a version that supports this feature.
In Plug-in Edit view:
•• The mode display shows P1. to P8., indicating the number of the selected plug-in Insert slot.
•• Depending on the NAME/VALUE button, the LCD display changes between the two modes in
the following ways:
•• Name: The upper LCD row shows the channel strip’s name, insert number, plug-in name,
current parameter page, and total number of parameter pages. The lower LCD row shows
the name of the parameter, which can be edited via the corresponding V-Pot (the one below
the parameter name).
•• Value: The upper LCD row shows the name of the parameter that can be edited via the
corresponding V-Pot. The lower LCD row shows the current value of the parameter. If there is
sufficient onscreen space, the unit type will be added; for example, Hz or dB.
•• Rotating the V-Pots changes parameter values.
•• Pressing a V-Pot button sets the parameter to its default value, except when the parameter
only has two values (on/off, for example). In this case, pressing the V-Pot button switches
between these values.
•• The Cursor Left/Cursor Right buttons switch to the next or previous parameter page.

Note:  Ensure that the ZOOM button isn’t active when using the cursor buttons.

When using the cursor buttons to switch between parameters, the parameters change in groups
of eight (unless the parameters on the last page do not make a complete group of eight). For
example, if a plug-in has 19 parameters, and the Mackie Control is controlling parameters 1 to 8:
•• Pressing the Cursor Right button shifts to parameters 9 to 16.
•• Pressing the Cursor Right button again shifts to parameters 12 to 19.
•• Pressing the Cursor Left button shifts back to parameters 9 to 16, not 4 to 11.

This way, you always revert to the page positions you expect to find and are comfortable with.
•• To switch by a single parameter, rather than by page, hold down the CMD/ALT key while
pressing the Cursor Left or Cursor Right button.
•• The Cursor Up/Cursor Down buttons change the currently displayed Insert slot (1 to 15).

If you have a control surface group consisting of several Mackie Control and XT units, the
parameters are distributed across their displays. The number of parameters shown depends on
the Multiple Controls per Parameter settings in Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Preferences. See
Open Control Surfaces preferences on page 26 for details.

Note:  When you leave Plug-in Edit view, the plug-in window closes.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 72

 Mackie Control Instrument button
Mackie Control Instrument button overview
Press the INSTRUMENT button to activate Instrument Mixer view, unless the Mackie Control
is currently in Plug-in edit view. In this case, pressing the INSTRUMENT button switches to
Instrument edit view.

If you can’t see the software instrument channel strips, use the BANK or CHANNEL buttons in the
Fader Bank zone, or switch to All view by pressing the INSTRUMENT button. (This assumes that
you have created at least one or more software instrument tracks.)

Instrument Mixer view

In this view, you can edit the Instrument slots of all channels.

In Instrument Mixer view:

•• The mode display shows “In” (for instrument).
•• The upper LCD row shows channel strip names.
•• The lower LCD row shows the currently selected instrument. Muted instrument names are
preceded by an asterisk (*).
•• Rotating the V-Pots preselects a new instrument. The preselected instrument name flashes
until activated.
•• Rotating another channel’s V-Pot cancels any previous preselection and starts preselection on
the newly chosen channel strip.
•• Pressing a V-Pot button:
•• Activates the preselected instrument plug-in (assuming that you’ve made your preselection
by rotating the V-Pot).
•• Opens a plug-in window, if none is open. If a plug-in window is open and Link mode is
turned on, the selection of another instrument plug-in replaces the existing one.
•• Switches to Instrument Edit view.
•• Pressing a V-Pot or MUTE button while holding down the SHIFT button mutes/unmutes
the instrument.

Remove an instrument
1 Preselect the “--” value (by rotating the V-Pot fully counterclockwise).
2 Press the V-Pot button.
Mackie Control does not switch to Instrument Edit view, and no plug-in window opens. If a
plug-in window is open, it closes.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 73

Instrument edit view
In this view, you can edit instrument parameters.

Note:  Mackie Control can edit all instruments that can be automated, regardless of the type
of plug-in you are using (Logic Pro native or Audio Units). Some third-party manufacturer
instruments do not provide parameter names or values as text. In such cases, parameters
are named and enumerated as “Control #1,” “Control #2,” and so on, with values displayed as
numbers ranging between 0 and 1000. Contact the plug-in manufacturer to obtain a version that
supports this feature.
In Instrument edit view:
•• The mode display shows “In.”
•• Depending on the state of the NAME/VALUE button, the LCD changes in the following ways:
•• Name: The upper LCD row shows the channel strip name, instrument name, current
parameter page, and total number of parameter pages. The lower LCD row shows the name
of the parameter that can be edited with the V-Pot directly below.
•• Value: The upper LCD row shows the name of the parameter that can be edited with the
V-Pot below. The lower LCD row shows the current value of the parameter being edited. If
there is sufficient space on the LCD row, the unit type is shown after the value; for example,
Hz or dB.
•• Rotating a V-Pot changes the corresponding parameter.
•• Pressing a V-Pot button sets the parameter to its default value, except when the parameter
only has two values (on/off, for example). In this case, pressing the V-Pot button switches
between these values.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 74

Mackie Control fader bank buttons
Mackie Control Bank buttons
The Mackie Control provides eight sets of channel strip controls, allowing you to edit eight
corresponding channels. The BANK LEFT and BANK RIGHT buttons let you move between “banks”
of eight channel strips. For example, if you are editing channel strips 1–8, pressing the BANK
RIGHT button moves to channel strips 9–16. Pressing BANK RIGHT again moves to channel
strips 17–24. Pressing BANK LEFT returns to channel strips 9–16, then to 1–8 with one more
button press.

If you are using a control surface group, the BANK LEFT and BANK RIGHT buttons shift the active
channel strips by the total number of channels in the control surface group. For example, if you
have a Mackie Control and two Mackie Control XT units, the view shifts by 24 channels—the
total number of channels in the control surface group.

The BANK buttons always change channel strips in groups of eight, unless the last channel strips
do not make a complete group of eight. For example, if a project has 19 channel strips, and the
Mackie Control is controlling channel strips 1 to 8:
•• Pressing the BANK RIGHT button shifts to channel strips 9 to 16.
•• Pressing the BANK RIGHT button again shifts to channel strips 12 to 19.
•• Pressing the BANK LEFT button shifts back to channel strips 9 to 16, not 4 to 11.

This way, you always revert to the channel strips you expect to find and are comfortable with.

Notes on using the Bank or Channel buttons

Hold down the OPTION button, then press the BANK or CHANNEL LEFT button to jump to the
first set of channel strips in the project. Pressing the BANK or CHANNEL RIGHT button jumps to
the last set of channel strips in the project. For example, if your project has 64 channel strips,
pressing BANK or CHANNEL LEFT jumps to channel strips 1 through 8, and pressing BANK or
CHANNEL RIGHT jumps to channel strips 57 through 64.

For views where one type of channel strip is displayed (such as audio, instruments, or busses),
Logic Pro remembers the last group of eight channel strips shown in the view, and returns to it
when you switch back from another view. For example, if you start in a view with audio channel
strips 4 through 11 visible, switch to an instruments view, scroll to instruments 6 through 13, and
then switch back to the audio Channel view, you will return to audio channel strips 4 through 11
(not 6 through 13). Switching to the Instrument Channel view displays instruments 6 through 13.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 75

Mackie Control Channel buttons
You can use the CHANNEL LEFT and CHANNEL RIGHT buttons to move up or down by a single
channel strip. Pressing the CHANNEL RIGHT button shifts the active channel strips up by a single
channel strip, while pressing CHANNEL LEFT shifts them down by a single channel strip. For
example, if you are viewing channel strips 1 to 8 and press the CHANNEL RIGHT button, channel
strips 2 to 9 are displayed.

Notes on using the Bank or Channel buttons

Hold down the OPTION button, then press the BANK or CHANNEL LEFT button to jump to the
first set of channel strips in the project. Pressing the BANK or CHANNEL RIGHT button jumps to
the last set of channel strips in the project. For example, if your project has 64 channel strips,
pressing BANK or CHANNEL LEFT jumps to channel strips 1 through 8, and pressing BANK or
CHANNEL RIGHT jumps to channel strips 57 through 64.

For views where one type of channel strip is displayed (such as audio, instruments, or busses),
Logic Pro remembers the last group of eight channel strips shown in the view and returns to it
when you switch back from another view. For example, if you start in a view with audio channel
strips 4 through 11 visible, switch to an instruments view, scroll to instruments 6 through 13, and
then switch back to the audio Channel view, you will return to audio channel strips 4 through 11
(not 6 through 13). Switching to the Instrument Channel view displays instruments 6 through 13.

Mackie Control Flip button

Press the FLIP button (alone, or in combination with a modifier key) to activate or deactivate one
of the following modes: Flip, Swap, or Zero.
•• Flip mode: In Flip mode, the current assignments of the eight V-Pots are mirrored by the eight
channel faders, so that both control the same parameter. Rotating one of the V-Pots causes
the corresponding fader to move, and vice versa. When you activate Flip mode, the LED next
to the FLIP button illuminates. Pressing the FLIP button again turns off Flip mode. Flip mode
offers the following advantages:
•• You can edit any type of parameter with a fader, which allows more precise editing control.
•• Unlike the V-Pots, the faders are touch-sensitive. This allows you to overwrite existing
controller automation movements with a constant value.
•• Swap mode: Hold down the SHIFT button while pressing the FLIP button to activate Swap
mode. In Swap mode, the encoder assignments are swapped with the fader assignments, so
that the faders control the parameter previously assigned to the V-Pots, and vice versa. The
LED next to the FLIP button flashes when Swap mode is active.
When Swap mode is active, pressing FLIP again reverts to Flip mode. Holding down the SHIFT
button and pressing FLIP turns off Swap mode, and returns the V-Pot and fader assignments to
the state they were in before you activated Flip or Swap mode.
•• Zero mode: Hold down the CONTROL button while pressing the FLIP button to activate Zero
mode. In Zero mode, the faders are set to the zero position and do not move. This is useful in
situations where the Mackie Control is located close to microphones, and you want to make
sure that you don’t capture the mechanical noise of the faders moving.
When Zero mode is active, pressing FLIP again reverts to Flip mode. Holding down the
CONTROL button while pressing FLIP turns off Zero mode, and reactivates the faders.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 76

 Mackie Control Global View buttons
The GLOBAL VIEW button is used in conjunction with the other eight GLOBAL VIEW buttons to
display (and edit) specific types of channel strips. Pressing any of the buttons activates All View;
when this view is active, the green LED to the right of the GLOBAL VIEW button is lit.

When you press one of the Global View buttons, the corresponding type of channel strip appears
in the main LCD. You can edit each channel strip with the corresponding channel strip controls.
Pressing multiple buttons (Audio Tracks, Instruments, and Aux, for example) displays all channels
of the selected types.

View (and edit) multiple All View channel strips

mm While holding down any button in the Global View zone, press another button to add this
channel strip type to those currently displayed. If a channel strip type is already displayed,
pressing its button removes it from the display.
For example, to display both the audio and output channel strips, hold down the AUDIO TRACKS
button, then press the OUTPUTS button.

Mackie Control function keys

The eight function key buttons, labeled F1 through F8, are assigned as follows.

Hold down the specified modifier button while pressing one of the function keys to perform the
function or command:

Function key No modifier SHIFT CMD/ALT

F1 Screenset 1 Open/close Tracks Cut
window
F2 Screenset 2 Open/close Mixer Copy
F3 Screenset 3 Open/close Event List Paste
F4 Screenset 4 Open/close Score Editor Clear
F5 Screenset 5 Open/close Step Editor Select All
F6 Screenset 6 Open/close Piano Roll Select All Following
Editor
F7 Screenset 7 Open/close Control bar Select Similar Regions/
Events
F8 Screenset 8 Open/close Audio Bin Select Inside Locators

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 77

In modal dialogs, pressing one of the function keys is equivalent to using the computer keyboard
number keys:

Function key Action

F1 1
F2 2
F3 3
F4 4
F5 5
F6 6
F7 7
F8 8
The buttons located directly below the function keys
complete the numeric input functions:
MIDI Tracks button 9
Inputs button 0

In some other modes, the function keys perform other actions, such as shortcuts to markers. For
more information, see Mackie Control Marker button overview on page 83. Also see the tables in
Mackie Control assignments overview on page 90.

Mackie Control modifier buttons

The four Modifier buttons correspond to the modifier keys on your computer keyboard (but
function independently from them). You can use these buttons, along with the appropriate key
on your computer keyboard or with the mouse or trackpad, in place of using the corresponding
modifier key. This also applies to modified Mackie Control commands.

Modifier buttons
•• SHIFT: Provides an alternate function or meaning for a button.

•• OPTION: The function applies to all channel strips. For relative value changes, sets the value to
its minimum, default, or maximum, depending on whether you’re increasing or decreasing it.
•• CONTROL: Hold down to turn on group clutch and temporarily disable channel strip groups.
•• CMD/ALT: Allows fine-tuning or a variation of the function.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 78

 Mackie Control automation buttons
The automation buttons activate corresponding automation modes in Logic Pro. You use the
automation buttons in conjunction with the channel strip SELECT buttons.

Automation buttons
•• READ/OFF: If no automation mode is active, pressing the READ/OFF button switches between
Read mode and Off.
•• Read: The fader reads (follows) any existing automation data but does not record any new
automation data.
•• Off: Automation is off. The fader neither sends nor receives automation data. Existing
automation data is not changed. The fader still adjusts the volume or pan position as usual
when moved.
•• TOUCH: Writes new data when the fader is touched or the V-Pot is turned during playback. Any
existing automation data (of the current fader type) is replaced with new data for as long as
the control is active (while the fader is being touched or the V-Pot is being turned).
•• LATCH: Similar to Touch mode, but the control remains active, even when the fader is no longer
being touched or the V-Pot is not being turned. When you release the fader, the current fader
value replaces all existing automation data for as long as the sequencer is in playback (or
record) mode. Press STOP to prevent existing automation data from being overwritten.
••WRITE: Overwrites all existing automation data, or creates new automation data if none exists.
Only use this option if you want to destroy all existing automation data.
Hold down the OPTION button, then press one of the Automation buttons to assign the selected
automation mode to all channels. When an automation mode has been assigned to all channels,
the corresponding automation mode button LED illuminates whenever you hold down the
OPTION button.

Important:  This behavior is slightly different for the Off automation mode. Holding down the
OPTION button and pressing READ/OFF dims the LEDs for the other Automation buttons, but
this does not necessarily indicate that all channel strips are in Off mode—they could still be set
to other modes. To make sure that you have set all channel strips to Off mode, press READ/OFF
twice while holding down the OPTION button. The READ/OFF button LED turns on, then off.

Set the automation mode for a channel

1 Press the SELECT button on the channel strip you want to automate.
2 Press the Automation mode button.
3 Do one of the following:
•• Move the channel strip fader.
•• Rotate the channel strip V-Pot.
•• Press the Solo or Mute button.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 79

Mackie Control Group button
Press the GROUP button to activate group edit mode that allows you to edit various Mixer
group parameters.
•• The upper row of the LCD displays channel strip names.
•• The lower row of the LCD displays group parameters.
•• The Assignment display shows the currently displayed group—G1, for example.
•• The Time display shows the group name. (If the name is longer than ten characters, the last
ten characters are displayed.)
•• You can switch between group parameters with the V-Pot buttons.
•• The Cursor Up and Cursor Down buttons select the previous or next group.
•• The Cursor Left and Cursor Right buttons shift the group parameter display.
•• The SELECT buttons determine group membership. Pressing a SELECT button adds the
channel strip to the group (or removes it from the group, if already a member). An illuminated
SELECT button LED indicates active group membership.
•• The LED next to the GROUP button is illuminated.

Note:  Make sure that the ZOOM button isn’t active when using the cursor buttons.

If Group Edit mode is off, holding down the GROUP button and pressing one or more SELECT
buttons allows you to create a new group.

Pressing the GROUP button while holding down the SHIFT button creates a new group, opens
the Group window, and activates group edit mode.

Pressing the GROUP button while holding down the TRACK button switches to Mixer view, with
the channel strip group parameter shown. It displays the group that the selected channel strip
belongs to. Multiple group membership is displayed as in the Mixer window. Rotating a V-Pot
changes group membership.

Note:  You can select only one group (or Off) with this function.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 80

Mackie Control utilities buttons
The four utilities buttons activate the Save, Undo, Cancel, and Enter commands in Logic Pro.

Utilities buttons
•• SAVE button: Press to save the current project file. The first time you save a project, a Save
dialog appears on your computer screen. Enter a name and location for the file, then click the
Save button in the dialog.
The main LCD displays this message: “There is a file select dialog on the screen.” The Position/
Time display shows “ALERT.” All LEDs are unlit. Once the Save operation has been confirmed
in Logic Pro, the Mackie Control returns all controls to their previous state (before you pressed
the SAVE button).
Once you have named a project and saved it, further presses of the SAVE button store the
current project state without presenting a Save dialog onscreen or showing any alerts on the
LCD. This allows you to quickly save incremental changes you make as your project develops.
The SAVE LED is illuminated as soon as you make (savable) changes to your project.
Holding down the OPTION button while pressing SAVE opens the Save As dialog on the
computer screen. This allows you to rename a project or save it in a different location.
•• UNDO button: Press to undo the last undoable action. Because Logic Pro supports a nearly
unlimited number of undo/redo steps, the green UNDO LED illuminates to indicate that Redo
is available, not to indicate an undoable step. The LCD provides a warning that performing a
reversible editing step will render all Redo steps unavailable.
•• Hold down the SHIFT button while pressing UNDO to perform a Redo.
•• Hold down the OPTION button while pressing UNDO to open the Undo History window.
•• CANCEL button: Press to cancel or exit an alert that appears on your computer screen. For
information about alerts, see Modal dialog display on page 29.
Pressing the CANCEL button when no alert is visible onscreen does the following:
•• It opens the Toolbox at the current pointer position.
•• Alternatively, it performs any function currently assigned to the computer keyboard’s Esc
(Escape) key.
•• If the Mackie Control currently shows the contents of a folder track, pressing the CANCEL
button exits the folder.
•• The CANCEL button also lets you invalidate a (blinking) parameter value preselection.
•• ENTER button: Press to activate the default button in an onscreen alert. For information about
alerts, see Modal dialog display on page 29.
If there is no alert onscreen, and the selected track is a folder track, pressing the ENTER button
opens the folder.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 81

Mackie Control transport buttons
Mackie Control transport buttons overview
The transport buttons provide standard control bar functions.

Transport buttons
•• REWIND button: Rewinds through your project. Press repeatedly while rewinding to accelerate
the rewind speed. Press the FAST FWD button repeatedly while rewinding to slow down, stop,
and eventually reverse the shuttle direction. Press the STOP button to halt the rewind process
at the current playhead position. Rotating the Jog/Scrub Wheel also exits rewind shuttle mode.
•• When one of the Marker modes is activated, pressing the REWIND button moves the
playhead to the previous marker.
•• When one of the Nudge modes is activated, the REWIND button moves the selected regions
or events backward by the value defined in Large Nudge mode.
•• FAST FWD button: Fast forwards through your project. Press FAST FWD repeatedly while fast
forwarding to accelerate the shuttle speed. Press the REWIND button repeatedly while fast
forwarding to slow down, stop, and eventually reverse the shuttle direction. Press the STOP
button to halt the fast forward process. Rotating the Jog/Scrub Wheel also exits forward
shuttle mode.
•• When one of the Marker modes is active, pressing the FAST FWD button moves the playhead
to the next marker.
•• When one of the Nudge modes is active, pressing the FAST FWD button moves the selected
regions or events forward by the value defined in Large Nudge mode.
Tip:  You can combine markers with cycle areas by pressing the respective buttons on the
Mackie Control. This, in conjunction with navigation between markers (using the REWIND and
FAST FWD buttons), moves the playhead, and automatically sets a cycle area between adjacent
markers. Try this, and other options, with various button combinations.
•• STOP button: Stops project playback or recording and stops all other Transport functions. Press
the STOP button a second time to return the playhead to the project start point or to the
beginning of the nearest cycle area if Cycle mode is active. Press STOP repeatedly to switch
between these two functions.
•• PLAY button: Starts playback from the current playhead position. Press PLAY repeatedly to
jump to the beginning of the nearest cycle area if Cycle mode is active. Press SHIFT and PLAY
simultaneously to pause playback.
•• RECORD button: Starts recording on the selected MIDI, audio, or software instrument channel
strip if it is armed for recording.
Note:  It is possible that the first time you arm an audio channel strip (by pressing the REC/RDY
button for the channel), a Save dialog will appear on your computer screen. Enter a filename
(and a save location) in the dialog, then press Save. The Mackie Control LCD display shows
“There is a file select dialog on the screen.” The Position/Time display shows “ALERT.” All LEDs
are unlit. Once you enter the filename (and press Save), all controls on the Mackie Control
return to their previous state. After the default audio filename has been entered, you can
select and arm any audio channel strip, then press the RECORD button. No alert messages and
file save dialogs will appear onscreen.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 82

 Tip:  To minimize the appearance of the dialog, save your project with Assets before you start
recording. Saving your project this way bypasses the need to define filenames and makes
handling faster and easier when using Logic Pro with the Mackie Control.
Just above the transport buttons are seven small, circular buttons for different recording and
playback modes: Marker, Nudge, Cycle, Drop, Replace, Click, and Solo. You can use these buttons
independently or in conjunction with one another, to navigate and edit your projects. Each
button has a dedicated LED that indicates its current status.

Mackie Control Marker button

Mackie Control Marker button overview
Press the MARKER button to activate one of three marker modes: Small Marker mode, Large
Marker mode, and Temporary Marker mode. You can use these modes to create or delete
markers and jump to markers in your project.

Note:  The Marker and Nudge modes are mutually exclusive; activating one deactivates the other.
•• Small Marker mode: Press the MARKER button to activate Small Marker mode. Small Marker
mode is useful if you want to jump to markers while using the V-Pots for other purposes.
In this mode, pressing the FAST FWD or REWIND button moves the playhead to the next or
previous marker. Pressing the MARKER button again reverts to the default behavior of the FAST
FWD and REWIND buttons. (See Mackie Control transport buttons overview on page 82.)
•• Large Marker mode: Hold down the SHIFT button, then press the MARKER button to show three
create options on the LCD, assigned to the three rightmost V-Pot buttons. (See Large Marker
mode on page 84.)
•• Temporary Marker mode: Hold down the MARKER button if you want to enter Marker mode
temporarily to quickly perform a few marker functions. Press one (or more) of the V-Pot
buttons to execute the marker function and then leave Marker mode by releasing the
MARKER button.
•• Press function keys F1 to F8 to move the playhead to the first eight markers (if created). For
example, to navigate to marker 3, hold down the MARKER button and press F3.
•• To jump between markers, with (or without) the MARKER button held down, press the FAST
FWD or REWIND button.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 83

Large Marker mode
Hold down the SHIFT button, then press the MARKER button to show three create options on the
LCD, assigned to the three rightmost V-Pot buttons.

Once markers have been created, press the V-Pot button listed below to create or delete a
marker at the current playhead position.

Control Action
V-Pot 1 to 5 Displays the first five markers by name. Pressing
a V-Pot button moves the playhead to the
corresponding marker. When the playhead position is
inside a marker, the lower line displays INSIDE, and the
V-Pot LED ring is lit.
V-Pot 6 Cr w/o—Creates a marker, without rounding to the
nearest bar.
V-Pot 7 Create—Creates a marker, rounded to the nearest bar.
V-Pot 8 Delete—Deletes the marker above the current
playhead position.

A recommended workflow for creating or deleting markers is to use the Jog/Scrub Wheel. Turn
the wheel to move the playhead to the required project position, and then press the appropriate
V-Pot to create or delete a marker.
•• For coarse placement, use the wheel to move the playhead.
•• For fine placement, press the SCRUB button, then use the wheel to precisely position the
playhead. (This technique is only appropriate if creating or deleting an unrounded marker.)

For more information about using the Jog/Scrub Wheel, see Mackie Control Jog/Scrub wheel on
page 89.

Large Marker mode is ended by pressing the MARKER button again.

Mackie Control Nudge button

Mackie Control Nudge button overview
The NUDGE button allows you to move (nudge) selected audio or MIDI regions (or events) in
Small, Large, or Temporary Nudge mode.

Note:  The Marker and Nudge modes are mutually exclusive; activating one deactivates the other.
•• Small Nudge mode: Press the NUDGE button to reassign the behavior of the FAST FWD and
REWIND buttons; pressing either FAST FWD or REWIND nudges the selected regions or events
by the value defined in Large Nudge mode. Pressing the NUDGE button a second time reverts
to the default behavior of the FAST FWD and REWIND buttons. (See Mackie Control transport
buttons overview on page 82.) Small Nudge mode is useful if you want to nudge regions or
events but still use the V-Pots for other purposes.
•• Large Nudge mode: Hold down the SHIFT button, then press the NUDGE button to show eight
functions on the LCD that are mapped to the corresponding V-Pot buttons. These functions
allow you to move the selected region or events by various amounts or to a specific position.
See Large Nudge mode.
•• Temporary Nudge mode: Hold down the NUDGE button and use one or more of the V-Pots to
use Nudge temporarily for one or two small moves. This action executes the selected function,
then exits Temporary Nudge mode as soon as you release the NUDGE button. See Temporary
Nudge mode.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 84

Large Nudge mode
Hold down the SHIFT button, then press the NUDGE button to show eight functions on the LCD
that are mapped to the corresponding V-Pot buttons. These functions allow you to move the
selected region or events by various amounts or to a specific position. Press the NUDGE button a
second time to turn off Large Nudge mode.

The position of the first selected region or event is displayed above V-Pots 3 and 4. If nothing is
displayed, either a window that does not allow the selection of regions or events is open or no
regions or events are selected.

Control Label Action

V-Pot 1 Nudge Selects the nudge value used
by the REWIND and FAST FWD
buttons. These buttons move the
selected objects backward/forward
by the defined value.
V-Pot 2 Pickup Moves to the current playhead
position.
V-Pot 3 Bar Moves by one bar.
V-Pot 4 Beat Moves by the current project
denominator value (beats).
V-Pot 5 Division Moves by the current project
division value.
V-Pot 6 Ticks Moves by single ticks.
V-Pot 7 Frames Moves by one SMPTE frame.
V-Pot 8 Fram/2 Moves by half a SMPTE frame.

The cursor buttons emulate the computer keyboard’s arrow keys, allowing easy selection of a
region or event.

Note:  Make sure that the ZOOM button is not active when using the cursor buttons.

Temporary Nudge mode

Hold down the NUDGE button and use one or more of the V-Pots to use Nudge temporarily for
one or two small moves. This action executes the selected function, then exits Temporary Nudge
mode as soon as you release the NUDGE button.

In Temporary Nudge mode, the cursor buttons emulate the computer keyboard’s arrow keys,
allowing easy selection of a region or event.

The Nudge value for the REWIND and FAST FWD buttons can also be defined with the
function buttons.

Function button Action

F1 Sets Ticks.
F2 Sets Division.
F3 Sets Beat.
F4 Sets Bar.
F5 Sets Frames.
F6 Sets Half Frames.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 85

 Use the Mackie Control Cycle button
The CYCLE button turns Cycle mode on or off. By default, the cycle area falls between the first
two markers.

Subsequent markers can act as left and right boundaries for further cycle areas.

Jump between cycle areas defined by the markers

1 Press the MARKER button.
2 Press the CYCLE button, and when active (as indicated by the LED), press the REWIND or FAST
FWD button.

Set the left or right locator to the current playhead position

mm Hold down the CYCLE button and press REWIND or FAST FWD.
This also activates Cycle mode.

Quickly define a new cycle area

1 Navigate to the target left locator position with the Jog/Scrub Wheel.
2 Press the CYCLE and REWIND buttons.
3 Navigate to the right locator position with the Jog/Scrub Wheel.
4 Press the CYCLE and FAST FWD buttons.

Use Cycle view

1 To activate Cycle view, press the SHIFT and CYCLE buttons.
The mode display shows “Cy.”
2 To return to a regular assignment mode, press one of the Assignment buttons.

Control Action
Rotate V-Pot 1 Shows and edits the current cycle state (off or on); you
can also use the CYCLE button.
Rotate V-Pot 2 BySel—sets the current cycle area by the selection
made in the Tracks window (selected audio or MIDI
region).
Rotate V-Pot 3 Move—moves the current cycle by a bar with each
click of the V-Pot.
Press V-Pot 5 Picks up the current playhead position for the left
locator.
Rotate V-Pot 5 Changes the left locator in bars.
Rotate V-Pot 6 Changes the left locator in beats (denominator steps).
Press V-Pot 7 Picks up the current playhead position for the right
locator.
Rotate V-Pot 7 Changes the right locator in bars.
Rotate V-Pot 8 Changes the right locator in beats (denominator
steps).

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 86

 Use the Mackie Control Drop button
The DROP button turns Autopunch mode on or off.

Navigate between punch in areas

1 Press the MARKER button.
2 Press the DROP button, and when active (as indicated by the lit LED), press the FAST FWD or
REWIND button.

Set the punch in or punch out locator to the current playhead position
mm Hold down the DROP button and press FAST FWD or REWIND.
This also activates Autopunch mode.

Quickly define a new punch in area

1 Navigate to the target punch in locator position with the Jog/Scrub Wheel.
2 Press the DROP and REWIND buttons.
3 Navigate to the target punch out locator position with the Jog/Scrub Wheel.
4 Press the DROP and FAST FWD buttons.

Use Punch view

1 To activate Punch view, press the SHIFT and DROP buttons.
The mode display shows “Pu.”
2 To return to a regular assignment mode, press one of the Assignment buttons.
Note:  Changing a punch locator value with the Mackie Control automatically activates
Autopunch mode in Logic Pro.

Control Action
Rotate V-Pot 1 Shows and edits the current Autopunch state (off or
on); you can also use the DROP button.
Rotate V-Pot 3 Move—moves the current punch area by a bar with
each click of the V-Pot.
Press V-Pot 5 Picks up the current playhead position for the punch
in locator.
Rotate V-Pot 5 Changes the punch in locator in bars.
Rotate V-Pot 6 Changes the punch in locator in beats (denominator
steps).
Press V-Pot 7 Picks up the current playhead position for the punch
out locator.
Rotate V-Pot 7 Changes the punch out locator in bars.
Rotate V-Pot 8 Changes the punch out locator in beats (denominator
steps).

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 87

 Mackie Control Replace, Click, and Solo buttons
These buttons are used for a number of global Logic Pro functions.

Replace, Click, and Solo buttons

•• REPLACE button: Press to turn Replace mode on or off. There are independent click settings for
play and record. To access the click settings, choose File > Project Settings > Metronome.
•• CLICK button: Press to turn the MIDI or Klopfgeist metronome click on or off.
Press the SHIFT and CLICK buttons to activate or deactivate both External Sync mode and
transmission of MMC.
•• SOLO button: Press to turn the Solo function on or off. This behaves like the Solo key command.
Individual channels can be soloed with the SOLO buttons on each channel strip. MIDI or audio
regions can be selected, and soloed, along with the selected channels. Each channel features
an independent SOLO LED, which is lit when a channel strip is soloed. The RUDE SOLO LED—
just to the right of the Position/Time display—is lit when any channel strip is soloed.
Press the SHIFT and SOLO buttons to activate Solo Lock mode.

Use Mackie Control cursor and zoom keys

The five buttons to the left of the Jog/Shuttle Wheel serve a number of purposes. The four cursor
buttons—Up, Down, Left, and Right—encircle the central ZOOM button.

When the ZOOM button is not active (its LED is unlit), the four cursor buttons select the current
parameter, or shift the current parameter page or Send/EQ/Insert slot, depending on the current
V-Pot assignment.
•• When the OPTION button is held down: The Cursor Left and Cursor Right buttons scroll to the
first and last page, and the Cursor Up and Cursor Down buttons scroll to the first and last slot.
•• When the CMD/ALT button is held down: The Cursor Left and Cursor Right buttons shift the
parameter display by one parameter, rather than one page.

Use Zoom mode

Do one of the following:
mm To turn Zoom mode on or off: Press the ZOOM button.
mm To change the vertical or horizontal zoom factor of the window with key focus: Use the
cursor buttons.
In the Tracks window:
•• OPTION and Up or Down changes the zoom factor of the selected track.
•• OPTION and Left resets the zoom factor of the selected track.
•• OPTION and Right resets the zoom factor of all tracks of the same class (audio, MIDI, and so
on) as the selected track.

Use the cursor buttons as computer keyboard arrow keys

In modes that don’t require page or slot shifts, the cursor buttons emulate the computer
keyboard arrow keys. As an example, the left and right buttons select channel strips when in
Mixer view.

In Large and Temporary Nudge modes, the Cursor Left and Cursor Right buttons emulate the
computer keyboard arrow keys, allowing region or event selection.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 88

mm Hold down the SHIFT button, then use the Up, Down, Left, or Right buttons as you would use the
equivalent computer keyboard arrow keys.
When SHIFT and ZOOM are pressed, the cursor buttons enter Permanent Cursor Key mode—they
mimic the computer arrow keys without the need to hold down the SHIFT button. The ZOOM
button LED flashes when in this mode. Press the ZOOM button to turn off this mode.

Mackie Control Jog/Scrub wheel

The Jog/Scrub Wheel and SCRUB button can be used to navigate through the project, which is
useful for a number of transport tasks. Turn the dial to use it. The outlined Scrub modes change
the behavior of the Jog/Scrub Wheel.
•• Scrub mode off: The Jog/Scrub Wheel moves the playhead.
•• Scrub mode on: The Jog/Scrub Wheel performs scrubbing, which allows you to hear the data of
the selected (or soloed) tracks while scrolling or moving through the project.
Audio tracks are normally played back at their original speed. If you would rather hear them
at double speed, choose Logic Pro > Preferences > Audio > Drivers, and set Maximum Scrub
Speed to Double in the pop-up menu.
Note:  You can also use the SCRUB button for Pause functionality.
•• SHUTTLE mode: The Jog/Scrub Wheel shuttles the playhead—Rotating it increases or decreases
the speed at which the playhead moves. The SCRUB button LED flashes when in Shuttle mode.

Mackie Control programmable user modes

The Mackie Control provides six programmable user modes, which you can use for your own
assignments. You can activate each of these modes by holding down the SHIFT button and one
of the Assignment buttons, as follows:
•• TRACK + SHIFT = User mode 1.
•• PAN/SURROUND + SHIFT = User mode 2.
•• EQ + SHIFT = User mode 3.
•• SEND + SHIFT = User mode 4.
•• PLUG-IN + SHIFT = User mode 5.
•• INSTRUMENT + SHIFT = User mode 6.

The Assignment display shows user modes as u1, u2, and so on.

Create an assignment in one of the user modes

1 Activate the user mode you want to use by holding down the SHIFT button and pressing one of
the Assignment buttons, as listed above.
2 In Logic Pro, use the Learn process to create one or more assignments, as described in Assign
and delete controllers in Easy view on page 36.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 89

Mackie Control foot switches
You can connect a momentary foot pedal—with either positive or negative polarity—to the foot
switch sockets. By default, foot switches control the outlined functions:
•• USER SWITCH A is assigned to Start/Stop.
•• USER SWITCH B is assigned to Record. (Note that a track must be selected and armed for
recording to take place.)
•• EXTERNAL CONTROL is assigned to the MASTER fader level. Use only an expression pedal with
this socket.

The polarity of the foot switches is determined by the Mackie Control when powered up. You
should first connect the foot switches, then turn on the Mackie Control.

Mackie Control assignments

Mackie Control assignments overview
Each of these sections outline how Mackie Control interface elements are assigned to
Logic functions.
•• Mackie Control Display buttons on page 91
•• Mackie Control channel strips (1 to 8) on page 91
•• Mackie Control Assignment buttons on page 94
•• Mackie Control function keys on page 95
•• Mackie Control Global View buttons on page 97
•• Mackie Control modifier buttons on page 98
•• Mackie Control automation buttons on page 99
•• Mackie Control utilities buttons on page 99
•• Mackie Control transport buttons on page 100
•• Mackie Control cursor keys on page 101
•• Mackie Control Jog/Scrub wheel on page 103
•• Mackie Control external inputs on page 103

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 90

Mackie Control Display buttons
The table outlines the display controls and their functions:

Button Modifier Function/Comments

NAME/VALUE — Switch between parameter name
and parameter value display.
SHIFT Cycle through level meter displays:
vertical, horizontal, and off.
OPTION Switch between track name and
track number: name display.
CONTROL Clear clip/overload flags.
CMD/ALT Enter control surface group
settings mode.
SMPTE/BEATS — Switch between SMPTE and beat
format in clock display.

Mackie Control channel strips (1 to 8)

The table outlines the channel strip controls and their functions:

Control Modifier Function/Comments

Rotate V-Pot — Modify parameter displayed in
LCD.
OPTION Set parameter to minimum,
default, or maximum value.
CMD/ALT Modify parameter at high
resolution.
Press V-Pot button — Set parameter displayed on LCD to
default value, or switch between
two possible values.
Flashing preselection:
— Enter the preselected value.
Menu options:
— Enter whatever option is visible in
display.
If track is folder:
— Enter folder.
REC/RDY button — Activate/deactivate Record Enable
button of track.
OPTION Disable Record Enable button for
all tracks.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 91

Control Modifier Function/Comments
SOLO button — Activate/deactivate Solo button of
track’s channel strip.
OPTION Disable Solo button for all channel
strips.
In Send Destination/Level Mixer
view:
— Switch pre/post state of selected
send.
In Send Destination/Level Channel
view:
— Switch between pre/post fader
mode of send on selected channel
strip.
MUTE button — Activate/deactivate Mute button of
track’s channel strip.
OPTION Disable Mute button for all
channel strips.
In Mixer view:
SHIFT Activate/deactivate mute/bypass
of the shown parameter.
In EQ Mixer view:
SHIFT Activate/deactivate bypass of the
current EQ band.
In EQ Frequency/Gain view:
— Activate/deactivate bypass of
selected EQ band.
In Send Mixer view:
SHIFT Activate/deactivate bypass of
selected send.
In Send Destination/Level Mixer
view:
— Activate/deactivate bypass of
selected send.
In Send Destination/Level Channel
view:
— Activate/deactivate mute of send
on selected channel strip.
In Plug-in Mixer view:
SHIFT Activate/deactivate bypass of
plug-in.
In Instrument Mixer view:
SHIFT Activate/deactivate bypass of
instrument.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 92

Control Modifier Function/Comments
SELECT button — Select channel strip.
SHIFT Set channel strip volume to unity
level (0 dB).
OPTION Creates a new track with the same
assignment as the selected track
and switches to Arrange view.
SHIFT+OPTION Create a new track with the next
channel strip (following the
selected track) and switches to
Arrange view.
Fader — Adjust volume.
In Flip mode “Duplicate”:
— Same function as V-Pot of same
channel.
In Flip mode “Swap”:
— Swap function with V-Pot of same
channel.
In Surround Angle/Diversity view:
— Adjust surround diversity.
In EQ Frequency/Gain view:
— Adjust gain of selected EQ band.
In Send Destination/Level Mixer
view:
— Adjust send level of selected send.
In Send Destination/Level Channel
view:
— Adjust send level of send on
selected channel strip.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 93

Mackie Control Assignment buttons
Hold down to show a shortcut menu on the LCD. Functions or commands are assigned to V-Pots.
Release the chosen assignment button to switch V-Pots to Multi Channel or Channel views.
The table outlines both the standard use of assignment buttons and their use when used in
conjunction with a modifier button.

Button Modifier Function/Comments

TRACK — Channel strip parameters
User mode 1
SHIFT User mode 1
PAN/SURROUND — Pan/Surround parameters
SHIFT User mode 2
EQ — EQ parameters
SHIFT User mode 3
SEND — Send parameters
SHIFT User mode 4
PLUG-IN — Plug-in selection or Plug-in Edit
mode
SHIFT User mode 5
INSTRUMENT — Instrument selection or Instrument
Edit mode
SHIFT User mode 6
BANK <> — Shift fader bank LEFT/RIGHT by
number of channel strips.
OPTION Shift fader bank to beginning or
end.
CHANNEL<> — Shift fader bank LEFT/RIGHT by
one channel.
OPTION Shift fader bank to beginning or
end.
FLIP — Switch Flip mode between Off and
Duplicate.
SHIFT Switch Flip mode between Off and
Swap.
CONTROL Switch Flip mode between Off and
Zero (turns fader motors off).
GLOBAL VIEW — Switch between Arrange view and
All view.
SHIFT Switch between Arrange view and
Tracks view.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 94

Mackie Control function keys
The table outlines the function key controls and their functions:

Button Modifier Function/Comments

F1 — Recall screenset 1.
SHIFT Open or close Tracks window.
CMD/ALT Cut
TRACK Switch to Mixer view Volume.
PAN/SURROUND Switch to Mixer view Pan/surround
angle.
EQ Switch to Mixer view Bypass.
SEND Switch to Mixer view Destination.
MARKER Create marker without rounding.
NUDGE Nudge value: Tick
In modal dialog: F1 key is equivalent to computer
keyboard 1 key.
F2 — Recall screenset 2.
SHIFT Open or close Mixer window.
CMD/ALT Copy
TRACK Switch to Mixer view Pan.
PAN/SURROUND Switch to Mixer view Pan/surround
radius.
EQ Switch to Mixer view EQ Type.
SEND Switch to Mixer view Level.
MARKER Create marker with rounding.
NUDGE Nudge value: Format
In modal dialog: F2 key is equivalent to computer
keyboard 2 key.
F3 — Recall screenset 3.
SHIFT Open or close Event Editor.
CMD/ALT Paste
TRACK Switch to Mixer view Channel Strip
mode.
PAN/SURROUND Switch to Mixer view Pan/surround
LFE.
EQ Switch to Mixer view Frequency.
SEND Switch to Mixer view Position.
MARKER Delete marker.
NUDGE Nudge value: Beat
In modal dialog: F3 key is equivalent to computer
keyboard 3 key.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 95

Button Modifier Function/Comments
F4 — Recall screenset 4.
SHIFT Open or close Score Editor.
CMD/ALT Clear
TRACK Switch to Mixer view Input.
PAN/SURROUND Switch to Mixer view Pan/surround
mode.
EQ Switch to Mixer view Gain.
SEND Switch to Mixer view Mute.
NUDGE Nudge value: Bar
In modal dialog: F4 key is equivalent to computer
keyboard 4 key.
F5 — Recall screenset 5.
SHIFT Open or close Step Editor.
CMD/ALT Select All
TRACK Switch to Mixer view Output.
PAN/SURROUND Switch to Channel view.
EQ Switch to Mixer view Q Factor.
SEND Switch to Channel view.
NUDGE Nudge value: Frame
In modal dialog: F5 key is equivalent to computer
keyboard 5 key.
F6 — Recall screenset 6.
SHIFT Open or close Piano Roll Editor.
CMD/ALT Select All Following.
TRACK Switch to Mixer view Automation.
PAN/SURROUND Switch to Angle/Diversity view.
EQ Switch to Channel view.
SEND Switch to Channel Strip 2 view.
NUDGE Nudge value: 1/2 Frame
In modal dialog: F6 key is equivalent to computer
keyboard 6 key.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 96

Button Modifier Function/Comments
F7 — Recall screenset 7.
SHIFT Open/Close Control bar.
CMD/ALT Select Similar Regions/events.
TRACK Switch to Mixer view Displayed
parameter.
PAN/SURROUND Switch to Surround X/Y view.
EQ Switch to Frequency/Gain Mixer
view.
SEND Switch to Destination/Level Mixer
view.
In modal dialog: F7 key is equivalent to computer
keyboard 7 key.
F8 — Close topmost floating window.
SHIFT Open or close Audio Bin.
CMD/ALT Select Inside Locators.
TRACK Switch to Channel Strip Setup
view.
EQ Switch to Frequency/Gain Channel
view.
SEND Switch to Destination/Level
Channel view.
In modal dialog: F8 key is equivalent to computer
keyboard 8 key.

Mackie Control Global View buttons

The table outlines the global view controls and their functions:

Button Modifier Function/Comments

MIDI TRACKS — Switch to All view and show MIDI
tracks.
SHIFT Set to fader bank no. 1 (channel
strips 1 to 8, for example).
In modal dialog: MIDI TRACKS button is equivalent
to computer keyboard 9 key.
INPUTS — Switch to All view and show input
channel strips.
SHIFT Set to fader bank no. 2 (channel
strips 9 to 16, for example).
In modal dialog: INPUTS button is equivalent to
computer keyboard 0 key.
AUDIO TRACKS — Switch to All view and show audio
channel strips.
SHIFT Set to fader bank no. 3 (channel
strips 17 to 24, for example).

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 97

Button Modifier Function/Comments
In modal dialog: AUDIO TRACKS button is
equivalent to computer keyboard’s
Period key.
AUDIO INSTRUMENTS — Switch to All view and show
software instrument channel strips.
SHIFT Set to fader bank no. 4 (channel
strips 25 to 32, for example).
In modal dialog: AUDIO INSTRUMENTS button is
equivalent to computer keyboard
/ key.
AUX — Switch to All view and show aux
channel strips.
SHIFT Set to fader bank no. 5 (channel
strips 33 to 40, for example).
In modal dialog: AUX button is equivalent to
computer keyboard * key.
BUSSES — Switch to All view and show bus
channel strips.
SHIFT Set to fader bank no. 6 (channel
strips 41 to 48, for example).
In modal dialog: BUSSES button is equivalent to
computer keyboard - key.
OUTPUTS — Switch to All view and show
output and master channel strips.
SHIFT Set to fader bank no. 7 (channel
strips 49 to 56, for example).
In modal dialog: OUTPUTS button is equivalent to
computer keyboard + key.
USER — Currently unassigned
SHIFT Set to fader bank no. 8 (channel
strips 57 to 64, for example).

Mackie Control modifier buttons

The table outlines the modifier buttons (while held down) and their functions:

Button Function/Comments
SHIFT Switch to second function.
OPTION Apply function to all channel strips or set parameter
to minimum, default, or maximum value.
CONTROL Disable Group functions while held down.
CMD/ALT Enable Fine mode; shift parameter page by one
parameter instead of page.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 98

Mackie Control automation buttons
The table outlines the automation controls and their functions:

Mackie Control Modifier Function/Comments

READ/OFF — Set selected track’s automation to
Read or Off.
OPTION Set all tracks’ automation to Read
or Off.
TOUCH — Set selected track’s automation to
Touch.
OPTION Set all tracks’ automation to Touch.
LATCH — Set selected track’s automation to
Latch.
OPTION Set all tracks’ automation to Latch.
WRITE — Set selected track’s automation to
Write.
OPTION Set all tracks’ automation to Write.
TRIM Currently unassigned
GROUP — Enter Group Edit mode.
SHIFT Create a new group, open the
Group window and enter Group
Edit mode.
TRACK Switch to Mixer view, displaying
group parameter.
OPTION Switch to Single view.

Mackie Control utilities buttons

The table outlines the utility controls and their functions:

Button Modifier Function/Comments

SAVE — Save project.
OPTION Save project as.
UNDO — Undo
SHIFT Redo
OPTION Open Undo History.
CANCEL — Leave folder.
Flashing preselection:
— Cancel preselection.
In alerts:
— Execute Cancel button.
ENTER — Enter folder of selected track.
In alerts:
— Execute default button.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 99

Mackie Control transport buttons
The table outlines the transport controls and their functions:

Button Modifier Function/Comments

MARKER — Switch Small Marker mode on/off.
SHIFT Switch Large Marker mode on/off.
NUDGE — Switch Small Nudge mode on/off.
SHIFT Switch Large Nudge mode on/off.
MARKER Create a marker. This allows you
to create a marker with one hand
without entering Large Marker
mode.
CYCLE — Activate/deactivate Cycle mode.
SHIFT Switch to Cycle view.
DROP — Activate/deactivate Autopunch
mode.
SHIFT Switch to Punch view.
REPLACE — Activate/deactivate Replace mode.
CLICK — Activate/deactivate metronome
click (separately for playback and
record).
SHIFT Activate/deactivate internal/
external sync and MMC.
SOLO — Activate/deactivate Solo Lock
function.
SHIFT Enable Solo Lock function.
REWIND << — Shuttle rewind.
MARKER Go to previous marker.
NUDGE Nudge left by chosen value.
CYCLE Engage Cycle mode and set left
locator to playhead.
DROP Engage Autopunch mode and set
punch in locator.
In Marker mode:
— Go to previous marker.
In Nudge mode:
— Nudge left by chosen value.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 100

Button Modifier Function/Comments
F.FWD >> — Shuttle forward.
MARKER Go to next marker.
NUDGE Nudge right by chosen value.
CYCLE Engage Cycle mode and set right
locator to playhead.
DROP Engage Autopunch and set punch
out to locator.
In Marker mode:
— Go to previous marker.
In Nudge mode:
— Nudge right by chosen value.
STOP — Stop
PLAY — Play
SHIFT Pause
RECORD — Record

Mackie Control cursor keys

The table outlines the cursor controls and their functions:

Mackie Control Modifier Function/Comments

Cursor Left/Right If in Mixer view:
— Select previous/next parameter of
current view.
ZOOM Scroll window horizontally by
page.
If in Channel Strip EQ, Send view,
or Plug-in/Instrument Edit view:
— Shift current editor page by one
page.
CMD/ALT Shift current editor page by one
parameter.
ZOOM Scroll window horizontally by
page.
Otherwise (always in Nudge
mode):
— Mimic computer keyboard Left/
Right Arrow keys.
ZOOM Scroll window horizontally by
page.
In Zoom mode:
— Change horizontal zoom level.
SHIFT Reset individual track zoom of
current track (Cursor Left) or all
tracks of same type (Cursor Right).

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 101

Mackie Control Modifier Function/Comments
Cursor Up/Down In Channel Strip EQ, Send view, or
Plug-In/Instrument Editor view:
— Select previous/next EQ band,
Send, or Insert slot.
ZOOM Scroll window vertically by page.
Otherwise (always in Nudge
mode):
— Mimic computer keyboard Up/
Down Arrow keys.
ZOOM Scroll window vertically by page.
In Zoom mode:
— Change vertical zoom level.
SHIFT Change individual track zoom of
current track.
ZOOM — Switch between default cursor
button behavior (see above) and
Zoom mode.
SHIFT Switch between default cursor
button behavior and permanently
mimicking computer keyboard
arrow keys.

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 102

Mackie Control Jog/Scrub wheel
The table outlines the Jog/Scrub wheel controls and their functions:

Control Modifier Function

Jog Wheel — Move the playhead forward or
back.
CYCLE Set the left locator to the current
playhead position, advance the
playhead as normal, then set
the right locator to the playhead
position. Further Jog Wheel
turns while still holding down
CYCLE advances the playhead
and sets the right locator again.
Tip: Rotating the Jog Wheel
counterclockwise while holding
down CYCLE defines a skip-cycle
range.
DROP Set the punch in locator to the
current playhead position, advance
the playhead as normal, then
set the punch out locator to the
playhead position. Further Jog
Wheel turns while still holding
down DROP advances the
playhead and sets the punch out
locator again.
SCRUB button — Activate/deactivate Scrub mode.
SHIFT Enable Shuttle mode on the Jog
Wheel (SCRUB button LED flashes).

Mackie Control external inputs

The table outlines the external input controls and their functions:

Input Modifier Function

USER SWITCH A — Play/Stop
USER SWITCH B — Record
EXTERNAL CONTROL — Master Volume

Chapter 4    Mackie Control 103

M-Audio iControl
5
iControl overview
You can use the iControl with Logic Pro to make working with GarageBand projects easier. When
you open a GarageBand project in Logic Pro, you can edit it using the iControl just as you would
in GarageBand. You can also take full advantage of the greater control, editing, and processing
power afforded by Logic Pro.

Given the hugely expanded functionality of Logic Pro over GarageBand, some iControl buttons
may not be assigned as you might expect. You can, however, easily reassign iControl buttons
in the Controller Assignments window. For more information, see Controller assignments
overview on page 34.

In addition to editing volume, pan, and other channel strip functions, the iControl lets you edit
any plug-in that can be automated in Logic Pro. Many Logic Pro effect and instrument plug-ins,
and those of third-party manufacturers, feature dozens of parameters. You can access each of
these parameters with the iControl.

Note:  If a third-party plug-in that you’re using does not support remote editing or other
features mentioned in this documentation, contact the plug-in manufacturer to obtain an
updated version.

When you connect the iControl to any of your computer’s USB ports, Logic Pro automatically
detects the device. If any channels are muted, soloed, or record-enabled in the current project,
the LED on the corresponding channel strip control is lit to reflect the channel strip’s state. If
Cycle mode is active, a lit LED also indicates this.

104
iControl Assignment buttons
You can use the buttons along the left side of the iControl, in the areas labeled All Tracks and
Selected Track, to select different functions for the rotary encoders located along the right
edge, in the channel strip area. In some cases, the channel strip area controls can change the
functionality of the Select buttons.

Assignment buttons
•• Volume button: Press the Volume button to assign the rotary encoders (in the channel strip
area) to control volume for the eight active channels. The channel strip buttons—Select,
Record Enable, Mute, and Solo—work as described in iControl channel strip controls on
page 107.
•• Pan button: Press the Pan button to assign the rotary encoders to control the pan/balance of
the eight active channels. The channel strip button functionality is as per their defaults.
•• Track Info button: Press the Track Info button to activate Channel view. In this view, you can use
the Select (Sel) buttons and rotary encoders to edit global parameters of the selected channel
strip. The Record Enable, Mute, and Solo buttons retain their default functions.
•• Sel button 1 to 5: Switches the bypass state of the first five Insert slots.
•• Sel button 6 and 7: Switches the bypass state of the first and second Send slots.
•• Sel button 8: Not assigned
In Channel view, each of the Select buttons is lit when the respective Insert or Send slot is
enabled, and unlit when the slot is bypassed.
•• Encoder 1: If the selected channel is an audio channel strip with a Noise Gate effect, controls
the Threshold parameter of the Noise Gate (if inserted in the selected channel strip).
•• Encoder 2: If the selected channel is an audio channel strip with a Compressor effect, controls
the Compressor’s Ratio.
Note:  The assignments for Encoder 1 and 2 are optimized for GarageBand Real Instrument
tracks, which have a default Noise Gate and Compressor effect inserted.
•• Encoder 3: Not assigned
•• Encoder 4: Not assigned
•• Encoder 5: Controls the Pan knob of the channel.
•• Encoder 6: Controls the send level for the first send of the channel.
•• Encoder 7: Controls the send level for the second send of the channel.
•• Encoder 8: Controls the Volume fader of the channel.
•• Generator button: If the selected channel strip is a software instrument channel strip, pressing
the Generator button assigns the rotary encoders to edit the sound generation parameters of
the instrument. These assignments are in groups of eight parameters. The Arrow Up and Arrow
Down buttons switch to the previous or next page of eight parameters. Use of the Generator
button has no effect if the selected channel strip is not a software instrument channel strip.
•• Effect 1 and Effect 2 buttons: Press Effect 1 to assign the rotary encoders to edit the parameters
of the third Insert slot of the selected channel strip. Press Effect 2 to assign the rotary encoders
to edit the parameters of the fourth Insert slot (if a fourth Insert slot exists). The Arrow Up and
Arrow Down buttons switch to the previous or next page of parameters.
Hold down Option while pressing the Effect 1 or Effect 2 button to switch the bypass state of
Insert slots 3 and 4, respectively.

Chapter 5    M-Audio iControl 105

 When using the Arrow buttons to switch between parameter pages—accessed through use of
the Generator, Effect 1, or Effect 2 button—the parameters change in groups of eight (unless
the parameters on the last page do not make a complete group of eight). For example, if a
plug-in has 19 parameters and the iControl is controlling parameters 1 to 8:
•• Press the Arrow Up button to shift to parameters 9 to 16.
•• Press the Arrow Up button again to shift to parameters 12 to 19.
•• Press the Arrow Down button to shift back to parameters 9 to 16, not 4 to 11.
This way, you always revert to the page positions you expect to find and are comfortable with.
•• EQ button: Press the EQ button to edit the EQ parameters of the selected channel strip. If a
Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted in the selected channel strip, pressing the EQ button
opens the EQ plug-in window. If no Channel or Linear Phase EQ exists on the selected channel
strip, a Channel EQ is inserted automatically. The Arrow Up and Arrow Down buttons switch to
the next or previous parameter page.
Each Assignment button has two modes—Mixer view and Channel view—that determine
whether the rotary encoders (and in some cases, the Select buttons) edit separate channels or
the same channel. For more information, see iControl Mixer and Channel view on page 107.

iControl Arrow buttons

The iControl has channel strip controls for eight channel strips, which default to channel strips
1 to 8. To access further channel strips, press the Arrow Up button. This allows you to control
channel strips 9 through 16. Press the Arrow Up button again to control channel strips 17 to 24,
or press the Arrow Down button to control channel strips 1 to 8.

When using the Arrow buttons to switch between groups of channel strips, the channel strips
follow groupings of eight (starting from channel strip 1) unless the last group of channel strips
does not make a complete group of eight. For example, if a project has 19 channel strips, and the
iControl is controlling channel strips 1 to 8:
•• Press the Arrow Up button to shift to channel strips 9 to 16.
•• Press the Arrow Up button again to shift to channel strips 12 to 19.
•• Press the Arrow Down button to shift back to channel strips 9 to 16, not 4 to 11.

Hold down the Option button while pressing the Arrow Up button to jump to the first eight
channel strips in the project. Press the Option and Arrow Down buttons to jump to the last eight
channel strips in the project. For example, if a project has 64 channel strips, pressing Option–
Arrow Up jumps to channel strips 57 to 64, and pressing Option–Arrow Down jumps to channel
strips 1 to 8.

Note:  If the Generator, EQ, Effect 1, or Effect 2 button is lit, the functions of the Arrow Up and
Arrow Down buttons are as described in iControl Assignment buttons on page 105.

Chapter 5    M-Audio iControl 106

iControl channel strip controls
The right side of the iControl features eight rows of controls that you can use to edit channel
strips. Each row includes Select, Record Enable, Mute, and Solo buttons plus a rotary encoder.

Channel strip controls

•• Select button: Press to select the channel for channel-based editing or assignment commands.
When a channel is selected, “Sel” is lit on the button.
Note:  If the Track Info button is lit, the Select buttons behave differently. See iControl
Assignment buttons on page 105 for details.
•• Record Enable button: Press to arm the associated channel strip for recording. When a channel
is armed for recording, the dot is lit. Press the Record Enable button a second time to disable
recording for the channel.
Hold down the Option button and press the Record Enable button of any channel to disarm
all channel strips.
•• Mute button: Press to mute the channel. The speaker icon is lit when the channel strip is muted.
Press the Mute button a second time to unmute the channel strip.
Hold down the Option button and press the Mute button of any channel to unmute all
channel strips.
•• Solo button: Press to solo the associated channel strip in the application. The headphone icon
is lit when the channel strip is soloed. Press the Solo button a second time to exit Solo mode
for the channel strip.
Hold down the Option button and press the Solo button of any channel to hear (unsolo) all
channel strips.
•• Rotary encoder: Each channel features a rotary encoder, located to the right of the Solo button.
The function assigned to the encoders changes when different Assignment buttons are
pressed. See iControl Assignment buttons on page 105.
Pressing the Option button while turning a rotary encoder—regardless of the active
assignment mode—switches between the parameter’s minimum, default, and maximum
values.

iControl Mixer and Channel view

The rotary encoders operate in two views: Mixer view and Channel view. The view determines
whether the rotary encoders (and in some cases, the Select buttons) edit multiple channels or a
single channel.
•• Mixer view: Accesses the same parameter for eight channel strips, such as pan or volume
(normally a section of the Mixer window).
•• Channel view: Accesses eight parameters of the selected channel strip.

Press one of the Assignment buttons to access Mixer or Channel view. For more information
about using the Assignment buttons, see iControl Assignment button functions on page 110.

Chapter 5    M-Audio iControl 107

 Use the iControl Jog Wheel
You can navigate through projects with the Jog Wheel, located toward the lower-left area of the
iControl, just above the transport controls.

Navigate with the iControl Jog Wheel

mm Turn the wheel to the right to move the playhead forward.
mm Turn the wheel to the left to move the playhead backward.

iControl transport controls

The transport controls at the bottom-left corner of the iControl feature six large buttons: Record,
Return to Zero, Rewind, Play, Fast Forward, and Cycle. You can use these buttons to navigate your
projects and to perform a number of recording and editing tasks.

Transport controls
•• Record button: Press to activate recording on channel strips that are currently armed for
recording. See iControl Assignment buttons on page 105.
•• Return to Zero button: Press to move the playhead to the beginning of the project.
•• Rewind button: Quickly press to move the playhead backward by one bar. Hold down the
Rewind button to continuously move the playhead backward in one-bar steps.
You can also press the Rewind and Cycle buttons simultaneously to activate Cycle mode, and
set the left cycle border (left locator) to the current playhead position.
•• Play/Stop button: Press to start playback from the current playhead position or to stop
playback if the project is currently playing or recording.
•• Fast Forward button: Quickly press to move the playhead forward by one bar. Hold down the
Fast Forward button to continuously move the playhead forward in one-bar increments.
You can also press the Fast Forward and Cycle buttons simultaneously to activate Cycle mode,
and set the right cycle border (right locator) to the current playhead position.
•• Cycle button: Press to turn Cycle mode on or off.
You can activate Cycle mode—and set the left and right cycle locators, respectively—by using
the Rewind or Fast Forward and Cycle buttons together. See Use iControl locators and Cycle
mode on page 109.

Chapter 5    M-Audio iControl 108

 Use iControl locators and Cycle mode
The left and right locators are used to mark a section of your project. These are often used in
conjunction with cycle facilities, which repeatedly play back the section of your project between
the locators.

Set left and right locators and turn on Cycle mode

1 Use the Jog Wheel to move the playhead to the left locator position, then press both the Cycle
and Rewind buttons.
2 Do one of the following:
•• Navigate to the position where you want to set the right locator with the Jog Wheel, then
press the Cycle and Fast Forward buttons simultaneously.
•• Hold down the Cycle button, navigate to the position where you want to set the right locator
using the Jog Wheel, then release the Cycle button.
•• Rotating the Jog Wheel counterclockwise (to the left) while holding down Cycle defines a
skip-cycle range.

iControl Master fader

Move the Master fader on the iControl to set the level of the Master fader in the Logic Pro Mixer.
The Master fader changes the level of all output channels, but does not affect the relative levels
of channels that precede the Master fader in the signal path. Move the fader left to decrease the
master level, or to the right to increase the master level.

Chapter 5    M-Audio iControl 109

iControl assignments
iControl assignments overview
The assignment tables show all assignments for each control, both with and without the Option
button for the Assignment buttons and channel strip controls and the Cycle button for the Jog
Wheel and transport buttons.
•• iControl Assignment button functions on page 110
•• iControl channel strip functions on page 111
•• iControl Jog Wheel functions on page 111
•• iControl transport functions on page 112

iControl Assignment button functions

The Assignment buttons in the All Tracks and Selected Track areas define the behavior of the
channel strip controls.

iControl button Modifier Function/Comments

Volume — Encoders control channel’s Level
fader.
Pan — Encoders control channel’s Pan/
Balance control.
Generator — Encoders control software
instrument parameters.
Track Info — Encoders control channel strip
parameters.
EQ — Encoders control EQ parameters.
Effect 1 — Encoders control Insert 3
parameters.
Effect 2 — Encoders control Insert 4
parameter.
Option — Modifier for other controls; while
held down, the modified control
either applies the function to
all channel strips, or sets the
parameter to its minimum, default,
or maximum value.
Arrow Up/Arrow Down — Shift fader bank left/right by
number of channel strips.
Option Shift fader bank to first or last
group of channels in the project.

Chapter 5    M-Audio iControl 110

iControl channel strip functions
The table outlines the channel strip controls and their functions:

iControl Modifier Function/Comments

Encoder — Modifies currently selected
parameter.
Option Sets parameter to minimum,
default, or maximum value.
Record Enable — Turns Record Enable button of
channel strip on or off.
Option Disables Record Enable buttons of
all channel strips.
Solo — Turns Solo button of channel strip
on or off.
Option Disables Solo buttons of all
channel strips.
Mute — Turns Mute button of channel strip
on or off.
Option Disables Mute buttons of all
channel strips.
Sel — Selects channel strip, except in
Channel view.

iControl Jog Wheel functions

The table outlines the Jog Wheel controls and their functions:

iControl Modifier Function/Comments

Jog Wheel — Moves playhead.
Cycle Sets the left locator to the current
playhead position, advances the
playhead as usual, then sets the
right locator to the new playhead
position. Further Jog Wheel
turns (to the right) while holding
down the Cycle button advance
the playhead and reset the right
locator position.

Chapter 5    M-Audio iControl 111

iControl transport functions
The table outlines the transport controls and their functions:

iControl Modifier Function/Comments

Record — Record
Return to Zero — Go to beginning of project.
Rewind — Moves the playhead one bar
backward. If held down, continues
to scroll backward.
Cycle Engages Cycle function, and sets
left locator to playhead position.
Play — Play or Stop.
Fast Forward — Moves the playhead one bar
forward. If held down, continues to
scroll forward.
Cycle Engages Cycle function, and sets
right locator to playhead position.
Cycle — Switches Cycle mode on or off.

Chapter 5    M-Audio iControl 112

 Euphonix devices
6
Set up your Euphonix device
Logic Pro supports the EuCon protocol developed by Euphonix. This protocol allows enhanced
communication between the MC Pro, System 5-MC, MC Control, MC Mix, or MC Transport and
Logic Pro.

The term Euphonix device is used when describing all devices as a group. MC Professional device is
used when speaking about the MC Pro and System 5-MC. MC Artist device is used when speaking
about the MC Mix, MC Transport, and MC Control. For any exceptions to the above, individual
device names are used.

Note:  This is an addendum to the Euphonix user documentation and is limited to descriptions of

features specific to Logic Pro. Refer to the Euphonix documentation for more information about
the individual control surfaces.

Depending on the specific Euphonix device you have, the setup process varies. Follow the steps
below to use your Euphonix device with Logic Pro.

Note:  EuCon support in Logic Pro works in a different way than other supported control surface
devices. As a consequence, you cannot use the Controller Assignments window to change
assignments. See the documentation provided with your Euphonix device for information on
the use of parameters and device features. EuCon devices do not appear in the Control Surfaces
Setup window.

Set up your MC Professional device for use with Logic Pro

1 Set up your device as described in the Euphonix user documentation.
2 Install the latest EuCon software on your computer. (If necessary, go to the Euphonix website to
download the most recent version.)
Note:  Installing EuCon software on the MC Professional device requires the installation of two
applications—one for the MC Pro device (EuConMC software), and a second for the computer
(EuConWS client). Full details are in the Euphonix user documentation.
3 Open Logic Pro.
The startup screen lets you know that Logic Pro is starting EuCon.
4 On the MC Pro, press the workstation button associated with your computer.
The MC Pro display shows an Attaching to Logic Pro progress bar.

Set up your MC Artist device for use with Logic Pro

1 Set up your device as described in the Euphonix user documentation.
2 Install the latest EuCon software on your computer. (If necessary, go to the Euphonix website to
download the most recent software version.)
3 With the EuControl application running on your computer, open Logic Pro.
Your MC Artist device automatically connects to the application.

113
 Change the Euphonix track display
By default, tracks shown in the Mixer and on the display of your Euphonix device mirror the
Mixer’s Arrange View. This means that all channel strips with corresponding Track window tracks
are displayed in the same order.

Note:  Redundant tracks—where multiple tracks are routed to the same channel strip—are not
accessible.

Switching the Mixer view to another mode (using the view buttons or channel strip filter
buttons) does not update the Euphonix device display. You can, however, override the
default behavior.

Switch the view of channel strips on Euphonix devices

mm Choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Setup window, and change the Channel Strip View in the
Control Surface Group 1 menu.

Set up MC Professional Soft Key assignments

The “Logic Pro.xml” Application Set file—installed with the EuCon software on your
MC Professional device—features a number of useful Soft Key assignments. It is possible to edit
these assignments.

Change a Soft Key assignment on your MC Professional device

1 Press the Setup button in the lower-right corner of the Soft Keys section on the device.
2 Select the respective Soft Key by pressing it.
3 Choose the EuCon command from the menu.

Logic Pro supports the following EuCon commands:

•• Key Commands: All Logic Pro key commands (except the transport commands) are found
here. The touchscreen uses the same hierarchy as the Key Commands window. Many of these
key commands switch between states (on/off, for example) or set a value. Most also provide
feedback on the Soft Key; for example, a Soft Key assigned to the Open/Close Score Editor
command is illuminated when a Score Editor window is open.
•• Left Wheel/Right Wheel: The commands found here allow you to configure the left or right
wheel to perform a certain action when turned. This includes horizontal or vertical zoom,
waveform zoom, individual track zoom, move locators, adjust left locator, adjust right locator,
move punch locators, adjust punch in or punch out locator, move markers, adjust marker
lengths, nudge selected regions or events, left/right pan (surround X), and front/back pan
(surround Y).
•• Project > Markers: All markers defined in the open project are shown as a list (which only
appears once you create the first marker in that project). Assigning a Soft Key to a marker
displays the marker title on the Soft Key, but only if the marker title consists of six characters
or fewer. A marker name with more than six characters is replaced on the Soft Key by the
marker number (1, for example). With this same limitation, renaming a marker in Logic Pro
also changes the associated Soft Key display. Pressing the Soft Key moves the playhead to
the marker start point. The Soft Key is illuminated while the playhead is within the marker
boundaries. Moving a marker disconnects the Soft Key from the marker.
Note:  Marker Soft Keys are a part of the Application Set, not the project. Don’t forget to save
the User Set after defining a Marker Soft Key.
•• Transport: All transport-related key commands are found here.

Chapter 6    Euphonix devices 114

 Choose Euphonix automation modes
The Euphonix devices only support Read and Write automation modes. Logic Pro, however, also
features Touch and Latch automation modes. When you use the Euphonix devices, activating
Read/Write mode activates Touch mode in Logic Pro. Latch mode cannot be activated with these
devices.

Choose an automation mode on the MC Pro

1 Press the Wave and Select keys simultaneously.
2 Select the automation mode you want from the pop-up menu displayed on the touchscreen. You
can choose between:
•• Isolate: Automation mode is off.
•• Read: Activates Read mode in Logic Pro.
•• Write: Activates Write mode in Logic Pro.
•• Read/Write: Activates Touch mode in Logic Pro.

You can also use the Select key to switch between automation modes in Logic Pro:
•• When you set the automation mode to Off or Read, the Select key switches between these
two modes.
•• When you set the automation mode to Read or Touch, the Select key switches between these
modes.

Choose an automation mode on a CM408T channel strip

1 Press the Wave and Y keys simultaneously.
The available automation modes are displayed in a pop-up menu on the CM408T display.
2 Use the fader of the channel strip to scroll through the following options:
•• Isolate: Automation mode is Off.
•• Read: Activates Read mode in Logic Pro.
•• Write: Activates Write mode in Logic Pro.
•• Read/Write: Activates Touch mode in Logic Pro.
3 Use the Y key to confirm your selection, or the N key to cancel the operation.

Note:  If a write automation mode (Touch, Latch, Write) is active (and an automation parameter
is enabled in the Logic Pro > Preferences > Automation > Touch/Latch/Write Erase settings), the
red “W” LED is lit. The green LED is lit when a read automation mode is active. Both LEDs are lit
when Touch or Latch mode is active.

Choose an automation mode on MC Artist devices

1 Hold down the Shift key.
2 Press the AUTO key repeatedly until your chosen automation mode appears on the display
screen. You can choose between:
•• Blank: Automation mode is Off.
•• Read (r): Activates Read mode in Logic Pro.
•• Write (w): Activates Write mode in Logic Pro.
•• Read/Write (rw): Activates Touch mode in Logic Pro.

Chapter 6    Euphonix devices 115

Euphonix fader strips
The number of fader strips differs across each of the Euphonix devices. This section outlines the
behavior of some fader strip elements in Logic Pro.

Note:  This section is limited to descriptions of features specific to Logic Pro. Refer to the
Euphonix user documentation for information about basic fader behavior.
•• On key: The On key provides the same function as the Mute button in Logic Pro but behaves in
a way that may not be expected.
•• The track is unmuted when the On key is lit (the Logic Pro Mute button is unlit).
•• The track is muted when the On key is unlit (the Logic Pro Mute button is lit).
•• L LED: On MC Professional devices, when the Logic Pro channel strip being controlled by the
fader belongs to an automation group, the L LED of the channel strip is lit.
•• Touching fader selects track: The “Touching fader selects track” preference of Logic Pro does not
apply to the Euphonix devices when they are used with the EuCon protocol. This function is
offered by the individual devices, using the device’s “Select channel by touching fader/joystick”
or “Select by Touch” General preference. This is the same as pressing the Select/Sel key.

Control of plug-ins with Euphonix devices

Logic Pro supports the Euphonix “Open plug-ins on workstation when editing” and “Close plug-
ins on workstation when exiting” preferences.

If the Link button is enabled in an open plug-in window:

•• “Open plug-ins on workstation when editing” does not open a new window when a new
plug-in is selected but replaces the open window’s contents.
•• “Close plug-ins on workstation when exiting” does nothing.

If the Link button is disabled in an open plug-in window:

•• “Open plug-ins on workstation when editing” opens a new plug-in window.
•• “Close plug-ins on workstation when exiting” closes the plug-in window.

Chapter 6    Euphonix devices 116

Euphonix knobsets
Euphonix knobsets overview
When using the Euphonix devices with Logic Pro, the Mixer’s channel strip functions can
be accessed and edited using knobsets. A knobset contains pages, each comprised of eight
parameters. Knobsets are organized hierarchically.

The top-level knobset leads to the following knobsets:

•• Inserts: Press the Inserts knob top to display all effect plug-ins inserted in the currently selected
channel strip. (See Use the Inserts knobset on page 118.) If a plug-in is enabled (and does
not belong to the dynamic, EQ, or filter plug-in groups), either the On key is lit (MC Pro and
MC Mix) or the knob’s image shows a small green LED on the lower left (MC Control). To switch
the bypass state, press the respective On key or knob image, or the Ins In key on the CM408T
channel strip.
•• Input: Press the Input knob top to display all possible channel input values for the selected
channel strip. (See Use the Input knobset on page 119.)
•• Dyn: The Dyn knob top is not currently used to display a list, or allow editing, of dynamic plug-
ins. If a dynamic plug-in is enabled, either the On key is lit (MC Pro and MC Mix) or the knob’s
image shows a small green LED on the lower left (MC Control). To switch the bypass state,
press the respective On key or knob image or the Dyn In key on the CM408T channel strip.
•• EQ: Press the EQ knob top to switch to EQ editing mode. (See Use the EQ knobset on page 121.)
If an EQ plug-in is enabled, either the On key is lit (MC Pro and MC Mix) or the knob’s image
shows a small green LED on the lower left (MC Control). To switch the bypass state, press the
respective On key or knob image or the EQ In key on the CM408T channel strip.
•• Aux or Sends: Press the Aux or Sends knob top to switch to send editing mode. See Use
the Aux or Sends knobset on page 122. If an Aux or Send is enabled, either the On key is
lit (MC Pro and MC Mix) or the knob’s image shows a small green LED on the lower left
(MC Control). Pressing the respective On key or knob image switches the bypass state.
•• Pan: Press the Pan knob top to switch to pan/surround editing mode. (See Use the Pan/
Surround knobset on page 123.)
•• Group: Press the Group knob top to switch to group editing mode. (See Use the Group
knobset on page 123.)
•• Mix or Output: Press the Mix or Output knob top to switch to output editing mode. (See Use
the Mix or Output knobset on page 124.)

Chapter 6    Euphonix devices 117

 Use the Inserts knobset
This knobset allows you to:
•• Edit an effect plug-in (Inserts mode)
•• Change or insert an effect plug-in (Inserts Configuration mode)

Note:  This knobset only relates to insert effects and not to instrument plug-ins.

Edit an effect plug-in

1 Press the Inserts knob top, or key, to display all effect plug-ins inserted in the currently selected
channel strip. This key is labeled “*” (asterisk) on the CM408T channel strip.
Note:  If using the MC Mix, press the CHAN key to enter Channel mode.
The effect plug-in names are displayed on the Soft Keys, the touchscreen, or the display,
depending on the system you are using.
If more than eight effect plug-ins are inserted, you can use the Page keys to display ensuing
plug-ins.
2 Press the knob top that features the name of the effect plug-in you want to edit.
The parameters are displayed in the order shown in the Controls view of the effect.
3 Rotate the respective knob to change the value.
Depending on the system you are using, for parameters with only two values, you can either
press the On key, or turn the respective knob, to switch between the two values. The On key is lit
when the value is 1 (or on) and unlit when the value is 0 (or off).
Pressing a knob top sets the controlled parameter to its default value.
If there are more than eight parameters, use the Page keys to navigate between them.
4 Press the Back key to return to the top-level knobset.

Change or insert an effect plug-in

1 Press the Inserts knob top or key. The key is labeled “*” (asterisk) on the CM408T channel strip.
Note:  If using the MC Mix, press the CHAN key to enter Channel mode.
2 Press both Page keys simultaneously to display the Inserts Configuration knobset.
The first eight Insert slots of the selected channel strip are displayed.
If an Insert slot already contains an effect plug-in, the On key is lit (on the MC Professional and
MC Mix devices). On the MC Control, it is indicated by a small green LED in the lower left of the
knob image.
3 Select the Insert slot you want by pressing the respective knob top. Press the Page keys to
display Insert slots 9 to 15.
The Effect plug-in menu appears. Press the Page keys to display ensuing plug-ins and to move
through the effect plug-in hierarchy.
4 Choose the effect plug-in you want:
•• Pressing the knob top enters a submenu or inserts a selected effect plug-in.
•• Pressing the Back key navigates up one level in the menu hierarchy.

Chapter 6    Euphonix devices 118

 Use the Input knobset
This knobset behaves differently, depending on the channel strip type you are working with—
audio or software instrument.

On audio channel strips, this knobset allows you to:

•• Set a channel strip’s input value (Input mode)
•• Set a channel strip’s input format (Input Configuration mode)

On software instrument channel strips, this knobset allows you to:

•• Edit an instrument plug-in (Input mode)
•• Change or insert an instrument plug-in (Input Configuration mode)

Set a channel strip’s input value

1 Press the Input knob top, or key, to display all possible channel input values for the selected
channel strip.
Note:  If using the MC Mix, press the CHAN key to enter Channel mode.
The input values are displayed on the Soft Keys, the touchscreen, or the display, depending on
the system you are using.
You can use the Page keys to display ensuing input values.
2 Press the knob top that features the name of the channel input value you want to set.
The currently active input value is indicated by a lit On key (on the MC Professional and
MC Mix devices). On the MC Control, it is indicated by a small green LED in the lower left of the
knob image.

Set an audio channel strip’s input format

1 Press the Input knob top or key.
Note:  If using the MC Mix, press the CHAN key to enter Channel mode.
2 Press both Page keys simultaneously to switch to Input Configuration mode.
The selected channel strip’s input format values—Mono, Stereo, Left, Right, Surround—
are displayed.
The currently active format value is indicated by a lit On key (on the MC Professional and
MC Mix devices). On the MC Control, it is indicated by a small green LED in the lower left of the
knob image.
3 Press the respective knob top to choose the input format you want.

Chapter 6    Euphonix devices 119

 Edit an instrument plug-in
1 Press the Input knob top, or key, to display the software instrument plug-in inserted in the
currently selected channel strip.
The instrument plug-in name is displayed on the Soft Keys, the touchscreen, or the display,
depending on the system you are using.
2 Press the knob top to display the instrument plug-in parameters in the order shown in the
Controls view of the instrument.
3 Rotate the respective knob to change the value.
Depending on the system you are using, for parameters with only two values, you can either
press the On key, or turn the respective knob, to switch between the two values. The On key is lit
when the value is 1 (or on) and unlit when the value is 0 (or off).
Pressing a knob top sets the controlled parameter to its default value.
If the instrument plug-in features more than eight parameters, use the Page keys to navigate
between pages of parameters.
4 Press the Back key to return to the top-level knobset.

Change or insert an instrument plug-in

1 Press the Input knob top, or key.
2 Press both Page keys simultaneously to switch to Input Configuration mode.
The Instruments plug-in menu appears. Press the Page keys to display ensuing plug-ins.
If an instrument plug-in is already inserted, the On key is lit (on the MC Professional and
MC Mix devices). On the MC Control, it is indicated by a small green LED in the lower left of the
knob image.
3 Choose the instrument you want:
•• Pressing the knob top activates a submenu or inserts a selected instrument plug-in.
•• Pressing the Back key navigates up one level in the menu hierarchy.

Chapter 6    Euphonix devices 120

 Use the EQ knobset
This knobset allows you to edit the first Channel or Linear Phase EQ inserted in the selected
channel strip.

There are two pages, each showing four EQ bands on eight knobs:
•• One page contains the parameters of EQ bands 1, 2, 7, and 8.
•• One page contains the parameters of EQ bands 3, 4, 5, and 6.

When no Channel or Linear Phase EQ is present on the selected channel strip, pressing the knob
top labeled AddChEQ inserts a Channel EQ.
•• The first knob of an EQ band (the upper or left knob of the pair) controls either Frequency
or Q. To switch between Frequency and Q, use the Select/SEL key if working with the
MC Professional devices or the MC Mix. If using the MC Control, press the Shift key while
touching the knob’s image on the touchscreen. (When active, a small yellow LED lights on
the upper left of the image.) Pressing the knob top sets the controlled parameter to its
default value.
•• The second knob of an EQ band (the lower or right knob of the pair) controls Gain (or Slope).
Pressing the knob top sets the controlled parameter to its default value.
•• If working with the MC Professional devices or the MC Mix, the On key switches the bypass
state of the band. On the MC Control, press the knob’s touchscreen image.

Edit an EQ plug-in
1 Press the EQ knob top, or key, to display the EQ bands of the EQ plug-in inserted in the currently
selected channel strip.
Note:  The MC Mix automatically switches to Channel mode.
The EQ band parameters are displayed on the Soft Keys, the touchscreen, or the display,
depending on the system you are using.
You can use the Page keys to display ensuing parameters.
2 Rotate the respective knob to change the parameter value.
Pressing a knob top sets the controlled parameter to its default value.
3 Press the Back key to return to the top-level knobset.

Chapter 6    Euphonix devices 121

 Use the Aux or Sends knobset
The Aux or Sends (Configuration) knobset allows you to:
•• Edit a send destination (Aux or Sends mode)
•• Change or set a send destination (Aux or Sends Configuration mode)

The Select key (labeled SEL on the MC Mix) switches between Pre Fader (off—unlit) and Post
Fader (on—lit) modes.

Edit a send destination

1 Press the Aux or Sends knob top, or key, to display all send options for the currently selected
channel strip.
Note:  If using the MC Mix, press the CHAN key to enter Channel mode.
The send options are displayed on the Soft Keys, the touchscreen, or the display, depending on
the system you are using.
2 Rotate the respective knob to change the send level.
Pressing a knob top sets the controlled parameter to its default level.
3 Press the Back key to return to the top-level knobset.

Change or set a send destination

1 Press the Aux or Sends knob top, or key.
Note:  If using the MC Mix, press the CHAN key to enter Channel mode.
2 Press both Page keys simultaneously to switch to Send Configuration mode.
The eight Send slots of the currently selected channel strip are displayed.
3 Select the Send slot you want by pressing the respective knob top.
The first eight send destinations are displayed. You can use the Page keys to display further send
destinations (busses).
4 Choose the send destination:
•• Pressing the knob top changes, or sets, a selected destination.
•• Pressing the Back key navigates up one level in the menu hierarchy.

Chapter 6    Euphonix devices 122

 Use the Pan/Surround knobset
This knobset allows you to adjust a channel strip’s Pan/Surround control. If the channel strip’s
input format is set to Surround, the knobset displays the following parameters:
•• Surround Angle
•• Surround Diversity
•• LFE Level
•• Surround X (left/right)
•• Surround Y (front/back)
•• Spread
•• Center Level

Adjust the pan/surround control

1 Press the Pan/Surround knob top, or key, to display the Pan/Surround parameters for the
currently selected channel strip.
Note:  If using the MC Mix, press the CHAN key to enter Channel mode.
The parameter names are displayed on the Soft Keys, the touchscreen, or the display, depending
on the system you are using.
2 Rotate the respective knob to change the parameter value.
Pressing a knob top sets the controlled parameter to its default value.
3 Press the Back key to return to the top-level knobset.

Use the Group knobset

This knobset allows you to edit a channel strip’s group membership.

Add a channel strip to a group

1 Press the Group knob top, or key, to display the list of groups that the currently selected channel
strip is assigned to. This key is labeled Grp on the CM408T channel strip.
Note:  If using the MC Mix, press the CHAN key to enter Channel mode.
The group names are displayed on the Soft Keys, the touchscreen, or the display, depending on
the system you are using.
If a channel strip is associated with more than the first eight groups, you can use the Page keys
to display ensuing groups.
2 Press the knob top that features the name of the group you want to associate the channel
strip with.
•• When you choose an inactive group number, the Group Settings window opens automatically,
with the channel strip being added to the group.
•• When you choose an active group number, the channel strip is added directly to the group.
Tip:  The On key can also be used to switch between active and inactive group membership
for the selected channel strip.
3 Press the Back key to return to the top-level knobset.

Chapter 6    Euphonix devices 123

 Remove a channel strip from a group
1 Press the Group knob top, or key, to display the list of groups that the currently selected channel
strip is assigned to. This key is labeled Grp on the CM408T channel strip.
Note:  If using the MC Mix, press the CHAN key to enter Channel mode.
2 Press the knob top that features the name of the group you want to remove the channel
strip from.
That particular channel is removed from the group.
Tip:  The On key can also be used to switch between active and inactive group membership for
the selected channel strip.
3 Press the Back key to return to the top-level knobset.

Use the Mix or Output knobset

This knobset allows you to change the mix or output destination of a channel strip.

Change the output destination of a channel strip

1 Press the Mix or Output knob top, or key, to display all possible mix or output values for the
currently selected channel strip.
Note:  If using the MC Mix, press the CHAN key to enter Channel mode.
The value names are displayed on the Soft Keys, the touchscreen, or the display, depending on
the system you are using.
2 To select the output destination, do one of the following:
•• Press the knob top that features the name of the mix or output value.
•• Press the On key for the relevant mix or output value.
You can use the Page keys to display ensuing outputs.
The currently active output is indicated by a lit On key (on the MC Professional and MC Mix
devices). On the MC Control, it is indicated by a small green LED in the lower left of the
knob image.
3 Press the Back key to return to the top-level knobset.

Euphonix Logic Pro features

This section describes other features specific to Logic Pro.
•• Layouts: Tracks assigned to channel strips can be saved as a Layout. This Layout can then be
recalled at a later time. Any Layouts saved on Euphonix devices are automatically saved with
the Logic Pro project.
•• Monitors and Control Room: Logic Pro does not support EuCon monitoring control. Use the
Studio Monitor Pro application.
•• Control Surface bar: The control surface bar of the Logic Pro Tracks window offers a special
feature on the Euphonix devices: it shows attentioned tracks in blue.

Note:  The color of the control surface bar cannot be changed in the Control Surfaces Setup
window.

Chapter 6    Euphonix devices 124

 CM Labs Motormix
7
Set up your Motormix
Follow the steps below to use your CM Labs Motormix control surface with Logic Pro.

Set up your CM Labs Motormix in Logic Pro

1 Ensure that your Motormix unit is connected bidirectionally with the MIDI interface.
2 Choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Setup.
3 Choose Install from the Setup window’s New menu.
4 Select Motormix in the Install window, click Add, then set the appropriate MIDI In and Out ports
in the Setup window.

Assignments of CM Labs Motormix interface elements to Logic functions are covered in these
sections:
•• Motormix Select buttons on page 126
•• Motormix faders and pots on page 127
•• Motormix multi buttons on page 130
•• Motormix burn buttons on page 131
•• Motormix Solo and Mute buttons on page 132
•• Motormix view controls on page 132
•• Motormix left function buttons on page 133
•• Motormix right function buttons on page 134

125
Motormix assignments
Motormix Select buttons
The Select buttons (the buttons just below the LCD) have multiple uses, depending on the
current mode.

Note:  If a modifier button, such as SHIFT, is shown below a button description, it indicates that
the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Mode Assignment
Normal Selects the channel displayed in the upper LCD line.
Channels can be shifted to the left and right with the
View left and right buttons.
Bank button LED flashing Channel View: Select buttons switch between
displayed channel strips:
•• 1: Switches to Single view.
•• 2: Switches to Arrange view.
•• 3: All view, MIDI channels
•• 4: All view, input channels
•• 5: All view, audio channels
•• 6: All view, instrument channels
•• 7: All view, aux and bus channels
•• 8: All view, output and master channels
WINDOW/tool button LED on Window Select mode: Select buttons open, assign key
focus, or close a particular window type. LED off: If the
window is not open, the button opens it. LED on: If
the window is open but does not have key focus, the
button activates it. LED flashes: If the window has key
focus, the button closes it.
•• 1: Tracks window
•• 2: Mixer
•• 3: Event List
•• 4: Score Editor
•• 5: Step Editor
•• 6: Piano Roll Editor
•• 7: Control bar
•• 8: Audio Bin
WINDOW/tool button flashes Select Tool mode: Select buttons choose a tool.
•• 1: Pointer
•• 2: Pencil
•• 3: Eraser
•• 4: Text tool
•• 5: Scissors
•• 6: Glue tool
•• 7: Solo tool
•• 8: Mute tool

Chapter 7    CM Labs Motormix 126

Mode Assignment
PLAY/transport button flashes Transport section mode
•• 1: Record
•• 2: Pause
•• 3: Stop
•• 4: Play
•• 5: Rewind
•• 6: Fast Forward
•• Upper LCD row displays current playhead position.
STOP/locate button flashes Locate mode
•• 1: Goes to the left locator.
•• 2: Goes to the right locator.
•• 3: Enables or disables Cycle mode.
•• 4: Enables or disables Autopunch mode.
•• 5: Enters Marker mode (see below).
•• 6: Opens Marker List.
•• Upper LCD row displays the current playhead
position.
Marker mode •• 1 to 6: Select markers 1 to 6. Marker names are
displayed in the upper LCD row.
•• 7: Creates a new marker.
•• 8: Deletes the selected marker.
Group Edit mode Switches between group parameters. Parameter
display can be shifted by the View left and right
buttons when the SHIFT button is held down.
Effect Assign mode Enters Effect Edit mode for the selected channel.
Effect Edit mode Enables or disables the selected parameter, or resets it
to the default value.
Instrument Assign mode Enters Instrument Edit mode for the selected
(instrument) channel.
Instrument Edit mode Enables or disables the selected parameter, or resets it
to the default value.

Note:  In modal dialogs, the Select buttons generate the computer keyboard character shown on
the button face.

Motormix faders and pots

The faders normally control volume. When in Flip mode, however, they duplicate the rotary
encoder assignments.

The table outlines the rotary pot controls and their assignments.

Note:  If a modifier button, such as SHIFT, is shown below a button description, it indicates that
the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

Rotary pots 1 to 8 Control parameter chosen with the
Rotary Selector, as displayed in the
7 segment display (see below)

Chapter 7    CM Labs Motormix 127

Control Modifier Assignment
7 segment display Shows the current selection for
rotary pots:
Send/EQ editing (S-MUTE or PRE/
PST LED is on):
•• S1 to S8 = Send 1 to 8 level
•• F1 to F8 = EQ band 1 to 8
frequency
•• G1 to G8 = EQ band 1 to 8 gain
•• q1 to q8 = EQ band 1 to 8 Q
factor
Pan/Surround editing (select LED
is on):
•• Pn = Pan
•• An = Surround Angle
•• dv = Surround Diversity
•• FE = Surround LFO
•• Sp = Surround Spread
•• X = Surround X
•• Y = Surround Y
Channel parameter editing (eff-4
LED is on):
•• VL = Volume
•• Pn or An = Pan/Surround Angle
•• FM = Channel input format
•• In = Channel input assignment
•• Ou = Channel output
assignment
•• Au = Automation mode
•• Gr = Group membership
Assignment:
•• d1 to d8 = Assign Send 1 to 8
destination.
Effect editing (DSP/compare LED
is on):
•• P1 to 15 = Assign Insert slot 1 to
15 to effect.
•• P1. to 15. = Effect parameter
editing
Instrument editing (DSP/compare
LED is on):
•• IA = Assign instrument to
Instrument slot.
•• IE. = Instrument parameter
editing
Group property editing (group LED
is on):
•• G1 to 32 = group number

Chapter 7    CM Labs Motormix 128

Control Modifier Assignment
Rotary Selector Selects a slot or parameter for
rotary encoders, depending on the
parameter types being edited with
the rotary encoders:
•• Send slot when editing
send level or assigning send
destination
•• EQ band when editing an EQ
parameter
•• Effect/Instrument slot
when assigning an effect or
instrument
•• Pan/Surround parameter
when editing a Pan/Surround
parameter
•• Channel parameter when
editing a channel parameter
•• Effect/instrument parameter
page when editing an effect or
instrument plug-in
Rotary Selector push button Switches Flip mode between Off
and Duplicate (faders mirror the
rotary encoder assignments).
SHIFT Switches the channel strip display
mode between:
•• Page info in upper line,
parameter name in lower line
•• Parameter name in upper line,
parameter value in lower line

Chapter 7    CM Labs Motormix 129

Motormix multi buttons
These buttons (labeled A to H) have multiple uses depending on the current mode, as indicated
by the green and yellow LEDs to the right.

Note:  If a modifier button, such as SHIFT, is shown below a button description, it indicates that
the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Mode Modifier Assignment

fx bypass Enables or disables bypass of the
currently selected insert effect.
SHIFT (eff-1) Enables or disables bypass of the
currently selected EQ band, and
switches rotary encoders to EQ
frequency editing.
s-mute Enables or disables bypass of
the currently edited send, and
switches rotary encoders to send
level editing.
SHIFT (eff-2) Enables or disables bypass of the
currently selected EQ band, and
switches rotary encoders to EQ
Gain editing.
pre/post Switches between Pre and Post
Fader modes of the currently
edited send, and switches rotary
encoders to send level editing.
Post mode is indicated by a lit LED.
SHIFT (eff-3) Enables or disables the bypass of
the currently selected EQ band,
and switches rotary encoders to
(EQ) Q factor editing.
select Switches the rotary encoders
to Pan/Surround editing. The
parameter is chosen with the
rotary selector.
SHIFT (eff-4) Switches the rotary encoders to
channel parameter editing.

Note:  In modal dialogs, the Multi buttons generate the computer keyboard character shown on
the button face.

Chapter 7    CM Labs Motormix 130

Motormix burn buttons
These buttons (labeled I to P) have multiple uses depending on the current mode, as indicated
by the red LEDs to the left.

Note:  If a modifier button, such as SHIFT, is shown below a button description, it indicates that
the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Mode Modifier Assignment

record Enables or disables Record Enable
state of channel.
SHIFT (fnctA) Switches automation mode to
Latch.
ALL + SHIFT (fnctA) Switches automation mode of all
channels to Latch.
write Switches automation mode to
Write.
ALL Switches automation mode of all
channels to Write.
SHIFT (fnctB) Switches automation mode to
Read.
ALL + SHIFT (fnctA) Switches automation mode of all
channels to Read.
burn Switches automation mode to
Touch.
ALL Switches automation mode of all
channels to Touch.
SHIFT (fnctC) Switches automation mode to Off.
ALL + SHIFT (fnctA) Switches automation mode of all
channels to Off.

Note:  In modal dialogs, the Burn buttons generate the computer keyboard character shown on
the button face.

Chapter 7    CM Labs Motormix 131

Motormix Solo and Mute buttons
These buttons switch the solo and mute state of the displayed channel.

Note:  In modal dialogs, the SOLO and MUTE buttons generate the computer keyboard character
shown on the button face.

Motormix view controls

The table outlines the view controls and their assignments.

Note:  If a modifier button, such as SHIFT, is shown below a button description, it indicates that
the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

Left/right buttons In Effect and Instrument Plug-in
Edit modes: shifts the parameter
bank. In other modes:
•• If BANK LED is off: shifts the
fader bank by one channel.
•• If BANK LED is on: shifts the
fader bank by one bank (a
group of eight channels).
SHIFT In Effect and Instrument Plug-in
Edit modes: shifts the parameter
bank by one parameter. In Group
Edit mode, the group parameter
bank is shifted.
bank Switches mode of left/right
buttons (see above).
SHIFT Sets the Select buttons to Channel
View.
group Sets the Select buttons, rotary
encoders, and Multi buttons to
Group Edit mode.
SHIFT Displays channels’ group
assignments in the LCD. The rotary
encoders allow you to change
assignments.

Chapter 7    CM Labs Motormix 132

Motormix left function buttons
The table outlines the left function button controls and their assignments.

Note:  If a modifier button, such as SHIFT, is shown below a button description, it indicates that
the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

AUTO ENBL/mode Currently unassigned
SHIFT Switches rotary encoders to
Automation Enable mode.
SUSPEND/create While held down, the groups are
temporarily disabled.
SHIFT Creates a new group, and enters
Group Edit mode.
PLUG-IN/compare Switches rotary encoders and Multi
buttons to Effect Assign mode. Use
the Rotary Select knob to choose
the Insert slot you want to edit. In
Effect or Instrument Assign mode,
it switches to Pan mode. In Effect
Edit mode, it switches to Effect
Assign mode. In Instrument Edit
mode, it switches to Instrument
Assign mode.
SHIFT Switches the rotary encoders and
Multi buttons to Instrument Assign
mode.
WINDOW/tools Switches the Select buttons to
Window Select mode.
SHIFT Switches the Select buttons to
Select Tool mode.
ALL/ALT/FINE While ALL/ALT/FINE is held down,
rotary encoders are in Full mode:
rotating counterclockwise sets
minimum; rotating clockwise sets
maximum value.
SHIFT While SHIFT and ALL/ALT/FINE are
held down, the rotary encoders are
in Fine mode. Parameter changes
are made in single unit (or smaller)
values.
DEFAULT/bypass Currently unassigned
SHIFT In Instrument Edit mode: switches
bypass state of the instrument. In
Effect Edit mode: switches bypass
state of the effect being edited.
UNDO/save Performs an Undo step. The LED is
lit if there is a Redo step available.
SHIFT Saves the project. The LED is lit
if the project contains unsaved
changes.

Chapter 7    CM Labs Motormix 133

Control Modifier Assignment
SHIFT Switches to Shift mode, where
the functions indicated by the
(inverted) labels below the buttons
apply.

Motormix right function buttons

The table outlines the right function button controls and their assignments.

Note:  If a modifier button, such as SHIFT, is shown below a button description, it indicates that
the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

PLAY/transport Play key command
SHIFT Switches the Select buttons to
Transport Section mode.
STOP/locate Stop key command
SHIFT Switches the Select buttons to
Locate mode.
FFWD/monitor Shuttle Forward key command
REWIND/status Shuttle Rewind key command
SHIFT Opens Project Settings
Synchronization window.
NEXT/configure Moves the playhead to the next
marker.
LAST/assign When rotary encoders are
displaying send destinations,
use of LAST/assign reverts to
displaying send levels. Otherwise,
moves the playhead to previous
marker.
SHIFT When rotary encoders are
displaying send levels, use of LAST/
assign switches them to display
send destinations. When rotary
encoders are in Effect Edit mode,
use of LAST/assign switches them
to Effect Assign mode. When the
rotary encoders are in Instrument
Edit mode, use of LAST/assign
switches them to Instrument
Assign Mode.
ENTER/utility Identical to the Enter key on
computer keyboard
SHIFT Opens the Project Settings
Automation window.
ESCAPE When LED is lit, escapes from
“special” mode (denoted by
flashing LED). At all other times,
identical to the Esc key on the
computer keyboard.

Chapter 7    CM Labs Motormix 134

 Frontier Design TranzPort
8
Set up your TranzPort
Follow the steps below to use your Frontier Design TranzPort control surface with Logic Pro.

Note:  Support for the AlphaTrack control surface is available from Frontier Design.

Set up your Frontier Design TranzPort device in Logic Pro

1 Ensure that the software that shipped with the TranzPort is installed.
2 Make sure that the Tranz Bridge (the wireless transmitter) is connected to the computer via USB.
When Logic Pro is opened, it installs the TranzPort automatically, and sets it to native mode.

These sections outline the assignment of Frontier Design TranzPort interface elements to
Logic functions.
•• TranzPort channel strip on page 136
•• TranzPort master controls on page 137

TranzPort LCD
The LCD displays the following information:
•• Top line left: Name of currently displayed channel
•• Top line middle: Volume level of currently displayed channel
•• Top line right: Pan position of currently displayed channel
•• Bottom line left: Level meter of currently displayed channel
•• Bottom line right: Current playhead position

135
TranzPort assignments
TranzPort channel strip
The table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments:

Note:  A SHIFT (or other modifier) shown below a button description indicates that the button
has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

<CHAN Shifts the currently displayed
channel to the left by one channel.
SHIFT Shifts the currently displayed
channel left by eight channels.
CHAN> Shifts the currently displayed
channel right by one channel.
SHIFT Shifts the currently displayed
channel right by eight channels.
REC Turns the Record Enable button
of the currently displayed channel
on or off.
SHIFT Disables the Record Enable
buttons of all channels.
SOLO Enables or disables Solo for the
currently displayed channel.
SHIFT Disables Solo for all channels.
MUTE Enables or disables Mute for the
currently displayed channel.
SHIFT Disables Mute for all channels.
ANY SOLO Lit if any tracks, channels, or
regions are soloed.
UNDO Undo
SHIFT Redo

Chapter 8    Frontier Design TranzPort 136

TranzPort master controls
The table outlines the master controls and their assignments:

Note:  A SHIFT (or other modifier) shown below a button description indicates that the button
has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

SHIFT Modifier that alters the function of
other controls.
IN Moves playhead to left cycle
locator.
PUNCH Engages Autopunch mode, and
sets punch in locator to playhead
position.
LOOP Engages Cycle mode, and sets left
cycle locator to playhead position.
OUT Goes to right cycle locator.
PUNCH Engages Autopunch mode, and
sets punch out locator to playhead
position.
LOOP Engages Cycle mode, and sets
right cycle locator to playhead
position.
PUNCH Enables or disables Autopunch
mode.
LOOP Enables or disables Cycle mode.
PREV Moves playhead to previous
marker.
SHIFT Sets locators by previous marker.
ADD Creates marker at playhead
position.
SHIFT Deletes marker at playhead
position.
NEXT Moves playhead to next marker.
SHIFT Sets locators by next marker.

Chapter 8    Frontier Design TranzPort 137

Control Modifier Assignment
Jog Wheel Depending on current Jog Wheel
mode:
•• Moves playhead by bars.
•• Controls audio (and MIDI)
scrubbing.
•• Shuttles forward or backward.
SHIFT Adjusts volume of the currently
displayed channel.
LOOP Sets the left locator to the current
playhead position, advances the
playhead as usual, then sets the
right locator to the playhead
position. Further Jog Wheel
use—while holding down LOOP—
advances the playhead, and sets
the right locator.
Tip: Rotating the Jog Wheel
counterclockwise, while holding
down LOOP, defines a skip cycle
range.
DROP Sets the punch in locator to
the current playhead position,
advances the playhead as usual,
then sets the punch out locator to
the playhead position. Further Jog
Wheel use—while holding down
DROP—advances the playhead,
and sets the punch out locator.
REW Shuttles backward.
SHIFT Goes to last play position.
PUNCH Engages Autopunch mode, and
sets punch in locator to playhead
position.
LOOP Engages Cycle mode, and sets left
locator to playhead position.
F FWD Shuttles forward.
PUNCH Engages Autopunch mode, and
sets punch out locator to playhead
position.
LOOP Engages Cycle mode, and sets
right locator to playhead position.
STOP Stop
SHIFT Switches Jog Wheel between Move
Playhead (by bars), Scrubbing, and
Shuttle modes.
PLAY Play
SHIFT Pause

Chapter 8    Frontier Design TranzPort 138

Control Modifier Assignment
RECORD Record
SHIFT Save
Foot Switch Punch In/Out

Chapter 8    Frontier Design TranzPort 139

 JLCooper CS-32 MiniDesk
9
Set up your CS-32 MiniDesk
Follow the steps below to use your JLCooper CS-32 MiniDesk control surface with Logic Pro.

Add JLCooper CS-32 control surfaces connected via USB

1 Install the software that comes with the CS-32.
2 Ensure that the CS-32 is in Host mode.
3 Make sure that your CS-32 units are connected to the computer via USB.
USB units are installed automatically when you open Logic Pro.

Add JLCooper CS-32 control surfaces connected via MIDI

1 Install the software that comes with the CS-32.
2 Ensure that the CS-32 is in Host mode.
3 Make sure that your CS-32 units are connected to the computer via MIDI.
4 Choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Setup.
5 Choose Install from the Setup window’s New menu.
6 Select the CS-32 from the list in the Install window.
7 Click the Scan button.

CS-32 MiniDesk assignments

CS-32 MiniDesk assignments overview
Assignments of JLCooper CS-32 MiniDesk interface elements to Logic functions are covered in
these sections:
•• CS-32 MiniDesk display on page 141
•• CS-32 MiniDesk pots on page 142
•• CS-32 MiniDesk channel strips on page 143
•• CS-32 MiniDesk bank button on page 144
•• CS-32 MiniDesk F keys on page 145
•• CS-32 MiniDesk cursor controls on page 146
•• CS-32 MiniDesk transport controls on page 146
•• CS-32 MiniDesk Jog wheel controls on page 147

140
CS-32 MiniDesk display
The display shows information on the current mode and parameters being edited.

Display text Meaning

-- A switching parameter (Solo, Mute, Rec/Rdy) has been
disabled.
AE Automation Enable setup: Mute buttons 1–6 display/
set various automation parameters.
AS Pots (knobs) are in Pan/Send Assignment mode.
b1—b9 Pots are in Plug-in or Instrument Bank Select mode.
In Pots are in Instrument Edit mode.
Lt Mute buttons display/set Latch automation mode.
Mu Mute has been enabled.
P1—P9 Pots are in Effect Edit mode.
PA Pots are in Pan/Send mode.
rd Mute buttons display/set Read automation mode.
Re Rec/Rdy has been enabled.
So Solo has been enabled.
Tc Mute buttons display/set Touch automation mode.
Wr Mute buttons display/set Write automation mode.
Other text When a channel is selected, the first two characters of
its name are briefly displayed.
Numbers While editing a numerical value with a fader or pot,
the current value is displayed. If there are more than
two digits in the value, the last two digits are shown.
Plus/minus signs (+/–) are shown if only one digit is
displayed.

Chapter 9    JLCooper CS-32 MiniDesk 141

CS-32 MiniDesk pots
Because the CS-32 MiniDesk pots are not motorized, Pickup mode is used if turned on in Control
Surfaces preferences. In Pickup mode, the controller must reach (pick up) the current value
before the value starts to change. This prevents sudden jumps of parameter values caused by
playing back automation.

A pot’s current value is indicated by the NULL arrow LEDs.

•• The Upper arrow is lit if the pot’s value is above the current value.
•• The Lower arrow is lit if the pot’s value is below the current value.
•• Both arrow LEDs are lit when the pot has reached the current value.

The pots can operate in one of three modes, with one sub-mode in each.
•• Instrument edit mode: Press F8 to enter Instrument edit mode (display shows “In”). The pots
control (software) instrument parameters. Hold down SHIFT (display shows “b1”–“b9”) to move
between banks (pages) of parameters. (See CS-32 MiniDesk cursor controls on page 146.)
•• Effect edit mode: Press F9 to enter Effect edit mode (display shows “P1”–“P9”). The pots control
the parameters of the effect in the currently selected Insert slot. Hold down SHIFT (display
shows “b1”–“b9”) to switch between Insert slots, and move between banks (pages) of
parameters. (See CS-32 MiniDesk cursor controls on page 146.)
•• Pan/Send mode: Press F7 to enable Pan/Send mode (display shows “PA”). In this mode, the pots
control the following channel parameters:

Control Assignment
SEND A/P1 Controls Send 1 level of selected channel.
SEND B/P2 Controls Send 2 level of selected channel.
PAN/P3 Controls pan of selected channel.
SEND C/P4 Controls Send 3 level of selected channel.
SEND D/P5 Controls Send 4 level of selected channel.
SEND E/P6 Controls Send 5 level of selected channel.

While SHIFT is held down (display shows “AS”), the pots allow you to perform the following
assignments:

Control Assignment
SEND A/P1 Assigns Send 1 destination (bus) for selected channel.
SEND B/P2 Assigns Send 2 destination for selected channel.
PAN/P3 Assigns input format of selected channel.
SEND C/P4 Assigns Send 3 destination for selected channel.
SEND D/P5 Assigns Send 4 destination for selected channel.
SEND E/P6 Assigns Send 5 destination for selected channel.

Chapter 9    JLCooper CS-32 MiniDesk 142

CS-32 MiniDesk channel strips
The table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments:

Note:  If a modifier button, such as SHIFT, is shown below a description, it indicates that the
control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

PAN SELECT/TRACK SELECT Selects channel strip (destination
for the selected track).
SOLO Enables or disables Solo.
LOCATE Moves playhead to markers 1 to
32.
SHIFT LOCATE 17: Creates a new marker.
LOCATE 18: Creates a new marker
without rounding.
LOCATE 19: Deletes the marker at
the playhead position.
LOCATE 25: Opens the Marker List.
LOCATE 26: Opens the Marker Text
window.
LOCATE 28: Sets locators by
previous marker.
LOCATE 29: Sets locators by current
marker.
LOCATE 30: Sets locators by next
marker.
LOCATE 31: Moves playhead to
previous marker.
LOCATE 32: Moves playhead to
next marker.

Chapter 9    JLCooper CS-32 MiniDesk 143

Control Modifier Assignment
MUTE Enables or disables Mute.
F1 Automation Enable setup (display
shows “AE”).
MUTE 1: Enables or disables
volume automation.
MUTE 2: Enables or disables pan
automation.
MUTE 3: Enables or disables mute
automation.
MUTE 4: Enables or disables
automation of solo.
MUTE 5: Enables or disables send
(level) automation.
MUTE 6: Enables or disables
automation of plug-in parameters.
F2 Switches automation mode
between Read and Off (display
shows “Td”).
F3 Switches automation mode
between Touch and Off (display
shows “Tc”).
F4 Switches automation mode
between Latch and Off (display
shows “Lt”).
F5 Switches automation mode
between Write and Off (display
shows “Wr”).
ARM Turns Record Enable button on
or off.
Faders Control volume. As the faders
don’t offer feedback, Pickup
mode is used, as per the pots.
See the pickup information in
CS-32 MiniDesk pots on page 142.

CS-32 MiniDesk bank button

The table outlines the bank controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
Small red button with green LED LED off: Black labels of channel strip buttons apply
(TRK/LOC/ARM).
LED on: White labels of channel strip buttons apply
(PAN/SOLO/MUTE).

Chapter 9    JLCooper CS-32 MiniDesk 144

CS-32 MiniDesk F keys
The table outlines the F key controls and their assignments:

Note:  If a modifier button, such as SHIFT, is shown below a description, it indicates that the
control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

SHIFT Modifier for function of other
controls. See SHIFT entries in left
column.
F1 While held down, MUTE buttons
1–6 enable/disable automation of
certain parameters (see MUTE).
SHIFT Enables or disables Cycle mode.
F2 While held down, MUTE buttons
set automation mode to Read.
SHIFT Enables or disables Autopunch
mode.
F3 While held down, MUTE buttons
set automation mode to Touch.
SHIFT Sets left locator by current
playhead position.
F4 While held down, MUTE buttons
set automation mode to Latch.
SHIFT Sets right locator by current
playhead position.
F5 While held down, MUTE buttons
set automation mode to Write.
SHIFT Sets punch in locator by current
playhead position.
F6
SHIFT Sets punch out locator by current
playhead position.
F7 Sets pots to Pan/Send mode
(display shows “PA”).
SHIFT Enables or disables metronome
click.
F8 Sets pots to Instrument Edit mode
(display shows “In”).
F9 Sets pots to Effect Edit mode
(display shows “P1”–“P9”).

Chapter 9    JLCooper CS-32 MiniDesk 145

CS-32 MiniDesk cursor controls
The table outlines the cursor controls and their assignments:

Note:  If a modifier button, such as SHIFT, is shown below a description, it indicates that the
control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

Up Zooms out vertically.
SHIFT In Effect Edit mode: moves up
one Insert slot (unless top slot is
selected).
Down Zooms in vertically.
SHIFT In Effect Edit mode: moves down
one Insert slot (unless bottom slot).
Left Zooms out horizontally.
SHIFT In Instrument and Effect Edit
modes: decrements current
parameter bank (moves down one
bank, or page, of parameters).
Right Zooms in horizontally.
SHIFT In Instrument and Effect Edit
modes: increments current
parameter bank (moves up one
bank, or page, of parameters).

CS-32 MiniDesk transport controls

The table outlines the transport controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
RECORD Record
STOP Stop
REW Moves playhead backward by one bar.
PLAY Play
F FWD Moves playhead forward by one bar.

Chapter 9    JLCooper CS-32 MiniDesk 146

CS-32 MiniDesk Jog wheel controls
The table outlines the Jog Wheel controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
Jog Wheel SCRUB off: Moves playhead (in bar increments).
SCRUB on: Scrubbing of audio (and MIDI) is possible.
SHUTTLE on: Shuttle mode
SCRUB Switches Jog Wheel between Move Playhead (by
bars), and Scrubbing modes.
SHUTTLE Switches Jog Wheel between Move Playhead (by bars)
and Shuttle modes.

Chapter 9    JLCooper CS-32 MiniDesk 147

 JLCooper FaderMaster 4/100
10
Set up your FaderMaster 4/100
You can combine several FaderMaster 4/100 devices to form one large virtual control surface.
The meaning and functionality of the Track buttons, however, are individually switched for
each device.

Before using your FaderMaster 4/100 control surface with Logic Pro, you should make sure that
your FaderMaster 4/100 (MIDI or USB version) has firmware version 1.03 or later installed. If you
have older firmware (see the sticker on the back of the unit), contact JLCooper.

Connect your FaderMaster 4/100 devices to the computer via USB or MIDI. If connected via USB,
installation is automatic.

Note:  USB model only: Install the software that comes with the FaderMaster 4/100.

Install JLCooper FaderMaster 4/100 units connected via MIDI

1 Choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Setup.
2 Choose Install from the New menu.
3 Select FaderMaster 4/100 from the list in the Install window.
4 Click the Scan button.

FaderMaster 4/100 assignments

The table outlines the global controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
Select Switches Track buttons to track selection duties.
Aux Switches Track buttons to emulate Record Enable
buttons.
Solo Switches Track buttons to emulate Solo buttons.
Mute Switches Track Buttons to emulate Mute buttons.
Inc Increases fader bank display to show next four
channels.
Dec Decreases fader bank display to show previous four
channels.

The table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
Track button Performs currently selected function (Select, Record
Enable, Solo, Mute).
Fader Controls volume (touch-sensitive and motorized).

148
 JLCooper MCS3
11
Set up your MCS3
Logic Pro supports USB or MIDI versions of the JLCooper MCS3 control surface. Both USB
and MIDI versions are installed automatically when you open Logic Pro. If your MCS3 is not
recognized and installed correctly, follow the steps below.

Add JLCooper MCS3 control surfaces connected via USB

1 Ensure that your MCS3 USB device is correctly connected to the computer with a USB cable. Also
ensure that the unit is powered.
2 Open Logic Pro.
The MCS3 is added to the Control Surfaces Setup window.

Add JLCooper MCS3 control surfaces connected via MIDI

1 Make sure that your MCS3 units are connected to the computer via MIDI.
2 Choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Setup.
3 Choose Install from the Setup window’s New menu.
4 Select the MCS3 from the list in the Install window.
5 Click the Scan button.

MCS3 assignments
MCS3 assignments overview
Assignments of JLCooper MCS3 interface elements to Logic functions are covered in these
sections:
•• MCS3 F1 to F6 buttons on page 150
•• MCS3 W1 to W7 buttons on page 150
•• MCS3 cursor controls on page 150
•• MCS3 Jog wheel and Shuttle ring on page 151
•• MCS3 transport controls on page 151

149
MCS3 F1 to F6 buttons
The table outlines the F1 to F6 buttons and their assignments:

Control Assignment
F1 Switches to Layer 1.
F2 Switches to Layer 2.
F3 Switches to Layer 3.
F4 Unassigned. Can be assigned to different key
commands in Layers 1, 2, and 3.
F5 Unassigned. Can be assigned to different key
commands in Layers 1, 2, and 3.
F6 Unassigned. Can be assigned to different key
commands in Layers 1, 2, and 3.

MCS3 W1 to W7 buttons
The table outlines the W1 to W7 buttons and their assignments:

Control Assignment
W1 Unassigned. Can be assigned to different key
commands in Layers 1, 2, and 3.
W2 Unassigned. Can be assigned to different key
commands in Layers 1, 2, and 3.
W3 Unassigned. Can be assigned to different key
commands in Layers 1, 2, and 3.
W4 Unassigned. Can be assigned to different key
commands in Layers 1, 2, and 3.
W5 Unassigned. Can be assigned to different key
commands in Layers 1, 2, and 3.
W6 Unassigned. Can be assigned to different key
commands in Layers 1, 2, and 3.
W7 Unassigned. Can be assigned to different key
commands in Layers 1, 2, and 3.

MCS3 cursor controls

The table outlines the cursor controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
Up Arrow Mirrors the behavior of the computer keyboard Up
Arrow key.
Down Arrow Mirrors the behavior of the computer keyboard Down
Arrow key.
Left Arrow Mirrors the behavior of the computer keyboard Left
Arrow key.
Right Arrow Mirrors the behavior of the computer keyboard Right
Arrow key.

Chapter 11    JLCooper MCS3 150

MCS3 Jog wheel and Shuttle ring
The table outlines the Jog wheel and Shuttle ring controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
Jog wheel Scrubs audio and MIDI.
Shuttle ring Shuttles the playhead backward when turned to the
left. Shuttles the playhead forward when turned to
the right.

MCS3 transport controls

The table outlines the transport controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
REW Moves the playhead backward by one bar.
F FWD Moves the playhead forward by one bar.
STOP Stop
PLAY Play
RECORD Record. LED is lit when active.

Chapter 11    JLCooper MCS3 151

 Korg microKONTROL and
KONTROL49 12
Set up microKONTROL and KONTROL49
Follow the steps below to use your control surface with Logic Pro.

Set up your Korg control surface with Logic Pro

1 Ensure that your control surfaces are connected to the computer via USB.
2 Open Logic Pro.
The devices are scanned for and installed automatically. The microKONTROL/KONTROL49 is
automatically set to native mode; internal Scene settings are ignored.

Note:  If installation and identification fails, it may be possible that the microKONTROL/
KONTROL49 reaction time is too slow due to USB bus-power issues. In this situation, connect the
supplied power adapter, and set the power switch to the DC position.

When you quit Logic Pro (or delete the control surface icon in the Control Surfaces Setup
window), the microKONTROL/KONTROL49 is reset to normal (non-native) operation.

152
microKONTROL and KONTROL49 assignments
microKONTROL and KONTROL49 Pads
microKONTROL and KONTROL49 Pads overview
The Pads can operate in one of eight modes, and three overlays. While pressing SCENE, you can
select modes for the Pads and channel strips. Releasing SCENE without pressing a Pad does not
affect the currently selected Pad or channel views.

Pad Assignment
1 Switches Pads to Transport mode.
2 Switches Pads to Solo/Mute mode.
3 Switches Pads to Rec/Select mode mode.
4–8 Switches Pads to Use the User 4–8 modes.
These modes have unassigned Pads. You can assign
them to key commands with the Learn function.
9 Switches channel strips to Pan mode.
10 Switches channel strips to Send mode.
11 Switches channel strips to Automation mode.
12 Switches channel strips to Instrument edit mode.
13 Switches channel strips to Effect edit mode.
14–16 Switches channel strips to User 6–8 mode.
These modes have unassigned encoders. You can
assign them with the Logic Pro Learn function.

Transport mode
This mode is enabled by pressing SCENE and Pad 1.

Pad Assignment
1 Sets main encoder to Transport mode.
2 Sets main encoder to Scrub mode.
3 Sets main encoder to Shuttle mode.
7 Switches sync between internal and external.
8 Enables or disables metronome click (separately for
Playback and Record).
9 Enables or disables Cycle mode.
10 Enables or disables Autopunch mode.
11 Enables or disables Replace mode.
12 Enables or disables Solo.
13 Record
14 Pause
15 Play
16 Stop

Chapter 12    Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 153

 Solo/Mute mode
This mode is enabled by pressing SCENE and Pad 2.

Pad Assignment
1–8 Enables or disables Solo for the eight channels being
controlled with the eight channel strips.
9–16 Enables or disables Mute for the eight channels being
controlled with the eight channel strips.

Rec/Select mode
This mode is enabled by pressing SCENE and Pad 3.

Pad Assignment
1–8 Turns the Record Enable button of the eight channels
being controlled with the eight channel strips on or
off.
9–16 Selects one of the eight channels being controlled
with the eight channel strips.

Use the User 4–8 modes

These modes are enabled by pressing SCENE and Pad 4 to 8.

In these modes, the Pads are unassigned. Use the Learn function: Logic Pro > Control Surfaces >
Learn Assignment for [function name] to assign them to key commands, for example.

Note:  When in Learn mode, if a Pad is pressed and released immediately, the learned assignment
does not work as expected.

Assign a key command

1 Enable the Learn New Assignment button in the Key Commands window.
2 Choose a key command, then press and hold down the Pad, until the Learn New Assignment
button switches to the “up” state.

This slightly different approach is due to messages sent by the Korg devices: when the Pad is
immediately released, a value range is learned. Holding the Pad until Learn mode disengages
results in a fixed value being learned.

Send mode
This mode is enabled by pressing SCENE and Pad 10. In Send mode, the channel strip encoders
control the send level of the selected send. The Pads remain in the currently selected mode.
•• Send Overlay: Press SETTING while the encoders are in Send mode to change the operation of
the Pads in Send mode.

Pad Assignment
1–8 Switches the send bypass state (of the currently
selected send) for the eight channel strips.
9–16 Switches the send position (pre/post fader) of the
currently selected send, for the eight channel strips.

Chapter 12    Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 154

Effect edit mode
This mode is enabled by pressing SCENE and Pad 13. In Effect edit mode, the channel strip
encoders control the parameters of the currently selected effect. The Pads remain in the currently
selected mode.
•• Effect Edit Overlay: Press SETTING while the encoders are in Effect Edit mode to change the
operation of the Pads in Effect edit mode.

Pad Assignment
1–8 Switches the effect bypass state (of the currently
selected Insert slot) for the eight channel strips.

microKONTROL and KONTROL49 main controls

The main LCD shows information on the current mode of the encoders.

Display text Meaning

<Instrument name> Encoders edit instrument parameters.
<Plug-in name> Encoders edit effect parameters (the currently
selected Insert slot number is indicated on the
display).
Automatn Encoders set the automation mode.
Ins. x (SETTING held down) Main encoder chooses the
Insert slot number.
ModePad Displayed while SCENE button is held down.
Pan Encoders control pan.
Send x Encoders control send level of send x.
User 6 Channel Strip User Mode 6. Encoders are initially
unassigned.
User 7 Channel Strip User Mode 7. Encoders are initially
unassigned.
User 8 Channel Strip User Mode 8. Encoders are initially
unassigned.

The LCD backlight is red while recording, and green at other times.

Chapter 12    Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 155

The controls in the main section have the following meaning:

Control Assignment
Main encoder Controls the playhead in one of three modes. (See
Pads 1–3 in Transport mode on page 153.)
SETTING Held down in Send mode:
•• Main encoder chooses the current send.
•• Pads have special meaning—see Send mode on
page 154.
•• LCDs display send destinations.
•• Encoders choose send destinations.
Held down in Effect Edit mode:
•• Main encoder chooses the current Insert slot.
•• Pads have special meaning—see Effect edit
mode on page 155.
•• LCDs display effect names for all eight channels.
MESSAGE Enables or disables Duplicate Flip mode. When
enabled, both the faders and encoders control the
parameter displayed in the LCDs.
SCENE While held down, Pads switch between Pad functions
and channel views. See microKONTROL and
KONTROL49 Pads overview on page 153.
EXIT —
HEX LOCK Shifts fader bank to the previous eight channels. (LED
is on if previous channels exist.) Shifts fader bank
to the previous eight parameters in Effect Edit or
Instrument Edit view.
ENTER Shifts fader bank to the next eight channels. (LED is
on if subsequent channels exist.) Shifts fader bank to
the next eight parameters in Effect Edit or Instrument
Edit view.
< Octave Shift Down
> Octave Shift Up

Chapter 12    Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 156

microKONTROL and KONTROL49 channel strips
There are several modes for the encoders, enabled with SCENE and Pad 9–16.

Control Assignment
LCD Shows the parameter controlled by the encoder. The
current name/value is displayed for a few seconds
when you move an encoder or a fader. When the
encoders are in a Mixer view (Pan, Send, Send
Setup), the background color indicates the channel
automation mode:
•• Green: Off or Read
•• Yellow: Touch or Latch
•• Red: Write
Encoder Controls the parameter shown directly above the
encoder in the LCD.
Fader Controls volume. Because the faders don’t offer
feedback, Pickup mode is used (if enabled in the
Control Surfaces preferences). This means that the
fader must reach (“pick up”) the current parameter
value before the value starts to change.

microKONTROL and KONTROL49 external input

The table outlines the external input controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
Foot Switch Starts and stops playback.
Pedal Controls the master fader.

Chapter 12    Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 157

 Mackie Baby HUI
13
Set up your Baby HUI
Baby HUI control surface units do not support automatic scanning. You need to manually add
these devices to your setup. When you add a device in this way, you need to specify the MIDI In
and Out port parameters.

Set up Mackie Baby HUI units

1 Make sure that your Baby HUI units are connected bidirectionally with the computer, using a
MIDI interface.
2 Choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Setup.
3 Choose New > Install in the Setup window.
4 Select the Baby HUI in the Install window.
5 Click the Add button.
6 Select the added device in the Setup window, then assign the MIDI Input and MIDI Out
parameters as appropriate.

Baby HUI assignments

Baby HUI assignments overview
Assignments of Mackie Baby HUI interface elements to Logic functions are covered in the
following sections:
•• Baby HUI channel strips on page 159
•• Baby HUI encoder assignment controls on page 159
•• Baby HUI automation controls on page 160
•• Baby HUI display controls on page 160
•• Baby HUI utility controls on page 160
•• Baby HUI navigation controls on page 161
•• Baby HUI transport controls on page 161

158
Baby HUI channel strips
The table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments.

Note:  If SHIFT is shown below a button description, it indicates that the control has an alternate
use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

Rotary encoder Adjusts the parameter selected in
the Encoder Assignment section.
Rotary encoder push button Selects a channel strip.
SHIFT Turns Record Enable button of
selected channel on/off.
Signal indicator Illuminates when a signal is
present in the channel. It also
indicates channel selection.
SOLO Enables or disables Solo.
MUTE Enables or disables Mute.
Fader Adjusts volume.

Baby HUI encoder assignment controls

The table outlines the encoder assignment controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
PAN Assigns pan to rotary encoders.
SEND 1 Assigns Send 1 level to rotary encoders.
SEND 2 Assigns Send 2 level to rotary encoders.
SEND 3 Assigns Send 3 level to rotary encoders.
SEND 4 Assigns Send 4 level to rotary encoders.

Chapter 13    Mackie Baby HUI 159

Baby HUI automation controls
The table outlines the automation controls and their assignments.

Note:  If SHIFT is shown below a button description, it indicates that the control has an alternate
use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

BYPASS/OFF Sets selected channel to Off
automation mode.
SHIFT Enables or disables playback
and recording of level (volume)
automation.
READ Sets selected channel to Read
automation mode.
SHIFT Enables or disables playback and
recording of mute automation.
WRITE Sets selected channel to Write
automation mode.
SHIFT Enables or disables playback and
recording of pan automation.
TOUCH Sets selected channel to Touch
automation mode.
SHIFT Enables or disables playback
and recording of send level
automation.

Baby HUI display controls

The table outlines the display controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
TRANSPORT Opens or closes the Control bar window.
MEM–LOC Opens or closes the Marker List.
MIXER Opens or closes the Mixer.
EDIT Opens or closes the Tracks window.

Baby HUI utility controls

The table outlines the utility controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
UNDO Undoes the last editing step.
SHIFT Shifts to alternate use of some buttons.

Chapter 13    Mackie Baby HUI 160

Baby HUI navigation controls
The table outlines the navigation controls and their assignments.

Note:  If SHIFT is shown below a button description, it indicates that the control has an alternate
use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

RTZ Navigates to the left locator.
SHIFT Sets the punch in locator (at
current playhead position).
END Navigates to the right locator.
SHIFT Sets the punch out locator (at
current playhead position).
BANK SELECT Left Shifts channel strips by one bank
to the left.
SHIFT Shifts channel strips by one
channel to the left.
BANK SELECT Right Shifts channel strips by one bank
to the right.
SHIFT Shifts channel strips by one
channel to the right.

Baby HUI transport controls

The table outlines the transport controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
REWIND Shuttles backward.
FAST FWD Shuttles forward.
STOP Stop
PLAY Play
RECORD Record

Chapter 13    Mackie Baby HUI 161

 Mackie HUI
14
Set up your HUI
HUI control surface devices don’t support automatic scanning. You need to manually add these
devices to your setup. When you add a device in this way, you need to assign the MIDI In and Out
port parameters.

Important:  There are a number of control surfaces—not mentioned in this guide—that can

emulate the HUI. Such devices are not supported by Apple, nor are they guaranteed to work with
Logic Pro in HUI emulation mode.

If the unit emulates a single HUI device, proceed as if using a HUI.

If you experience problems in the DSP Edit display, install the unit as a DM2000. See Set up your
DM2000 on page 266.

If the unit emulates more than one HUI, add the required number of additional devices in the
Setup window. If the unit is limited to support of only one HUI DSP Edit section, choose “HUI
Channel Strips only” as the model name for these additional units. This ensures that scrolling in
the DSP Edit section is limited to four parameters.

If you want to know more about button assignments, refer to HUI assignments overview on
page 163 and the user manual for the device.

Set up Mackie HUI devices

1 Make sure that your HUI devices are connected bidirectionally with the computer, using a
MIDI interface.
2 Choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Setup.
3 Choose New > Install in the Setup window.
4 Select HUI in the Install window.
5 Click the Add button.
6 Select the added device in the Setup window, then set the MIDI In and MIDI Out parameters
as appropriate.

162
HUI assignments
HUI assignments overview
The following sections outline the assignment of Mackie HUI interface elements to
Logic functions.
•• HUI assign controls on page 164
•• HUI fader bank buttons on page 165
•• HUI window controls on page 166
•• HUI keyboard shortcuts on page 166
•• HUI channel strips on page 167
•• HUI DSP controls on page 169
•• HUI function keys on page 171
•• HUI global controls on page 172
•• HUI automation controls on page 173
•• HUI status/group controls on page 174
•• HUI editing controls on page 174
•• HUI time display on page 175
•• HUI numeric keypad controls on page 175
•• HUI transport controls on page 177
•• HUI cursor buttons on page 178
•• HUI Jog Wheel on page 179
•• HUI foot switches on page 179

Chapter 14    Mackie HUI 163

HUI assign controls
The table outlines the controls in the ASSIGN section and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT, below a button description indicates that the button has
an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

SEND A Assigns Send 1 level to V-Pots, and
Send 1 to 4 levels to DSP V-Pots.
While SEND A is held down, the
scribble strips show the current
Send 1 destination (a bus number).
SHIFT/ADD As above, for Send 6
SEND B As above, for Send 2
SHIFT/ADD As above, for Send 7
SEND C As above, for Send 3
SHIFT/ADD As above, for Send 8
SEND D As above, for Send 4
SEND E As above, for Send 5
PAN Assigns Pan to V-Pots, and the
selected (surround) channel strip’s
pan/surround parameters to
DSP V-Pots. You must confirm any
changes made with the DSP V-Pots
by pressing the corresponding
V-Select button.
INPUT Assigns channel strip input to
V-Pots. While held down, the
scribble strips show the current
channel strip input assignment.
The four DSP V-Pots control the
following parameters of the
selected channel strip: format,
input, output, and automation
mode. You must confirm any
changes made with the V-Pots
or DSP V-Pots by pressing the
corresponding V-Select button.
OUTPUT Assigns channel strip output to
V-Pots. While held down, the
scribble strips show the current
channel strip output assignment.
The four DSP V-Pots control the
following parameters of the
selected channel strip: format,
input, output, and automation
mode. You must confirm any
changes made with the V-Pots
or DSP V-Pots by pressing the
corresponding V-Select button.
REC/RDY ALL Disables Record Enable button of
all channel strips.

Chapter 14    Mackie HUI 164

Control Modifier Assignment
BYPASS Switches the INSERT buttons
between Insert Select and Insert
Bypass modes. See the Insert
entry in the table on HUI channel
strips on page 167.
MUTE Switches the V-Select buttons
between Send Position and Send
Mute modes.
SHIFT Enables or disables Flip mode.
SELECT-ASSIGN Displays the V-Pot assignment as
follows: Pan, Snd1 to Snd8, S1As to
S8As, In, Out.
SUSPEND —
DEFAULT Hold down this button to switch
the V-Select buttons between
standard operation and setting
default values.
ASSIGN When V-Pots display a send level,
the ASSIGN button switches them
to Send Destination Assignment
mode (choosing a bus, in other
words). Press the V-Select
to confirm the assignment.
The DSP V-Pots display the
assignments of Send slots 1–4
or Send slots 5–8. Confirm any
changes by pressing the V-Select
button or all changes will be lost
when you leave Send Destination
Assignment mode, or press the
Assign button a second time.

HUI fader bank buttons

The table outlines the fader bank controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
Bank Left Shifts channel strips by one bank (a group of channel
strips or parameters) to the left.
Bank Right Shifts channel strips by one bank to the right.
Channel Left Shifts channel strips by one channel (or parameter) to
the left.
Channel Right Shifts channel strips by one channel to the right.

Chapter 14    Mackie HUI 165

HUI window controls
The table outlines the window controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
TRANSPORT Opens or closes the control bar window.
EDIT Opens or closes the Tracks window.
MIX Opens or closes the Mixer.
ALT Opens or closes the Sample Editor.
STATUS Opens or closes the Audio Bin.
MEM-LOC Opens or closes the Marker List.

HUI keyboard shortcuts

The table outlines the keyboard shortcut controls and their assignments:

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT, below a button description indicates that the button has
an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

UNDO Undoes last editing operation.
SHIFT/ADD Redoes last editing operation.
OPTION/ALL Opens Undo History window.
SAVE Saves the project.
OPTION/ALL Performs Save As function,
allowing you to save the project
with a different name.
EDIT MODE —
EDIT TOOL Selects the next tool. While held
down, numerical buttons select a
specific tool.
SHIFT/ADD Shifts to alternate mode/use for
some buttons. See descriptions of
other buttons.
OPTION/ALL While held down, value change
mode is set to relative. This
switches between a minimum,
default, or maximum value for
the edited parameter. Also see
description of other buttons.
CTRL/CLUTCH While held down, the Group
Clutch is engaged. (All groups are
disabled.)
CMD/ALT/FINE While held down, Value Change
mode is set to Fine. All value
changes work at maximum
resolution. Also see descriptions of
other buttons.

Chapter 14    Mackie HUI 166

HUI channel strips
The table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT, below a button description indicates that the button has
an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

Level meters Displays momentary and peak
levels.
REC/RDY Activates or deactivates the Record
Enable button.
OPTION/ALL Disables the Record Enable
buttons of all channel strips.
INSERT •• BYPASS button OFF (see Insert
Select mode in HUI assign
controls on page 164): selects
channel strip for plug-in
selection.
•• BYPASS button ON: Enables or
disables bypass of currently
selected Insert slot.
V-SEL •• PAN button ON: sets Pan
parameter to center position if
DEFAULT button is on.
•• Send 1 to 8 selected: edits Send
Pre/Post, turns Send Mute on or
off, or sets Send Level to default
value.
•• In Send Destination Assignment
mode, Channel Strip Input
or Channel Strip Output
Assignment mode: the V-SEL
buttons confirm your selection.
V-Pot Adjusts parameter selected in the
ASSIGN section.
AUTO Cycles through automation modes.
If you hold down an automation
mode button, pressing AUTO sets
this mode.
SOLO Enables or disables the Solo
button.
OPTION/ALL Disables the Solo buttons of all
channel strips.
MUTE Enables or disables the Mute
button.
OPTION/ALL Disables the Mute buttons of all
channel strips.
Scribble strip Displays the channel strip name or
send, input, or output assignment.
SELECT Selects the channel strip.
SHIFT/ADD Sets volume to unity level.

Chapter 14    Mackie HUI 167

Control Modifier Assignment
DEFAULT Sets volume to unity level.
Fader Adjusts volume, or duplicates the
V-Pot assignment in Flip mode.

Chapter 14    Mackie HUI 168

HUI DSP controls
The table outlines the DSP controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT, below a button description indicates that the button has
an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

ASSIGN —
COMPARE Switches DSP display between
“track name/parameter name” and
“parameter name/parameter value”
modes.
BYPASS Switches the bypass state of the
plug-in being edited.
DSP Select 1 to 4 •• Assignment Pan mode:
DSP Select 1 resets pan or
surround angle.
DSP Select 2 resets surround
diversity.
DSP Select 3 resets surround
LFE (level).
DSP Select 4 resets the Spread
parameter.
•• Assignment Send mode:
Activates or deactivates Sends 1
to 4, or mutes 5 to 8.
•• Effect Assign mode:
Confirms Insert 1 to 4 or 5 to
8 effect selection, selects this
Insert slot, and enters Effect Edit
mode, showing the parameters
of the chosen effect.
•• Effect Edit mode:
Sets parameter to the default
value, or turns “switching”
parameters on/off.
DSP V-Pots •• Assignment Pan mode:
DSP V-Pot 1 controls pan or
surround angle.
DSP V-Pot 2 controls surround
diversity.
DSP V-Pot 3 controls surround
LFE (level).
DSP V-Pot 4 controls the Spread
parameter.
•• Assignment Send mode:
Controls Send 1 to 4, or 5 to 8
Levels.
•• Effect Assign mode:
Assigns effects to Insert slots 1
through 4, or 5 to 8.
•• Effect Edit mode:
Controls the selected effect
parameter.

Chapter 14    Mackie HUI 169

Control Modifier Assignment
INSERT/PARAM Switches between Effect Assign
and Effect Edit modes.
SCROLL Effect Edit mode: Shifts parameter
display by the number of DSP
V-Pots in the control surface group
(usually four).
CMD/ALT/FINE Effect Edit mode: Shifts parameter
display by one (parameter).

Chapter 14    Mackie HUI 170

HUI function keys
The table outlines the function keys and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT, below a button description indicates that the button has
an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

F1 Clears Overload LEDs.
SHIFT/ADD Switches to Mixer view, and
displays MIDI channel strips.
CMD/ALT/FINE Opens or closes Tracks window.
F2 Recalls screenset 2.
SHIFT/ADD Switches to Mixer view, and
displays input channel strips.
CMD/ALT/FINE Opens or closes Mixer.
F3 Recalls screenset 3.
SHIFT/ADD Switches to Mixer view, and
displays audio channel strips.
SHIFT/ADD Opens or closes Event List.
F4 Recalls screenset 4.
SHIFT/ADD Switches to Mixer view, and
displays software instrument
channel strips.
CMD/ALT/FINE Opens or closes Score Editor.
F5 Recalls screenset 5.
SHIFT/ADD Switches to Mixer view, and
displays aux channel strips.
CMD/ALT/FINE Opens or closes Step Editor.
F6 Recalls screenset 6.
SHIFT/ADD Switches to Mixer view, and
displays bus channel strips.
CMD/ALT/FINE Opens or closes Piano Roll Editor.
F7 Switches counter display format
between SMPTE and bars/beats/
divisions/ticks.
SHIFT/ADD Switches to Mixer view, and
displays the master and output
channel strips.
CMD/ALT/FINE Opens or closes Control bar
window.
F8/ESC Default: exits folder. Go to Marker
mode: cancels dialog.
CMD/ALT/FINE Opens or closes the Audio Bin.

Chapter 14    Mackie HUI 171

HUI global controls
The table outlines the global controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
FADER Activates or deactivates the recording of volume
automation.
PAN Activates or deactivates the recording of pan
automation.
PLUG IN Activates or deactivates the recording of plug-in
parameter automation.
MUTE Activates or deactivates the recording of mute
automation.
SEND Activates or deactivates the recording of send level
automation.
SEND MUTE —

Chapter 14    Mackie HUI 172

HUI automation controls
The table outlines the automation controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT, below a button description indicates that the button has
an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

READ Sets selected channel to Read
automation mode. While held
down, pressing the channel strip
AUTO button sets the automation
mode to Read.
OPTION/ALL Sets all channels to Read
automation mode.
LATCH Sets selected channel to Latch
automation mode. While held
down, press the channel strip
AUTO button to set automation
mode to Latch.
OPTION/ALL Sets all channels to Latch
automation mode.
TRIM —
TOUCH Sets selected channel to Touch
automation mode. While held
down, press the channel strip
AUTO button to set automation
mode to Touch.
OPTION/ALL Sets all channels to Touch
automation mode.
WRITE Sets selected channel to Write
automation mode. While held
down, press the channel strip
AUTO button to set automation
mode to Write.
OPTION/ALL Sets all channels to Write
automation mode.
OFF Sets selected channel to Off
automation mode. While held
down, press the channel strip
AUTO button to set automation
mode to Off.
OPTION/ALL Sets all channels to Off automation
mode.

Chapter 14    Mackie HUI 173

HUI status/group controls
The table outlines the status/group controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT, below a button description indicates that the button has
an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

AUTO While held down, the scribble
strips display the automation
mode of all channels.
MONITOR —
PHASE—SHIFT Switches to Single view.
GROUP Enters Group Edit mode:
•• The upper line (in the DSP Edit
section) displays the number
and name of the group being
edited.
•• DSP Select buttons 1 to 4 switch
between the properties of the
group being edited. The group
name is shown in the lower line.
•• When the INSERT/PARAM
button is off, the DSP Edit
V-Pots scroll through the group
properties. If the INSERT/PARAM
button is on, the DSP EDIT
V-Pots select the group that you
want to edit.
•• The SELECT buttons enable/
disable group membership of
the channel.
SHIFT/ADD Switches to Channel view.
CREATE Creates a new group and enters
Group Edit mode (see above).
SHIFT/ADD Switches to Mixer view.
SUSPEND Activates or deactivates the Group
Clutch.
SHIFT/ADD Switches to Tracks view.

HUI editing controls

The table outlines the editing controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
CAPTURE —
SEPARATE —
CUT Cuts the selection (of regions or events).
COPY Copies the selection.
PASTE Pastes the Clipboard contents.
DELETE Deletes the selection.

Chapter 14    Mackie HUI 174

HUI time display
The table outlines the time display controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
TIME CODE Lit if counter is displaying SMPTE timecode.
FEET Not assigned
BEATS Lit if counter is displaying bars/beats/divisions/ticks.
Time display Switches between a SMPTE timecode or bars/beats/
divisions/ticks display.
RUDE SOLO LIGHT Flashes if any channel is soloed.

HUI numeric keypad controls

The table outlines the numeric keypad controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT, below a button description indicates that the button has
an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

CLR Deletes current marker.
= Creates a marker at the current
playhead position.
/ Equivalent to (but independent of )
computer keyboard / key.
* Equivalent to (but independent of )
computer keyboard * key.
– Equivalent to (but independent of )
computer keyboard – key.
+ Equivalent to (but independent of )
computer keyboard + key.
0 to 9 •• Normal: 1 to 9 recalls markers
1 to 9.
•• If in Go to Marker dialog:
equivalent to (but independent
of ) computer keyboard keys
0 to 9.
SHIFT/ADD Switches to Mixer view, and
displays:
•• 1: MIDI channel strips
•• 2: Input channel strips
•• 3: Audio channel strips
•• 4: Software instrument channel
strips
•• 5: Aux channel strips
•• 6: Bus channel strips
•• 7: Master and output channel
strips

Chapter 14    Mackie HUI 175

Control Modifier Assignment
EDIT TOOL Selects tool (if applicable to
window with key focus):
•• 1: Pointer
•• 2: Pencil
•• 3: Eraser
•• 4: Text tool
•• 5: Scissors
•• 6: Glue
•• 7: Solo tool
•• 8: Mute tool
•• 9: Zoom tool
0 If in Go to Marker dialog:
equivalent to computer keyboard
0 key.
. •• If not in Go to Marker dialog:
enters Go to Marker dialog.
•• In in Go to Marker dialog:
equivalent to computer
keyboard Period key.
ENTER •• If not in Go to Marker dialog:
enters folder of selected track.
•• If in Go to Marker dialog:
confirms marker number that
you entered.

Chapter 14    Mackie HUI 176

HUI transport controls
The table outlines the transport controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT, below a button description indicates that the button has
an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

AUDITION —
PRE Sets left locator (at current
playhead position).
IN Sets punch in locator (at current
playhead position).
OUT Sets punch out locator (at current
playhead position).
POST Sets right locator (at current
playhead position).
RTZ Moves playhead to the left locator
position.
END Moves playhead to the right
locator position.
ON LINE Switches between internal and
external sync.
LOOP Enables or disables Cycle mode.
QUICK PUNCH Enables or disables Autopunch
mode.
REWIND Shuttles backward.
FAST FWD Shuttles forward.
STOP Stops playback.
PLAY Starts playback.
SHIFT/ADD Pauses playback (or recording).
RECORD Record

Chapter 14    Mackie HUI 177

HUI cursor buttons
The table outlines the cursor controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT, below a button description indicates that the button has
an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

Cursor Up •• Cursor mode: equivalent to
computer keyboard Up Arrow
key.
•• Zoom mode: zooms in vertically
(in the window with key focus).
SHIFT/ADD Zoom mode: individual track zoom
(zooms in).
CMD/ALT/FINE Page up.
OPTION/ALL + CMD/ALT/FINE Scroll to top.
Cursor Down •• Cursor mode: equivalent to
computer keyboard Down
Arrow key.
•• Zoom mode: zooms out
vertically (in the window with
key focus).
SHIFT/ADD Zoom mode: individual track zoom
(zooms out).
CMD/ALT/FINE Page down.
OPTION/ALL + CMD/ALT/FINE Scroll to bottom (of window/list
with key focus).
Cursor Left •• Cursor mode: equivalent to
computer keyboard Left Arrow key.
•• Zoom mode: zooms out
horizontally (in the window with
key focus).
SHIFT/ADD Zoom mode: individual track zoom
reset (of tracks of the same type).
CMD/ALT/FINE Page left.
OPTION/ALL + CMD/ALT/FINE Scroll to left border (of the window
with key focus).
Cursor Right •• Cursor mode: equivalent to
computer keyboard Right Arrow
key.
•• Zoom mode: zooms in
horizontally (in the window with
key focus).
SHIFT/ADD Zoom mode: individual track zoom
reset (of all tracks, regardless of type).
CMD/ALT/FINE Page right.
OPTION/ALL + CMD/ALT/FINE Scroll to right border (of the
window with key focus).
MODE Switches between Cursor and
Zoom modes.

Chapter 14    Mackie HUI 178

HUI Jog Wheel
The table outlines the Jog Wheel controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
Jog Wheel •• Default: Move playhead by one bar.
•• Scrub button lit: Scrub mode
•• Shuttle button lit: Shuttle mode
SCRUB Activates or deactivates Scrub mode.
SHUTTLE Activates or deactivates Shuttle mode.

HUI foot switches

The table outlines the foot switch controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
Foot Switch 1 Play or Stop
Foot Switch 2 Record On/Off

Chapter 14    Mackie HUI 179

Mackie C4
15
Set up of your C4
A connected and powered Mackie C4 unit will be detected automatically when you open Logic
Pro. You can use the C4 in an independent control surface group (with other control surface
icons placed above or below the C4 icon), or combined in a group with one or more control
surfaces (such as the Mackie Control—place the icon to the right or left of the existing icons).

Although the C4 can be used independently, it is most useful when combined with other
control surfaces, particularly the Mackie Control. In this scenario, the C4 adds eight channels in
Mixer view. Using the C4 in its own control surface group allows you to edit instruments and
effects independently, while performing mixing and other tasks on the Mackie Control or other
control surface.

C4 V-Pots and V-Select buttons

The C4 provides 32 V-Pots, laid out in four horizontal rows.
•• The top row (row 1) consists of V-Pots 1 to 8.
•• Row 2 consists of V-Pots 9 to 16.
•• Row 3 consists of V-Pots 17 to 24.
•• The bottom row (row 4) consists of V-Pots 25 to 32.

Each V-Pot features an integrated V-Select button, which is activated by pressing the (V-Pot)
knob top.

The function or parameter assigned to each V-Pot/V-Select button depends on the current View
(see Use C4 views on page 181), and chosen overlay (see C4 Assignment buttons overview on
page 187).
•• V-Pots and V-Selects 1 to 8
When no overlay is active, V-Pots 1 to 8 (the top row) normally perform in the same way as
their counterparts on a Mackie Control or Mackie Control XT. See Mackie Control Assignment
buttons overview on page 60.
•• V-Pots and V-Selects 9 to 32
These V-Pots have additional functionality in different Views.
In Mixer (multichannel) views, the V-Pots in rows 2, 3, and 4 usually edit the parameter that
follows the parameter edited on row 1. For example, in Pan/Surround Mixer view, row 1 edits
the pan/surround angle, row 2 edits surround diversity, row 3 edits LFE level, and row 4 edits
spread.
In Channel view, all four rows represent a group of 32 editable parameters.
In Effect and Instrument Edit views, the C4 can be split into two groups (8/24, 16/16, or 24/8
parameters). See C4 function buttons on page 186.

180
 Use C4 views
The C4 provides a number of views that display a particular parameter type on the V-Pots/
V-Select buttons.

Use Pan/Surround Mixer view

1 Hold down the CHAN STRIP button.
The channel strip overlay labels appear on the C4 displays.
2 Press V-Select 18 (labeled Surrnd Mixer).

In Pan/Surround Mixer view:

•• Row 1 edits pan/surround parameter 1.
•• Row 2 edits pan/surround parameter 2.
•• Row 3 edits pan/surround parameter 3.
•• Row 4 edits pan/surround parameter 4 (in this order: pan/angle, diversity, LFE, spread, X, Y).

SINGLE Left/Right changes the parameter edited in row 1, thus affecting the parameters shown
(and edited) in rows 2 to 4.

Use Pan/Surround Channel view

1 Hold down the CHAN STRIP button.
The channel strip overlay labels appear on the C4 displays.
2 Press V-Select 26 (labeled Surrnd).

In Pan/Surround Channel view, row 1 edits all eight surround parameters of a surround channel.
If a stereo or mono channel is selected, V-Pot 1 edits the Pan (or Balance) parameter.

Use Channel Strip Mixer view

1 Hold down the CHAN STRIP button.
The channel strip overlay labels appear on the C4 displays.
2 Press V-Select 17.
3 Press the BANK Left/BANK Right or SINGLE Left/SINGLE Right buttons to change the parameter
shown, and edited, in row 4.
The parameters shown in rows 1 to 3 are adjusted accordingly.

In Channel Strip Mixer view, the row order is reversed, so that the lowest row edits parameter 1.

V-Pot row 4 (bottom row) edits the currently chosen channel parameter. Row 3 edits channel
parameter 2, row 2 edits channel parameter 3, and row 1 (at the top) edits channel parameter 4.

The V-Pots edit the following channel parameters in this order: volume, pan/angle,
input format, input assignment, output assignment, automation mode, group, displayed
automation parameter.

Chapter 15    Mackie C4 181

 Use EQ Mixer view
1 Hold down the CHAN STRIP button.
The channel strip overlay labels appear on the C4 displays.
2 Press V-Select 19 (labeled EQ Mixer).

In EQ Mixer view:
•• Row 1 sets the selected EQ band bypass state.
•• Row 2 edits the selected EQ band frequency.
•• Row 3 edits the selected EQ band gain/slope.
•• Row 4 edits the selected EQ band Q factor.
•• The SLOT UP and SLOT DOWN buttons select the EQ band (if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is
inserted in the selected channel strip).

Use EQ Channel view

1 Hold down the CHAN STRIP button.
The channel strip overlay labels appear on the C4 displays.
2 Press V-Select 27 (labeled EQs).

In EQ Channel view:
•• Row 1 edits the frequency of all eight bands.
•• Row 2 edits the gain/slope of all eight bands.
•• Row 3 edits the Q factor of all eight bands.
•• Row 4 sets the bypass state of all eight bands.

If no Channel or Linear Phase EQ is present on the selected channel, a Channel EQ is

automatically inserted when you enter EQ Channel view. The TRACK Left and TRACK Right
buttons switch to the previous or next channel. If you switch to a channel with no Channel or
Linear Phase EQ inserted, the C4 displays show “–”, and the corresponding V-Pots do nothing.

Use Send Mixer view

1 Hold down the CHAN STRIP button.
The channel strip overlay labels appear on the C4 displays.
2 Press V-Select 20 (labeled Sends Mixer).

In Send Mixer view:

•• Row 1 edits the send destination of the selected Send slot (on the selected channel).
•• Row 2 edits the send level.
•• Row 3 edits the send position (pre/post fader).
•• Row 4 mutes/unmutes the send.
•• The SLOT UP/SLOT DOWN buttons select the Send slot.
•• The TRACK L and TRACK R buttons shift the fader bank (to the left or right) by the number of
channel strips in the control surface group.

Use Send Channel view

1 Hold down the CHAN STRIP button.
The channel strip overlay labels are shown on the C4 displays.
2 Press V-Select 28 (labeled Sends).

Chapter 15    Mackie C4 182

 In Send Channel view:
•• Row 1 edits the (first) eight send destinations of the selected channel strip.
•• Row 2 edits the send level of sends 1 to 8.
•• Row 3 edits send positions 1 to 8 (pre/post fader).
•• Row 4 mutes/unmutes sends 1 to 8.
•• TRACK L and TRACK R switch to the previous or next channel.

Use Effect Assign Mixer view

1 Hold down the CHAN STRIP button.
The channel strip overlay labels are shown on the C4 displays.
2 Press V-Select 21 (labeled PlugIn Mixer).

In Effect Assign Mixer view, the C4 displays the first four Insert slots of the eight
selected channels.
•• Turn a V-Pot to switch between effects. (This action lets you browse through the effects listed
in the Effect menu, shown in Logic Pro mixer channels.)
•• Press the respective V-Select to insert the chosen effect. This activates Effect Edit view, where
you can directly edit effect parameters.
•• The SLOT UP/SLOT DOWN buttons switch between Insert slots.
•• TRACK L and TRACK R shift the fader bank by the number of channel strips in the control
surface group.
•• Holding down SHIFT and pressing a V-Select switches the bypass state of the respective Insert
slot. Bypassed effects are denoted by an asterisk (*) that precedes the effect name.

Use Effect Edit view

1 Hold down the CHAN STRIP button.
The channel strip overlay labels are shown on the C4 displays.
2 Press V-Select 21 (labeled PlugIn Mixer).
3 Insert or select an effect. The C4 automatically switches to Effect Edit view.

In Effect Edit view:

•• V-Pots 1 to 32 constitute a group of 32 parameters. Splitting is possible (see C4 function
buttons on page 186).
•• The SLOT UP/SLOT DOWN buttons select the Insert slot.
•• BANK Left/BANK Right shifts the edited parameters by one page.
•• In Split mode, the SLOT and BANK button behaviors apply to Split Upper.
•• When holding down SHIFT, the SLOT and BANK button behaviors apply to Split Lower.
•• SINGLE Left/SINGLE Right shifts the edited parameters by 1.
•• In Split mode, the SINGLE button behaviors apply to Split Upper.
•• When holding down SHIFT, the SINGLE button behaviors apply to Split Lower.

Chapter 15    Mackie C4 183

 Use Instrument Assign Mixer view
1 Hold down the CHAN STRIP button.
The channel strip overlay labels are shown on the C4 displays.
2 Press V-Select 22 (labeled Instru Mixer).

In Instrument Assign Mixer view, the C4 displays the Instrument slots of the selected
instrument channels.
•• Turn a V-Pot to select an instrument. (This action lets you browse through the software
instruments listed in the Instrument Plug-in menu, shown in Logic Pro instrument channels.)
•• Press the respective V-Select to insert the chosen instrument. This enters Instrument Edit view,
where you can edit instrument parameters.
•• The TRACK L and TRACK R buttons shift the fader bank by the number of channel strips in the
control surface group.
•• Holding down SHIFT and pressing a V-Select switches the bypass state of the respective
Instrument slot. An asterisk (*) precedes the name of bypassed instruments.

Use Instrument Edit view

1 Hold down the CHAN STRIP button.
The channel strip overlay labels are shown on the C4 displays.
2 Press V-Select 22 (labeled Instru Mixer).
3 Insert or select an instrument, which automatically switches the C4 to Instrument Edit view.

In Instrument Edit View:

•• V-Pots 1 to 32 constitute a group of 32 parameters. Splitting is possible (see C4 function
buttons on page 186).
•• BANK Left/BANK Right shifts the edited parameters by one page.
•• In Split mode, the BANK button behaviors apply to Split Upper.
•• When holding down SHIFT, the BANK button behaviors apply to Split Lower.
•• SINGLE Left/SINGLE Right shifts the edited parameters by 1.
•• In Split mode, the SINGLE button behaviors apply to Split Upper.
•• When holding down SHIFT, the SINGLE button behaviors apply to Split Lower.

Chapter 15    Mackie C4 184

 Use Cycle View
mm Hold down the CHAN STRIP button, and press V-Select 31.
In Cycle view:
•• V-Pot/V-Select 1 (labeled Cycle) shows and edits the current Cycle mode state (off or on).
•• V-Select 2 (labeled BySet) matches the cycle area to selections made in the Tracks window
(selected audio or MIDI regions).
•• V-Pot 3 (labeled Move) moves the current cycle area by a bar with each click of the V-Pot,
when turned.
•• V-Pot 4 moves the current cycle area by a beat with each click of the V-Pot, when turned.
•• The display shows the left and right locators above V-Pots 5 and 7.
•• Pressing V-Select 5 picks up (uses) the current playhead position for the left locator.
•• Turning V-Pot 5 changes the left locator position by bars.
•• Turning V-Pot 6 changes the left locator position by beats (denominator steps).
•• Pressing V-Select 7 picks up (uses) the current playhead position for the right locator.
•• Turning V-Pot 7 changes the right locator position by bars.
•• Turning V-Pot 8 changes the right locator position by beats (denominator steps).

Use Punch View

mm Hold down the CHAN STRIP button, and press V-Select 32.
In Punch view:
•• V-Pot/V-Select 1 shows and edits the current Autopunch state (off or on).
•• V-Pot 3 (labeled Move) moves the current punch in locator by a bar with each click of the
V-Pot, when turned.
•• V-Pot 4 moves the current punch in locator by a beat with each click of the V-Pot,
when turned.
•• The display shows the punch in and punch out locators above V-Pots 5 and 7.
•• Pressing V-Select 5 picks up (uses) the current playhead position for the punch in locator.
•• Turning V-Pot 5 changes the punch in locator position by bars.
•• Turning V-Pot 6 changes the punch in locator position by beats (denominator steps).
•• Pressing V-Select 7 picks up (uses) the current playhead position for the punch out locator.
•• Turning V-Pot 7 changes the punch out locator position by bars.
•• Turning V-Pot 8 changes the punch out locator position by beats (denominator steps).
Note:  Changing a punch locator position with the C4 automatically activates Autopunch mode.

Chapter 15    Mackie C4 185

C4 function buttons
This section outlines the FUNCTION buttons at the lower left of the C4 control surface.
•• SPLIT button: Splits the C4 rows as follows: 4/0, 1/3, 2/2, and 3/1. This is known as a Split Edit,
and allows you to simultaneously edit two separate sections of a plug-in, or even two different
plug-ins.
Split Edit is also possible across multiple C4 units. For example, with two C4 devices, pressing
the SPLIT button offers the following split modes:
•• 1/7 (Split Upper is the top row of thefirst C4 unit; Split Lower is the bottom three rows of the
first unit and all rows of the second C4 unit. LED 1/3 is lit.)
•• 2/6 (Split Upper is the top two rows of the first C4 unit; Split Lower is the bottom two rows
of the first unit and all rows of second C4 unit. LED 2/1 is on.)
•• 3/5 (LED 3/1 is on.)
•• 4/4 (All three LEDs are on.)
•• 5/3 (All three LEDs are on.)
•• 6/2 (All three LEDs are on.)
•• 7/1 (All three LEDs are on.)
•• LOCK button: Turns Track Lock on or off. When LOCK is enabled, selection of a different track in
the Tracks window does not switch the current track/channel selection on the C4.
•• SPOT ERASE button: Unassigned.

Chapter 15    Mackie C4 186

C4 Assignment buttons
C4 Assignment buttons overview
The Assignment buttons switch between “overlay” and normal Views. The parameters assigned to
the V-Pots/V-Select buttons change accordingly when an overlay mode is activated.
•• MARKER button: Switches between Marker overlay (see C4 Marker overlay on page 188) and
normal Views (see Use C4 views on page 181).
•• TRACK button: Switches between Track overlay (see C4 Track overlay on page 188) and normal
Views (see Use C4 views on page 181).
You can access alternate Mixer View options by holding down the TRACK button. This displays
a further submenu in the lower LCD, allowing you to view particular channel types:
•• V-Select 25 switches to MIDI Channel view.
•• V-Select 26 switches to Input Channel view.
•• V-Select 27 switches to Audio Channel view.
•• V-Select 28 switches to Software Instrument Channel view.
•• V-Select 29 switches to Auxiliary Channel view.
•• V-Select 30 switches to Bus Channel view.
•• V-Select 31 switches to Output Channel view.
•• V-Select 32 switches to Master Channel view.
Releasing the TRACK button without pressing a V-Select returns you to Mixer view.
•• CHAN STRIP button: Switches between Channel Strip overlay (see C4 Channel Strip overlay on
page 188) and normal Views (see Use C4 views on page 181).
You can access alternate User View options by holding down the CHAN STRIP button, which
displays a further submenu in the lower LCD.
•• V-Select 9 to 16 switches to one of eight user modes, where you can freely assign
parameters to V-Pots or V-Select buttons.
•• V-Select 17 switches to Channel Strip Mixer view.
•• V-Select 18 switches to Pan/Surround Mixer view.
•• V-Select 19 switches to EQ Mixer view.
•• V-Select 20 switches to Send Mixer view.
•• V-Select 21 switches to Effect Assign Mixer view.
•• V-Select 22 switches to Instrument Select Mixer view.
•• V-Select 26 switches to Pan/Surround Channel view.
•• V-Select 27 switches to EQ Channel view.
•• V-Select 28 switches to Send Channel view.
•• V-Select 31 activates the Cycle view.
•• V-Select 32 activates the Drop view.
•• FUNCTION button: Switches between “Function overlay” and normal Views (see Use C4
views on page 181). See C4 Function overlay on page 189 for details on this mode.

Chapter 15    Mackie C4 187

 C4 Marker overlay
The Marker overlay is active when the MARKER button light is on.
•• V-Selects 1 to 30 are assigned to markers 1 to 30. The upper LCD line shows the marker name;
the lower line displays INSIDE when the playhead falls within marker boundaries.
•• V-Select 31 creates a new marker.
•• V-Select 32 deletes the current marker.

C4 Track overlay
The Track overlay is active when the TRACK button light is on.

Select a track/channel for Split Upper

mm Press V-Select 1 to 32. When a track/channel is selected for Split Upper, the bottom LCD displays
the word UPPER.
mm BANK Left/BANK Right shifts the fader bank by the number of channels in the control
surface group.
mm SINGLE Left/SINGLE Right shifts the fader bank by one channel.

Select a track/channel for Split Lower

mm Press V-Select 1 to 32. If a track/channel is selected for Split Lower, the word LOWER is shown in
the bottom LCD.
mm BANK Left/BANK Right shifts the fader bank by the number of channels in the control
surface group.
mm SINGLE Left/SINGLE Right shifts the fader bank by one channel.

C4 Channel Strip overlay

The Channel Strip overlay is active when the CHAN STRIP button light is on.
•• V-Pot/V-Select row 1 (V-Pots 1 to 8) edits the frequency and gain of EQ bands 3 to 6 (the
parametric bands), provided an EQ effect is inserted in the current channel strip.
•• V-Pot/V-Select row 2 (V-Pots 9 to 16) switches to Effect Edit mode for Inserts 1 to 8, provided
an effect is inserted in the respective Insert slot. If no effect is inserted, turn the respective
V-Pot to select an effect, then press the V-Select, to insert it.
•• V-Pot/V-Select row 3 (V-Pots 17 to 24) edits Send 1 to 8 Level, provided the current channel
has active sends.
•• V-Pot/V-Select 25 switches to Instrument Edit mode, provided the selected channel is routed
to an instrument channel, and an instrument plug-in is inserted.
•• V-Pot/V-Select 26 edits the channel output destination.
•• V-Pot/V-Select 27 sets the automation mode.
•• V-Pot/V-Select 28 edits group membership.
•• V-Pot/V-Select 29 edits volume.
•• V-Pot/V-Select 30 edits pan/surround angle (for surround channels).
•• V-Pot/V-Select 31 edits surround diversity.
•• V-Pot/V-Select 32 sets the channel input format.

Chapter 15    Mackie C4 188

C4 Function overlay
The Function overlay is active when the FUNCTION button light is on. The table below outlines
the assignment of C4 controls to Logic functions.

Control Assignment
1 (display: Inspct) Enables or disables the Inspector of the window with
key focus.
2 (Channel Strip) Enables or disables the Lists area display in the Tracks
window.
2 (Channel Strip)-Option Enables or disables the Media area display in the
Tracks window.
3 (Delay in ms) Displays delays in milliseconds.
4 (Ruler: SMPTE) Shows SMPTE display of ruler.
5 (Global Track) Displays Global tracks.
6 (Arrang Grid) Shows or hides the Tracks window grid.
7 (Event Float) Displays the Event List.
8 (Name/Value) Switches the display mode between Name and
Value (identical to the NAME/VALUE button on the
Mackie Control).
9 (Track Autom.) Enables or disables display of track automation in the
Tracks window.
10 (Trk>Rg Autom.) Performs Move Current Track Automation Data to
Region key command. With the OPTION button
held down (display: Trk>Ob Au All), the Move All
Track Automation Data to Region key command is
executed.
11 (Rg>Trk Autom.) Performs Move Current Region Data to Track
Automation function. With the OPTION button held
down (display: Ob>Trk Au All), the Move All Region
Control Data to Track Automation key command is
executed.
12 (Clear Autom.) Performs Delete Currently Visible Automation Data
of Current Track key command. With the OPTION
button held down (display: Clear Au All), the Delete
All Automation Data of Current Track function is
performed.
13 (ClrAll Overld) Resets the Level Meter Overload displays.
14 (ClrAll RecRdy) Switches off Record Enable button of all channels.
15 (ClrAll Solo) Switches off Solo for all channels.
16 (ClrAll Mute) Switches off Mute for all channels.
17 (Tool: Pointr) Selects the Pointer tool.
18 (Tool: Pencil) Selects the Pencil tool.
19 (Tool: Scissr) Selects the Scissors tool.
20 (Tool: Glue) Selects the Glue tool.
21 (Tool: Text) Selects the Text tool.
22 (Tool: Xfade) Selects the Crossfade tool.
23 (Tool: Marque) Selects the Marquee tool.

Chapter 15    Mackie C4 189

Control Assignment
24 (Tool: Autom.) Selects the Automation Select tool.
V-Pot 25 (WfZoom) Edits the waveform zoom factor (if the main window
has key focus).
V-Pot 26 (V.Zoom) Edits the vertical zoom factor of the window with key
focus.
V-Pot 27 (H.Zoom) Edits the horizontal zoom factor of the window with
key focus.
V-Pot 28 (Move Cycle) Moves the cycle locators.
V-Pot 29 (Quantz) Chooses the Quantize value. V-Select 29 performs
Quantize Selected Events for the selected regions or
events.
V-Pot 30 (Division) Chooses the division value for clock display.
V-Select 31 (Prev SetEXS) Performs Next Plug-in Setting or EXS Instrument key
command.
V-Select 32 (Next SetEXS) Performs Previous Plug-in Setting or EXS Instrument
key command.

C4 modifier buttons
The four buttons in this area are similar to those found on your computer keyboard (but are
independent of the keyboard modifiers). Many Logic Pro functions behave differently when
one or more modifier keys are pressed in conjunction with another key or mouse click. This also
applies to the C4 control surface.

Here is a generic description of the modifier button functions:

•• SHIFT: Switches other buttons to an alternate function.
•• OPTION: While held down, parameters are set to the minimum, default, or maximum value
when edited with a V-Pot.
•• CTRL: Disables the Group function.
•• CMD/ALT: While held down, parameters are edited in Fine (high-resolution) mode when a V-Pot
is turned.

Chapter 15    Mackie C4 190

C4 Parameter, Track, and Slot buttons
The buttons at the lower right of the C4 are used to access channel strips, channel strip elements,
and parameters.
•• BANK Left and BANK Right buttons: Shifts the parameter display by one page (a group of
parameters) in particular views.
•• SINGLE Left and SINGLE Right buttons: Shifts the parameter display by one parameter in
particular views.
•• TRACK L and TRACK R buttons: In Mixer view, TRACK L and TRACK R shift the fader bank left or
right by the number of channel strips in the control surface group. For example, if you have
two C4 units in a control surface group, the view shifts by 16 channels.
Simultaneously pressing TRACK L or TRACK R and OPTION moves to the first or last group
of channels in the project (or parameter pages, if in an edit mode). For example, if you are
viewing the first 8 channels (of 64) in the fader bank, pressing OPTION and TRACK L or TRACK
R will show the last 8 channels in the fader bank (channels 57 to 64).
In Channel view, TRACK L and TRACK R select the previous or next channel.
In Channel view, simultaneously pressing TRACK L or TRACK R and SHIFT moves to the first or
last group of channels in the project (or parameter pages, if in an edit mode), but only affects
the Split Lower group if Split mode is active.
•• SLOT UP and SLOT DOWN buttons: Selects the required EQ, Send, or Insert slot.

Chapter 15    Mackie C4 191

 Radikal Technologies SAC-2K
16
Set up your SAC-2K
Make sure that your control surface is connected bidirectionally with the computer, using either
a MIDI interface or the unit’s USB connector. If the units are connected via USB, ensure that the
appropriate MIDI driver for the device is installed. Visit the manufacturer’s website to download
updated drivers, if necessary.

Set up SAC-2K units

1 Choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Setup.
2 Choose Install from the New menu.
3 Select the SAC-2K in the Install window.
4 Click the Scan button.

SAC-2K assignments
SAC-2K assignments overview
This section outlines the assignment of the Radikal Technologies SAC-2K interface elements to
Logic functions.
•• SAC-2K LCDs and encoders on page 193
•• SAC-2K channel strips on page 194
•• SAC-2K Mixer view controls on page 195
•• SAC-2K software navigation controls on page 198
•• SAC-2K locator display on page 198
•• SAC-2K marker controls on page 199
•• SAC-2K transport controls on page 200
•• SAC-2K Channel view controls on page 200

192
SAC-2K LCDs and encoders
The table outlines the LCDs and encoder controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
Left and middle LCDs Upper row displays the channel number when in a
Mixer (multichannel) view. The parameter name is
shown when in a (single) Channel view. Lower row
shows the parameter value of the corresponding
encoder (the one directly below the display). Level
meters are shown to the right.
Right LCD Upper row displays the name of the parameter
being edited with the corresponding encoder (the
one below). Lower row displays the parameter value
(assigned to the encoder below the display). The
Master Output level meter is displayed at the far right.
Encoders Edit the corresponding parameter shown in the LCD.
Encoder push buttons Parameters with two values (On/Off): Switches
between the two values. Parameters that access items
(plug-in selection, for example): Confirms preselection.
At other times, sets the parameter to its default value.

Chapter 16    Radikal Technologies SAC-2K 193

SAC-2K channel strips
The table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT, below a button description indicates that the button has
an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

Mute/Solo Switches Mute/Solo 1 to 8 buttons
between Mute and Solo modes.
LED off: Mute/Solo buttons switch
Mute state on/off. LED on: Mute/
Solo buttons switch Solo state on/
off. LED flashes: Mute/Solo buttons
switch Record Enable state on/off.
SHIFT Sets Mute/Solo buttons to Record
Enable mode.
Mute/Solo 1 to 8 Mute/Solo LED off: Enables or
disables Mute; LED displays Mute
state. Mute/Solo LED on: Enables
or disables Solo; LED displays Solo
state. Mute/Solo LED flashing:
Enables or disables Record Enable;
LED displays Record Enable
(armed/disarmed) state.
SELECT 1 to 8 buttons Selects channel. Exception: In
Group mode, these buttons define
group membership of the channel.
Master Select button Switches Flip mode between Off
and Duplicate.
Faders 1 to 8 Controls volume, or duplicates the
parameter assigned to the encoder
above (if Flip mode is enabled).
Master Fader Controls the Master Level fader
if it exists; if not, controls Output
1–2 level.
EQ button Inserts a Channel EQ in the
channel if no Channel or Linear
Phase EQ is present.

Chapter 16    Radikal Technologies SAC-2K 194

SAC-2K Mixer view controls
The table outlines the Mixer view controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT, below a button description indicates that the button has
an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

Pan Switches to Mixer view
(multichannel) pan editing.
Encoders 9 to 12 edit Pan/Angle,
Diversity, LFE, and Spread of
selected channel (in Surround
mode).
High, HiMid, LowMid, Low Switches to Mixer view
(multichannel) gain editing of a
certain EQ band. Encoders 9 to 12
edit Frequency, Gain, Q factor, and
On/Off for the selected channel.
Pressing and releasing the button
chooses a specific EQ band. While
held down, you can use Encoder
9 to choose the EQ band that you
want to edit (bands 1 to 8). The
button’s LED is lit when in Mixer
view Gain Editing mode (of the
selected channel EQ band).
•• Low: Band 3 (first parametric EQ
band)
•• LowMid: Band 4 (second
parametric EQ band)
•• HiMid: Band 5 (third parametric
EQ band)
•• High: Band 6 (fourth parametric
EQ band)
Snd/Ins Switches the four Snd/Ins (1 to 4)
buttons between Send and Insert
modes.
•• LED off: Send mode
•• LED on: Insert mode

Chapter 16    Radikal Technologies SAC-2K 195

Control Modifier Assignment
Snd/Ins 1 to 4 •• If in Send mode, switches to
Mixer view (multichannel)
send level editing of Sends
1 to 4. Encoders 9 to 12 edit
Destination, Level, Pre/Post, and
Mute of the selected channel.
You must confirm the send
destination by pushing the
Encoder 9 button. While held
down, use Encoder 9 to select
the Send number (1 to 8). The
button’s LED is lit when in Mixer
view Send Level Editing mode
(of the selected channel Send
slot).
•• If in Insert mode, switches to
Mixer view plug-in selection for
Inserts 1 to 4. Plug-in selection
is confirmed by pressing the
encoder’s push button. While
held down, use Encoder 9 to
choose the Insert slot number
(1 to 15). The button’s LED is lit
when in Plug-in Selection mode
(of the corresponding channel
Insert slot).
Audio Switches to Mixer view, and
displays audio channels.
SHIFT Switches to Mixer view.
MIDI Switches to Mixer view, and
displays MIDI channel strips.
SHIFT Switches to Tracks window view,
and displays the channel strips
of all tracks used in the Tracks
window.
Input Switches to Mixer view, and
displays input channels.
SHIFT Switches to Mixer view, and
displays the master and output
channels.
Inst Switches to Mixer view, and
displays (software) instrument
channels.
SHIFT Switches to Mixer view, and
displays aux channels.
Bus Switches to Mixer view, and
displays bus channels.
SHIFT Switches to Single view.

Chapter 16    Radikal Technologies SAC-2K 196

Control Modifier Assignment
Group Switches to Group editing mode:
•• Encoder 1 to 10 push buttons
edit a group property. (The
property is shown in the LCD’s
lower line.)
•• Encoder 11 scrolls through
group properties.
•• Encoder 12 selects a group to
edit. Its name is displayed in the
lower LCD line, above Encoder
12.
•• Select buttons 1 to 8 activate/
deactivate group membership
of the channel.
1 to 8 Shifts the fader bank (a group of
channels or parameters) to the left
by one bank.
9 to 16 Shifts the fader bank to the right
by one bank.
17 to 24 Shifts the fader bank to the left by
one channel.
25 to 32 Shifts the fader bank to the right
by one channel.

Chapter 16    Radikal Technologies SAC-2K 197

SAC-2K software navigation controls
The table outlines the software navigation controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
1 Num LED off: —
Num LED on: Equivalent to 1 on computer keyboard.
2 Num LED off: Equivalent to Left Arrow key on
computer keyboard.
Num LED on: Equivalent to 2 on computer keyboard.
3 Num LED off: Equivalent to Up Arrow key on
computer keyboard.
Num LED on: Equivalent to 3 on computer keyboard.
4 Num LED off: Equivalent to Right Arrow key on
computer keyboard.
Num LED on: Equivalent to 4 on computer keyboard.
5 Num LED off: Performs Undo (of most recent editing
operation).
Num LED on: Equivalent to 5 on computer keyboard.
6 Num LED off: —
Num LED on: Equivalent to 6 on computer keyboard.
7 Num LED off: Copies the selection (of regions or
events).
Num LED on: Equivalent to 7 on computer keyboard.
8 Num LED off: Equivalent to Down Arrow key on
computer keyboard.
Num LED on: Equivalent to 8 on computer keyboard.
9 Num LED off: Pastes the Clipboard contents.
Num LED on: Equivalent to 9 on computer keyboard.
0 Num LED off: Saves the project.
Num LED on: Equivalent to 0 on computer keyboard.
Num Switches the numeric buttons between primary and
secondary function (see above).
Enter Equivalent to Enter key on the computer keyboard.

Note:  All buttons that are equivalents of computer keyboard keys are independent of the
computer keys. Either can be reassigned.

SAC-2K locator display

The locator display shows the current playhead position in bars/beats format, as defined in the
project settings. A period separates display segments because the bars/beats format uses (up to)
14 characters in Logic Pro, and the SAC display is limited to 8 digits.

Chapter 16    Radikal Technologies SAC-2K 198

SAC-2K marker controls
The table outlines the marker controls and their assignments:

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT, below a button description indicates that the button has
an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

SHIFT Shifts to secondary function of
other buttons.
Scrub Switches between three Jog Wheel
modes:
•• LED off: Moves playhead by one
bar.
•• LED on: Activates Scrub mode.
•• LED flashes: Activates Shuttle
mode.
From Sets left locator at the current
playhead position.
SHIFT Moves the playhead to the left
locator position.
Store Marker Creates a marker at the current
playhead position.
SHIFT Deletes the marker at the current
playhead position.
To Sets right locator at the current
playhead position.
SHIFT Moves the playhead to the right
locator position.
Recall Marker Opens the Go to Marker dialog.
SHIFT Opens the Marker List.
Jog Wheel Moves the playhead in one of
three modes, depending on the
state of the Scrub button (see
above).

Chapter 16    Radikal Technologies SAC-2K 199

SAC-2K transport controls
The table outlines the transport controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT, below a button description indicates that the button has
an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

<< Shuttles backward.
>> Shuttles forward.
SHIFT Goes to next marker.
STOP Stops playback (or recording).
PLAY Starts playback.
SHIFT Enables or disables Cycle mode.
RECORD Starts recording (to record-enabled
tracks).
SHIFT Enables or disables Replace mode.

SAC-2K Channel view controls

The table outlines the Channel view controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
EQs Enters Channel view EQ Edit mode. Pressing the
button repeatedly cycles through all available EQ
parameter pages.
Inserts/Sends Enters Channel view Plug-in Edit mode and edits the
effect plug-in inserted into the currently chosen Insert
slot (of the selected channel). Pressing the button
repeatedly cycles through all available effect plug-in
parameter pages.
Dynamics —
MIDI —
Instrument Enters Channel view Instrument Edit mode and edits
the instrument plug-in inserted into the selected
(Instrument) channel. Pressing the button repeatedly
cycles through all available instrument plug-in
parameter pages.

SAC-2K troubleshooting
This section may help you to resolve a few common problems.
•• Track or channel names are shorter than necessary, and the assignments don’t work correctly
The SAC-2K is in an Emulation mode (Logic Control or HUI, for example). To resolve this issue,
turn the SAC-2K power off, and then back on.
•• The faders don’t work, and the locator display shows “00000000”
You have manually switched the SAC-2K to SLAVE mode. This has the unfortunate side effect
of not initializing a number of settings required for proper communication. To resolve this
issue, turn the SAC-2K power off, and then back on.

Chapter 16    Radikal Technologies SAC-2K 200

 Recording Light
17
Set up Recording Light
The Recording Light control surface plug-in enables you to control an external light or sign,
warning visitors not to enter the recording studio before or during recording. Logic Pro sends a
MIDI signal to switch on the external device when a track is record-enabled or when recording
starts. Logic Pro sends another MIDI signal to switch off the device when tracks are made record-
safe or when recording stops.

Note:  This control surface plug-in requires additional hardware that is not included with
Logic Pro.

Recording Light needs to be manually added to your setup.

Set up Recording Light

1 Choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Setup.
2 Choose Install from the New menu.
3 Select Recording Light from the list in the Install window.
4 Click the Add button.
Note:  While Recording Light can be added anywhere, it is suggested that you use it in its own
control surface group.

Recording Light parameters

Because Recording Light hardware is not actually a control surface but rather a simple MIDI-
controlled display device, all changes to its behavior are made in the Device Parameter area at
the left of the Setup window.

Recording Light parameters

•• Out Port: Choose the MIDI output port from the pop-up menu.

•• Input: Choose the MIDI input port from the pop-up menu.
•• Module: Shows the name of the control surface plug-in (Recording Light), which cannot
be changed.
•• Model: Shows the model name of the control surface (Recording Light), which cannot
be changed.
•• Version: Shows the firmware version for some control surfaces. Not applicable to
Recording Light.
•• Color: Not applicable to Recording Light
•• MIDI Status: Choose the type of MIDI message that is sent to the recording light device.
Generally, this will be a “MIDI note on” message, but other data types can be transmitted.
•• MIDI Channel: Specify the MIDI channel that data is sent on.

201
•• Data 1: Any Record Ready LED: This value determines how the Recording Light device responds
to a track being record-enabled in Logic Pro.
•• Data 1: Recording: This value determines how the Recording Light device responds when the
Record button is engaged in Logic Pro.
•• Data 2: On Value: Choose the value for the MIDI event that is sent to turn on the Recording
Light device. Typically this value is 127.

Chapter 17    Recording Light 202

 Roland SI-24
18
Set up your SI-24
Follow the steps below before using your control surface with Logic Pro.

Use both the audio and MIDI controller features of the SI-24
mm Ensure that your SI-24 units are connected to the RPC card with the (included) cable. This
connector provides both digital audio and MIDI connections.
mm Make sure that the appropriate driver software is installed and functioning correctly.

Note:  The RPC card is a PCI device and is not compatible with (most) G5, and all Intel-based Mac
computers, which only offer PCIe interfacing.

Use the SI-24 as a control surface

mm Connect the unit bidirectionally with two free (not used by other devices) MIDI interface ports.
When used as a control surface, the SI-24 can be used with all Mac systems that are capable of
running Logic Pro. You will require another device for audio input and output.

Scan for your Roland SI-24 unit

1 Choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Setup.
2 Choose Install from the New menu.
3 Select Roland SI-24 in the Install window.
4 Click the Scan button.
Logic Pro scans for, and automatically installs, your control surface.

SI-24 assignments
SI-24 assignments overview
These sections outline the assignment of Roland SI-24 interface elements to Logic functions.
•• SI-24 channel strips on page 204
•• SI-24 status mode controls on page 206
•• SI-24 channel assign controls on page 206
•• SI-24 surround/pan controls on page 207
•• SI-24 numeric key controls on page 208
•• SI-24 transport controls on page 209

203
SI-24 channel strips
The table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button (such as SHIFT) shown below a button description indicates that the
button has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

EQ ON/OFF 1 to 4 In Pan mode:
•• Switches the bypass state of EQ
bands 1–4.
•• Enters EQ/Send mode. If no
Channel or Linear Phase EQ is
present on the selected channel,
a Channel EQ is automatically
inserted.
In EQ/Send mode:
•• Switches the bypass state of EQ
bands 1–4. The button LED is lit
when the EQ is enabled.
In Plug-in mode:
•• Switches between Inserts 1–4.
A lit button LED indicates the
selected Insert slot.
•• If a plug-in window is open, it
updates to reflect the plug-in
parameters of the selected
Insert slot.
SHIFT In EQ/Send mode: Enables or
disables Send 1–4 Mute.
EQ/SEND Switches Channel views between:
•• EQ/Send Edit mode (LED on).
•• Pan Edit mode (LED off).
PLUG-IN Switches Channel views between:
•• Plug-in Edit mode (LED on).
(Plug-in window opens.)
•• Pan Edit mode (LED off).
Plug-in window closes when
Plug-in Edit mode is exited.
SHIFT Switches Channel views between:
•• Instrument Edit mode (LED on).
(Instrument window opens.)
•• Pan Edit mode (LED off).
Instrument plug-in window closes
when Instrument Edit mode is
exited.

Chapter 18    Roland SI-24 204

Control Modifier Assignment
PAN 1 to 12 In Pan Edit mode:
•• Controls channel strip Pan/
Balance (surround angle for
channels in surround mode).
In EQ/Send mode:
•• 1/3/5/7: Control the Gain
parameter of EQ bands 1–4.
•• 2/4/6/8: Control the Frequency
parameter of EQ bands 1–4.
•• 9–12: Control Send 1–4 levels.
In Plug-in Edit mode:
•• 1–10: Edits plug-in parameter.
•• 11: Bypasses the plug-in.
•• 12: Shifts plug-in parameter
page. (A page is a collection of
parameters.)
In Instrument mode:
•• 1–10: Edits Instrument
parameter.
•• 11: Bypasses the instrument
plug-in.
•• 12: Shifts Instrument parameter
page.
SHIFT In EQ/Send mode:
•• 2/4/6/8: Control the Q-Factor of
EQ bands 1–4.
•• 9–12: Determine Send 1–4
destinations.
CH SELECT 1 to 12 Selects track/channel.
STATUS 1 to 12 In Automation mode: Switches
Automation mode between:
•• Off (LED off)
•• Read (green)
•• Latch (orange)
•• Write (red)
In Record Ready mode: Turns
Record Enable on or off. In Solo
mode: Enables or disables Solo. In
Mute mode: Enables or disables
Mute.
Fader 1 to 12 Controls volume.
Master fader Controls the master channel strip.

Chapter 18    Roland SI-24 205

SI-24 status mode controls
The table outlines the status mode controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button (such as SHIFT) shown below a button description indicates that the
button has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

AUTOMIX Sets STATUS 1 to 12 buttons to
Automation mode.
SHIFT Sets all tracks to Off, Read, Latch,
or Write automation mode.
Repeatedly press this button
combination to cycle through
automation modes.
REC/PLAY Sets STATUS 1 to 12 buttons to
Record Enable mode.
SOLO Sets STATUS 1 to 12 buttons to
Solo mode.
MUTE Sets STATUS 1 to 12 buttons to
Mute mode.

SI-24 channel assign controls

The table outlines the channel assign controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button (such as SHIFT) shown below a button description indicates that the
button has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

INPUT Shows the first 12 audio input
channel strips.
SHIFT Shows the first 12 MIDI channel
strips.
OUTPUT Shows the first 12 output channel
strips:
•• 1: Output 1–2 (default surround
assignment: front)
•• 2: Output 3–4 (default surround
assignment: rear)
•• 3: Output 5 (default surround
assignment: center)
•• 4: Output 6 (default surround
assignment: LFE)
•• 5: Output 7–8 (digital out)
SHIFT Shows the first 12 audio channels.
BUS Shows the first 12 aux channels.
SHIFT Shows the first 12 instrument
channels.
Tr 1 to 12 Switches to Tracks view and shows
the first 12 channels.
Tr 13 to 24 Switches to Tracks view and
displays channel 13 to 24.

Chapter 18    Roland SI-24 206

SI-24 surround/pan controls
The table outlines the surround/pan controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
ON/OFF Switches selected channel output between:
•• Surround (LED on)
•• Out 1–2 (LED off)
Also shows/hides the Surround Pan window.
Joystick Surround X/Y of selected channel

Chapter 18    Roland SI-24 207

SI-24 numeric key controls
The table outlines the numeric key controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button (such as SHIFT) shown below a button description indicates that the
button has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

SYSTEM Switches SI-24 to System mode.
See SI-24 user manual for details.
LOCATE Switches numeric keys to Locate
mode.
SHORT CUT Switches numeric keys to Shortcut
mode.
SCREEN SET Switches numeric keys to
Screenset mode.
0 to 9 System mode: See SI-24 user
manual.
Locate mode:
•• 1 to 9: Moves playhead to
marker 1 to 9 positions.
•• 0: Creates marker at playhead
position.
Shortcut mode:
•• 1: Saves project. LED is lit if
project has changed since last
save.
•• 2: Performs Undo (of last editing
operation). LED is on if a Redo is
possible.
•• 3: Copies the selection (of
regions or events).
•• 4: Pastes the Clipboard contents.
•• 5: Deletes the selection.
•• 6: Enables or disables Scrub
mode. LED is on if Scrub mode
is enabled.
•• 7: Enables or disables Cycle
mode. LED is on if Cycle mode
is enabled.
•• 8: Enables or disables
Autopunch mode. LED is on if
Autopunch mode is enabled.
•• 9: Switches Tracks window to
Hyper Draw volume view.
•• 0: Switches Tracks window to
Hyper Draw pan view.
Screenset mode:
•• 1 to 9: Recall screensets 1 to 9.
•• 0: Enables or disables Lock
Screenset command.

Chapter 18    Roland SI-24 208

Control Modifier Assignment
SHIFT Locate mode:
•• 1 to 9: Moves playhead to
marker 10 to 18 positions.
•• 0: Deletes marker at playhead
position.
Shortcut mode:
•• 1: Performs Save As.
•• 2: Performs Redo (reverses last
Undo operation).
•• 3: Cuts selection.
•• 4: Pastes the Clipboard contents.
Screenset mode:
•• 1: Opens or closes Tracks
window.
•• 2: Opens or closes Mixer.
•• 3: Opens or closes Event Editor.
•• 4: Opens or closes Score Editor.
•• 5: Opens or closes Step Editor.
•• 6: Opens or closes Piano Roll
Editor.
•• 7: Opens or closes Control bar
window.
•• 8: Opens or closes Audio Bin
window.
•• 9: Opens or closes Sample
Editor.

SI-24 transport controls

The table outlines the transport controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
PAUSE Pause
REW Rewinds playhead in one-bar increments.
F FWD Advances playhead by one bar.
STOP Stops playback.
PLAY Starts playback.
RECORD Starts recording.
Jog Wheel Scrub mode off: Moves playhead in one-bar
increments.
Scrub mode on: Scrubs (audio and MIDI).

Chapter 18    Roland SI-24 209

 Tascam FW-1884
19
Set up FW-1884, FE-8, or FW-1082
The Tascam FW-1884, the FE-8 extension, and the FW-1082 can control Logic Pro. The Tascam FE-8
extension can be used to expand the FW-1884 with eight additional channel strips. Up to 15 FE-8
units can be added to the FW-1884 system. The Tascam FW-1082 is a stripped-down version of
the FW-1884.

Note:  This is an addendum to the Tascam user documentation and is limited to descriptions of

features specific to Logic Pro. Refer to the Tascam documentation for more information about the
individual control surfaces.

Follow the steps below to use your device with Logic Pro.

Set up your Tascam device with Logic Pro

1 Set up your device as described in the Tascam user documentation.
2 Install the latest OS X driver software and firmware on your computer. Visit the Tascam website to
download the most recent versions, if necessary.
3 Open Logic Pro.
Your control surface automatically connects to the application.

FW-1884 assignments
FW-1884 assignments overview
Assignments of Tascam FW-1884 interface elements to Logic functions are covered in
these sections.

Note:  The relevant devices are highlighted in the heading of each section.

•• Encoders (FW-1884, FE-8) on page 211
•• Shortcut controls (FW-1884 only) on page 212
•• Channel strips (FW-1884, FE-8, FW-1082) on page 213
•• EQ controls (FW-1884 only) on page 214
•• Encoders and controls (FW-1082 only) on page 215
•• Automation controls (FW-1884 only) on page 218
•• Mode controls (FW-1082 only) on page 219
•• Master controls (FW-1884, FE-8, FW-1082) on page 219

210
Encoders (FW-1884, FE-8)
The table outlines the encoder controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
FLIP Switches Flip mode between Off and Swap. In Swap
mode, the parameter controlled by the fader and
encoder of each channel strip is swapped.
PAN Assigns Pan to encoders.
AUX 1 Assigns Send 1 level to encoders.
AUX 2 Assigns Send 2 level to encoders.
AUX 3 Assigns Send 3 level to encoders.
AUX 4 Assigns Send 4 level to encoders.
AUX 5 Assigns Send 5 level to encoders.
AUX 6 Assigns Send 6 level to encoders.
AUX 7 Assigns Send 7 level to encoders.
AUX 8 Assigns Send 8 level to encoders.

Chapter 19    Tascam FW-1884 211

Shortcut controls (FW-1884 only)
The table outlines the shortcut controls and their assignments.

Note:  If a modifier button, such as SHIFT, is shown below a button description, it indicates that
the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

SAVE/F1 Saves the active project. The
button LED is lit when the project
has been edited since the last Save
operation.
REVERT/F2 Reverts to the most recently saved
version of the project.
ALL SAFE/F3 Disables the Record Enable
buttons of all channel strips.
CLR SOLO/F4 Switches Solo off for all channel
strips.
SHIFT Switches Mute off for all channel
strips.
MARKERS/F5 Creates a new marker at the
current playhead position.
SHIFT Deletes the marker at the playhead
position.
LOOP/F6 Enables or disables Cycle mode.
CUT Cuts the current selection (of
regions or events) and places it on
the Clipboard.
DEL Deletes the current selection.
COPY Copies the current selection to the
Clipboard.
PASTE Pastes the Clipboard contents to
the current playhead position.
ALT/CMD Modifier for other buttons.
UNDO Performs an Undo of the last
editing operation. The button LED
is lit when a Redo is possible.
SHIFT Performs a Redo (reverses an Undo
operation).
SHIFT Modifier for other buttons.
CTRL Modifier for other buttons.

Chapter 19    Tascam FW-1884 212

Channel strips (FW-1884, FE-8, FW-1082)
The table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments.

Note:  If a modifier button, such as SHIFT, is shown below a button description, it indicates that
the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

REC LEDs These LEDs are lit when the
corresponding channel strip is
recording. The LEDs flash when the
channel strip is in Record Enable
mode (armed).
SEL Selects the channel strip.
SHIFT Enables or disables Send bypass,
when encoders are controlling a
Send level.
READ Sets the track automation mode
to Read.
WRITE Sets the track automation mode
to Write.
TCH Sets the track automation mode
to Touch.
LATCH Sets the track automation mode
to Latch.
SOLO Enables or disables the Solo state
of the channel strip.
SHIFT Disables the Solo state for all
channel strips (driver version 1.20
or later required).
MUTE Enables or disables the Mute state
of the channel strip.
SHIFT Disables the Mute state for all
channel strips (driver version 1.20
or later required).
Encoder Controls the parameter chosen
with the ENCODERS section.
SET When encoders are controlling a
Send level, this combination allows
you to set the send destination.
Fader Controls the channel strip volume.
Master fader Controls the master volume. If no
master channel exists, it controls
Output 1/2.

Chapter 19    Tascam FW-1884 213

EQ controls (FW-1884 only)
The EQ controls apply to a certain EQ band of the selected channel. A Channel or Linear Phase
EQ is automatically inserted in the channel, if not already present.

Note:  If a modifier button, such as SHIFT, is shown below a button description, it indicates that
the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Mode Modifier Assignment

REC While REC is held down,
the SEL buttons activate or
deactivate Record Enable for the
corresponding channel strip.
GAIN Edits the Gain of the currently
selected EQ band.
SET Selects the channel strip input.
FREQ Edits the Frequency parameter of
the currently selected EQ band.
SET Selects the channel strip output.
Q Edits the Q Factor of the currently
selected EQ band.
SET Selects the channel strip input
format.
HIGH Selects EQ band 6.
SHIFT Selects EQ band 8.
REC Switches the bypass state of EQ
band 6 (driver version 1.20 or later
required).
HI-MID Selects EQ band 5.
SHIFT Selects EQ band 7.
REC Switches the bypass state of EQ
band 5 (driver version 1.20 or later
required).
LOW-MID Selects EQ band 4.
SHIFT Selects EQ band 2.
REC Switches the bypass state of EQ
band 4 (driver version 1.20 or later
required).
LOW Selects EQ band 3.
SHIFT Selects EQ band 1.
REC Switches the bypass state of EQ
band 3 (driver version 1.20 or later
required).

Chapter 19    Tascam FW-1884 214

Encoders and controls (FW-1082 only)
The three buttons at the bottom of this control surface section determine the mode of other
controls:
•• EQ/Pan mode: The controls apply to a certain EQ band of the selected channel.
•• AUX 1–4 mode: The controls apply to Sends 1–4.
•• AUX 5–8 mode: The controls apply to Sends 5–8.

Note:  If a modifier button, such as SHIFT, is shown below a button description, it indicates that
the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Mode Modifier Assignment

REC While REC is held down, the SEL
buttons activate or deactivate
Record Enable for the channel
strip.
EQ GAIN–AUX 1/5 •• EQ/PAN mode: edits the Gain of
the currently selected EQ band.
•• AUX 1–4 mode: controls Send
1 level.
•• AUX 5–8 mode: controls Send
5 level.
SET Selects the channel strip input.
EQ FREQ–AUX 2/6 •• EQ/PAN mode: edits the
Frequency of the currently
selected EQ band.
•• AUX 1–4 mode: controls Send
2 level.
•• AUX 5–8 mode: controls Send
6 level.
SET Selects the channel strip output.
EQ Q–AUX 3/7 •• EQ/PAN mode: edits the Q
Factor of the currently selected
EQ band.
•• AUX 1–4 mode: controls Send
3 level.
•• AUX 5–8 mode: controls Send
7 level.
SET Selects the channel strip input
format.
PAN–AUX 4/8 •• EQ/PAN mode: edits Pan.
•• AUX 1–4 mode: controls Send
4 level.
•• AUX 5–8 mode: controls Send
8 level.

Chapter 19    Tascam FW-1884 215

Mode Modifier Assignment
EQ HI–AUX 1/5 •• EQ/PAN mode: selects EQ band
6.
•• AUX 1–4 mode: switches Send 1
Mute on/off.
•• AUX 5–8 mode: switches Send 5
Mute on/off.
SHIFT •• EQ/PAN mode: selects EQ band
8.
•• AUX 1–4 mode: switches Send 1
Position (pre/post).
•• AUX 5–8 mode: switches Send 5
Position (pre/post).
REC Switches bypass state of EQ band
6.
EQ HI MID–AUX 2/6 •• EQ/PAN mode: selects EQ band
5.
•• AUX 1–4 mode: switches Send 2
Mute on/off.
•• AUX 5–8 mode: switches Send 6
Mute on/off.
SHIFT •• EQ/PAN mode: selects EQ band
7.
•• AUX 1–4 mode: switches Send 2
Position (pre/post).
•• AUX 5–8 mode: switches Send 6
Position (pre/post).
REC Switches bypass state of EQ band
5.
EQ LO MID–AUX 3/7 •• EQ/PAN mode: selects EQ band
4.
•• AUX 1–4 mode: switches Send 3
Mute on/off.
•• AUX 5–8 mode: switches Send 7
Mute on/off.
SHIFT •• EQ/PAN mode: selects EQ band
2.
•• AUX 1–4 mode: switches Send 3
Position (pre/post).
•• AUX 5–8 mode: switches Send 7
Position (pre/post).
REC Switches bypass state of EQ band
4.

Chapter 19    Tascam FW-1884 216

Mode Modifier Assignment
EQ LOW–AUX 4/8 •• EQ/PAN mode: selects EQ band
3.
•• AUX 1–4 mode: switches Send 4
Mute on/off.
•• AUX 5–8 mode: switches Send 8
Mute on/off.
SHIFT •• EQ/PAN mode: selects EQ band
1.
•• AUX 1–4 mode: switches Send 4
Position (pre/post).
•• AUX 5–8 mode: switches Send 8
Position (pre/post).
REC Switches bypass state of EQ band
3.
EQ/PAN Chooses EQ/PAN mode.
SHIFT Enables or disables Flip mode.
With Flip mode enabled, the faders
control Pan.
AUX 1–4 Chooses AUX 1–4 mode.
AUX 5–8 Chooses AUX 5–8 mode.

Chapter 19    Tascam FW-1884 217

Automation controls (FW-1884 only)
The table outlines the automation controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
READ While READ is held down, SEL buttons are lit if a
channel strip is in Read automation mode. Pressing
the SEL button sets Read mode. Turning the encoder
also edits the automation mode.
WRITE While WRITE is held down, SEL buttons are lit if a
channel strip is in Write automation mode. Pressing
the SEL button sets Write mode. Turning the encoder
also edits the automation mode.
TCH While TCH is held down, SEL buttons are lit if a
channel strip is in Touch automation mode. Pressing
the SEL button sets Touch mode. Turning the encoder
also edits the automation mode.
LATCH While LATCH is held down, SEL buttons are lit if a
channel strip is in Latch automation mode. Pressing
the SEL button sets Latch mode. Turning the encoder
also edits the automation mode.
F7 Switches encoders to editing of pan/surround
parameters on selected channel strip. Surround
parameters are shown as follows: angle, radius, LFE
(level), Spread mode, X, Y, Center (level).
F8 Switches encoders to Channel view: EQ Edit mode for
the selected channel strip. In this mode, the encoders
are used to edit the EQ parameters, while the left/
right cursors are used to shift the EQ parameter bank
(parameter group).
F9 Switches encoders to Channel view: Plug-in Edit mode
for the selected channel strip. In this mode, the left/
right cursors are used to shift the plug-in parameter
bank. The up/down cursors are used to choose the
channel strip Insert slot for editing.
F10 Switches encoders to Channel view: Instrument Edit
mode for the selected channel strip. In this mode,
the left/right cursors are used to shift the instrument
parameter bank.

Chapter 19    Tascam FW-1884 218

Mode controls (FW-1082 only)
The table outlines the mode controls and their assignments:

Note:  If a modifier button, such as SHIFT, is shown below a button description, it indicates that
the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

F1 Saves the active project. The
button LED is lit if the project has
been edited since the last Save
operation.
SHIFT Opens the Save As dialog.
F2 Performs an Undo of the last
editing operation. The button LED
is lit when a Redo is possible.
SHIFT Performs a Redo.
F3 Copies the current selection (of
regions or events) to the Clipboard.
SHIFT Cuts the current selection and
places it on the Clipboard.
F4 Pastes the Clipboard contents.
SHIFT Clears the current selection.

Master controls (FW-1884, FE-8, FW-1082)

The table outlines the master controls and their assignments.

Note:  If a modifier button, such as SHIFT, is shown below a button description, it indicates that
the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

Cursor buttons Identical to (but independent of )
the computer keyboard arrow
keys, except when encoders are
in EQ, Plug-in, or Instrument Edit
mode.
SHIFT Horizontally or vertically zoom in
and out (of the window with key
focus).
SHTL Enables Shuttle mode for the
wheel.
Wheel Shuttle mode off: moves playhead
by one bar. Shuttle mode on:
shuttles playhead.
Bank LEDs Shows currently selected fader
bank. If you only have an FW-1884,
a bank refers to eight channels. If
you have FE-8 extensions added,
a bank encompasses the total
number of (physical) channel
strips: 16, 24, and so on. If no LED is
lit, bank 5 or higher is selected.

Chapter 19    Tascam FW-1884 219

Control Modifier Assignment
< BANK Shifts fader bank down by one
bank.
SHIFT Shifts fader bank down by one
channel.
SET Switches to Mixer (multichannel)
view (driver version 1.20 or later
required).
BANK > Shifts fader bank up by one bank.
SHIFT Shifts fader bank up by one
channel.
SET Switches to Mixer view and shows
all Aux and Output channels
(driver version 1.20 or later
required).
<< LOCATE Goes to previous marker.
SET Deletes the current marker (driver
version 1.20 or later required).
LOCATE >> Goes to next marker.
SET Creates a new marker at the
playhead position (driver version
1.20 or later required).
NUDGE buttons Nudges the selected event/region
left or right (by the current nudge
value).
SET Chooses the current nudge value:
tick, division, denominator, bar,
frame, 1/2 frame.
SET Modifier for other buttons.
IN Moves playhead to left locator
position.
SET Sets left locator at current
playhead position.
SHIFT Sets punch in locator at current
playhead position.
OUT Moves playhead to right locator
position.
SET Sets right locator at current
playhead position.
SHIFT Sets punch out locator at current
playhead position.
REW As per Rewind key command.
FFWD As per Forward key command.
STOP Stops playback.
PLAY Starts playback.
REC As per Record key command.

Chapter 19    Tascam FW-1884 220

 Tascam US-2400
20
Set up your US-2400
The US-2400 is capable of running in both native and Mackie Control emulation modes. If the
unit is set up in Mackie Control emulation mode, and the native support plug-in is installed
in the Logic Pro program bundle, Logic Pro detects a US-2400 native control surface and a
Mackie Control, plus two Extender (XT) units.

To run the US-2400 in Mackie Control mode, remove the US-2400 plug-in from the Logic Pro
application bundle. Logic Pro will then detect a Mackie Control plus two Extender (XT) units
(the appropriate setup for the US-2400 in Mackie Control emulation mode) when you scan for
control surfaces.

The button layout of the Mackie Control differs from that of the Tascam US-2400. When running
the Tascam US-2400 in Mackie Control mode, certain controllers are not accessible (the Joystick,
for example). Given these restrictions, use of the Tascam US-2400 in Mackie Control mode
is not recommended. If you choose to do so, refer to the documentation supplied with the
Tascam US-2400 for details.

Follow the steps below to use your Tascam US-2400 with Logic Pro.

Set up the Tascam US-2400 for use with Logic Pro

1 Make sure that your US-2400 control surfaces are connected to the computer via USB.
2 Ensure that the US-2400 is in native mode. Consult your US-2400 manual for more information
on this setting.
3 Open Logic Pro.
Your control surfaces are scanned for, and installed, automatically.

US-2400 assignments
US-2400 assignments overview
These sections outline the assignment of Tascam US-2400 interface elements to Logic functions.
•• US-2400 channel strips on page 222
•• US-2400 encoders on page 223
•• US-2400 master channel on page 225
•• US-2400 encoder assignments overview on page 226
•• US-2400 master section controls on page 228

221
US-2400 channel strips
The table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT, below a control description indicates that the control has
an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

Encoders CHAN button on: see US-2400
encoders on page 223.
CHAN button flashing: encoders
control Instrument parameters.
Also see Instrument Edit view on
page 227.
PAN button flashing: encoders
control plug-in parameters. Also
see Plug-in Edit view on page 227.
Other modes: encoders control the
parameters of the active mode.
F-KEY •• If you are in Instrument Edit
view (CHAN button flashing),
pressing the F-Key enters the
Instrument Assignment view.
The encoders are used to
choose an instrument plug-in
from the list (of available
software instrument plug-ins).
•• If you are in Plug-in Edit view
(PAN button flashing), pressing
the F-Key enters the Plug-in
Assignment view. The encoders
are used to choose an effect
plug-in from the list (of available
effect plug-ins).
•• If you are in Send view (AUX
button LED flashes) and press
the F-Key, the encoders are used
to assign the send destination.
SEL buttons Selects tracks/channels.
SHIFT In Pan view: sets volume to Unity
(0 dB).
In Send views: switches the Send
mode (pre/post).
F-KEY Turns the Record Enable button of
each channel on or off.
SOLO buttons Enables or disables Solo.
MUTE buttons Enables or disables Mute. In Send
views with Flip mode enabled:
mutes/unmutes the selected Send.
SHIFT In Send views: mutes/unmutes the
selected Send.
Faders Controls the volume of each
channel (unless Duplicate or Swap
Flip mode is active).

Chapter 20    Tascam US-2400 222

US-2400 encoders
In CHAN mode (CHAN button on), the encoders control these parameters on the selected
channel:

Control Assignment
Encoder 1 (AUX 1) Controls Send 1 level.
Encoder 2 (AUX 2) Controls Send 2 level.
Encoder 3 (AUX 3) Controls Send 3 level.
Encoder 4 (AUX 4) Controls Send 4 level.
Encoder 5 (AUX 5) Controls Send 5 level.
Encoder 6 (AUX 6) Controls Send 6 level.
Encoder 7 Controls Send 7 level.
Encoder 8 Controls Send 8 level.
Encoder 11 (GAIN 1) Controls the Gain parameter of band 3, if a Channel or
Linear Phase EQ is inserted.
Encoder 12 (FREQ 1) Controls the Frequency parameter of band 3, if a
Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted.
Encoder 13 (Q 1) Controls the Q factor of band 3, if a Channel or Linear
Phase is inserted.
Encoder 14 (GAIN 2) Controls the Gain parameter of band 4, if a Channel or
Linear Phase is inserted.
Encoder 15 (FREQ 2) Controls the Frequency parameter of band 4, if a
Channel or Linear Phase is inserted.
Encoder 16 (Q 2) Controls the Q factor of band 4, if a Channel or Linear
Phase EQ is inserted.
Encoder 17 (GAIN 3) Controls the Gain parameter of band 5, if a Channel or
Linear Phase EQ is inserted.
Encoder 18 (FREQ 3) Controls the Frequency parameter of band 5, if a
Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted.
Encoder 19 (Q 3) Controls the Q factor of band 5, if a Channel or Linear
Phase EQ is inserted.
Encoder 20 (GAIN 4) Controls the Gain parameter of band 6, if a Channel or
Linear Phase EQ is inserted.
Encoder 21 (FREQ 4) Controls the Frequency parameter of band 6, if a
Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted.
Encoder 22 (Q 4) Controls the Q factor of band 6, if a Channel or Linear
Phase EQ is inserted.
Encoder 24 (PAN) Controls Panning.

Chapter 20    Tascam US-2400 223

In CHAN mode, with the SHIFT button held down, the encoders control the following parameters
on the selected channel:

Control Assignment
Encoder 1 (AUX 1) Controls Pan/Surround Angle.
Encoder 2 (AUX 2) Controls Surround Radius.
Encoder 3 (AUX 3) Controls Surround LFE (level).
Encoder 4 (AUX 4) Controls Surround Spread.
Encoder 5 (AUX 5) Controls Surround X.
Encoder 6 (AUX 6) Controls Surround Y.
Encoder 11 (GAIN 1) Controls the Slope parameter of band 1, if a Channel
or Linear Phase EQ is inserted.
Encoder 12 (FREQ 1) Controls the Frequency parameter of band 1, if a
Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted.
Encoder 13 (Q 1) Controls the Q factor of band 1, if a Channel or Linear
Phase EQ is inserted.
Encoder 14 (GAIN 2) Controls the Gain parameter of band 2, if a Channel or
Linear Phase EQ is inserted.
Encoder 15 (FREQ 2) Controls the Frequency parameter of band 2, if a
Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted.
Encoder 16 (Q 2) Controls the Q factor of band 2, if a Channel or Linear
Phase EQ is inserted.
Encoder 17 (GAIN 3) Controls the Gain parameter of band 7, if a Channel or
Linear Phase EQ is inserted.
Encoder 18 (FREQ 3) Controls the Frequency parameter of band 7, if a
Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted.
Encoder 19 (Q 3) Controls the Q factor of band 7, if a Channel or Linear
Phase EQ is inserted.
Encoder 20 (GAIN 4) Controls the Slope parameter of band 8, if a Channel
or Linear Phase EQ is inserted.
Encoder 21 (FREQ 4) Controls the Frequency parameter of band 8, if a
Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted.
Encoder 22 (Q 4) Controls the Q factor of band 8, if a Channel or Linear
Phase EQ is inserted.
Encoder 24 (PAN) Controls Pan/Balance (of mono or stereo channels).

Chapter 20    Tascam US-2400 224

US-2400 master channel
The table outlines the master channel strip controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
SEL Selects Master Output channel
strip if it exists; if not, Output
channel 1–2 is selected.
CLR SOLO Disables Solo for all tracks/
channels.
SHIFT Disables Mute for all tracks/
channels.
F-KEY Disables the Record Enable
buttons of all tracks/channels.
FLIP Switches Flip mode between Off
(LED off) and Duplicate (LED on).
In this mode, the fader of each
channel strip mirrors the encoder
function.
SHIFT Sets Flip mode to Swap (LED
flashing). In this mode, the
parameters controlled by the fader
and encoder are swapped.
F-KEY Sets Flip mode to Zero—fader
motors are disabled (LED flashing).

Chapter 20    Tascam US-2400 225

US-2400 encoder assignments
US-2400 encoder assignments overview
The table below outlines the standard assignment of the encoders. Also see Instrument Edit view
and Plug-in Edit view for information on alternate use of the encoders.

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT, below a control description indicates that the control has
an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

CHAN Switches encoders to Channel
view (see encoders’ legend); CHAN
button LED is lit.
F-KEY Switches encoders to Instrument
Edit view; CHAN button LED
flashes. See Instrument Edit
view on page 227 for details.
PAN Switches encoders to Mixer
(multichannel) view of pan
controls; PAN button LED is lit.
F-KEY Switches encoders to Plug-in Edit
view; PAN button LED flashes. See
Plug-in Edit view on page 227 for
details.
AUX 1 Switches encoders to Mixer view of
Send 1 level (for all channels).
F-KEY Opens or closes Tracks window.
AUX 2 Switches encoders to Mixer view
of Send 2 level.
F-KEY Opens or closes Event List.
AUX 3 Switches encoders to Mixer view
of Send 3 level.
F-KEY Opens or closes Score Editor.
AUX 4 Switches encoders to Mixer view
of Send 4 level.
F-KEY Opens or closes Audio Bin.
AUX 5 Switches encoders to Mixer view
of Send 5 level.
F-KEY Opens or closes Step Editor.
AUX 6 Switches encoders to Mixer view
of Send 6 level.
F-KEY Opens or closes Piano Roll Editor.

Chapter 20    Tascam US-2400 226

Instrument Edit view
In Instrument Edit view, the following AUX buttons have special assignments:

Control Assignment
AUX 1 Scrolls parameter fader bank left by 24 parameters.
AUX 2 Scrolls parameter fader bank right by 24 parameters.
AUX 4 Enables or disables Bypass button of the instrument
being edited.

The AUX button LEDs show the currently selected parameter bank. AUX 2 LED is on if parameters
25 to 48 are shown on the encoders.

Plug-in Edit view

In Plug-in Edit view, the following AUX buttons have special assignments:

Control Assignment
AUX 1 Scrolls parameter fader bank left by 24 parameters.
AUX 2 Scrolls parameter fader bank right by 24 parameters.
AUX 3 Increments Insert slot (chooses higher-numbered
slot).
AUX 4 Enables or disables Bypass button of the plug-in
being edited.
AUX 6 Decrements Insert slot (chooses lower-numbered
slot).

The AUX button LEDs show the currently selected Insert slot. For example, AUX 2 LED is on if
Insert slot 2 is being edited.

Chapter 20    Tascam US-2400 227

US-2400 master section controls
The table outlines the master section controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT, below a control description indicates that the control has
an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

MTR Switches encoder LED ring display
between two modes:
•• The value of the parameter (LED
off)
•• Level/peak hold meters (LED on)
In Level Meter mode, the LED
below the encoder displays signal
overloads (clipping).
F-KEY Modifier key, used to switch the
function of other controls (see
“F-KEY” entries in center column).
NULL Sets Surround x/y or Panning
of selected channel to center
position; LED is on if Surround X
(or Panning) is centered.
F-KEY Resets overload display for level
meters.
Jog Wheel SCRUB off: moves playhead by
bars.
SCRUB on: scrubbing (of audio and
MIDI).
SCRUB flashing: Shuttle mode.
Joystick Edits Surround x/y or Panning of
selected channel.
SCRUB Switches Jog Wheel between
Move Playhead by Bars (LED off)
and Scrubbing (LED on) modes.
SHIFT Sets Jog Wheel to Shuttle mode
(LED flashes).
BANK – Shifts fader bank to the left by one
bank; LED is lit if the leftmost fader
bank has not been reached.
F-KEY Shifts fader bank to the left by one
channel.
BANK + Shifts fader bank to the right by
one bank; LED is lit if the rightmost
fader bank has not been reached.
F-KEY Shifts fader bank to the right by
one channel.

Chapter 20    Tascam US-2400 228

Control Modifier Assignment
IN Sets punch in locator at the
current playhead position.
SHIFT Moves playhead to left cycle
locator position.
F-KEY Sets left cycle locator at the
current playhead position.
OUT Sets punch out locator at the
current playhead position.
SHIFT Moves playhead to right cycle
locator position.
F-KEY Sets right cycle locator at the
current playhead position.
SHIFT Modifier key, used to switch the
function of other controls (see
“SHIFT” entries in center column).
REW Shuttles backward.
SHIFT Identical to (but independent
of ) Left Arrow key on computer
keyboard.
F FWD Shuttles forward.
SHIFT Identical to (but independent of )
Right Arrow key on computer
keyboard.
STOP Stops playback.
SHIFT Identical to (but independent of )
Down Arrow key on computer
keyboard.
PLAY Starts playback.
SHIFT Identical to (but independent
of ) Up Arrow key on computer
keyboard.
RECORD Enables or disables recording.

Chapter 20    Tascam US-2400 229

 Tascam US-428 and US-224
21
Set up your US-428 or US-224
Follow these steps to use your Tascam US-428 or US-224 control surface with Logic Pro.

Set up your Tascam US-428 or US-224 device in Logic Pro

1 Install the latest version of the driver software needed for the US-428 or US-224.
2 Ensure that your US-428 or US-224 units are connected to the computer via USB.
3 Open Logic Pro.
The unit is scanned for, and installed, automatically.

US-428 and US-224 assignments

US-428 and US-224 assignments overview
These sections outline the assignment of Tascam US-428 and US-224 interface elements to
Logic functions.
•• US-428 and US-224 channel strips on page 231
•• US-428 and US-224 EQ controls on page 232
•• US-428 and US-224 master controls on page 233
•• US-428 and US-224 Locate controls on page 234
•• US-428 and US-224 Bank controls on page 234
•• US-428 and US-224 transport controls on page 234

Note:  The US-224 provides only four channel strips and transport controls and lacks the EQ and
Master sections (excluding the NULL button and data wheel) of the US-428. Many operations
listed in the linked sections are specific to the additional controls of the US-428 and cannot be
performed with the US-224.

230
US-428 and US-224 channel strips
The table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button (such as NULL) shown below a control description indicates that the
control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

MUTE 1 to 8 SOLO LED off: switches Mute on/
off; LED displays Mute state.
SOLO LED on: switches Solo on/off;
LED displays Solo state.
REC 1 to 8 LEDs Displays Record Enable state.
NULL On if fader is higher than actual
channel volume (in Logic Pro).
SELECT 1 to 8 LEDs Displays select status (of channel).
NULL On if fader is lower than actual
channel volume (in Logic Pro).
SELECT 1 to 8 buttons Selects channel.
REC Turns Record Enable on or off.
Fader 1 to 8 Controls channel volume.
NULL Allows you to update the fader
position to match the actual
volume (in Logic Pro).
Master fader Controls Master volume fader (or
Output 1 and 2, if no Master fader
channel exists in the project).

Chapter 21    Tascam US-428 and US-224 231

US-428 and US-224 EQ controls
The table outlines the EQ controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button (such as NULL) shown below a control description indicates that the
control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

Gain Controls the Gain of the currently
selected EQ band (of chosen
channel).
Freq Controls the Frequency of the
currently selected EQ band (of
chosen channel).
Q Controls the Q Factor of the
currently selected EQ band (of
chosen channel).
HIGH Selects EQ band 3 (allowing use of
Gain, Freq, and Q controls for this
band).
ASGN Switches EQ band 3 bypass state.
HI-MID Selects EQ band 4 (allowing use of
Gain, Freq, and Q controls for this
band).
ASGN Switches EQ band 4 bypass state.
LO-MID Selects EQ band 5 (allowing use of
Gain, Freq, and Q controls for this
band).
ASGN Switches EQ band 5 bypass state.
LOW Selects EQ band 6 (allowing use of
Gain, Freq, and Q controls for this
band).
ASGN Switches EQ band 6 bypass state.

Chapter 21    Tascam US-428 and US-224 232

US-428 and US-224 master controls
The table outlines the master controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button (such as NULL) shown below a control description indicates that the
control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.

Control Modifier Assignment

AUX 1 Switches data wheel between
Transport/Scrub mode and Send
1 Level.
ASGN Switches Send 1 Mute state.
AUX 2 Switches data wheel between
Transport/Scrub mode and Send
2 Level.
ASGN Switches Send 2 Mute state.
AUX 3 Switches data wheel between
Transport/Scrub mode and Send
3 Level.
ASGN Switches Send 3 Mute state.
AUX 4 Switches data wheel between
Transport/Scrub mode and Send
4 Level.
ASGN Switches Send 4 Mute state.
ASGN Modifier for function of EQ
controls, AUX 1 to 4 buttons, PAN
knob, and data wheel.
F1 Enables or disables Cycle mode.
F2 Enables or disables Autopunch
mode.
F3 Enables or disables Scrub mode.
PAN Controls panning of selected
channel.
ASGN Sets currently selected channel’s
input.
NULL Modifier for NULL mode. NULL
mode allows you to update the
fader positions to match the actual
volume (shown in Logic Pro).

Chapter 21    Tascam US-428 and US-224 233

Control Modifier Assignment
Data wheel AUX 1 LED on: controls the Send 1
Level of the selected channel.
AUX 2 LED on: controls the Send 2
Level of the selected channel.
AUX 3 LED on: controls the Send 3
Level of the selected channel.
AUX 4 LED on: controls the Send 4
Level of the selected channel.
F3 LED on: data wheel is in Scrub
mode.
None of the above is lit: data
wheel is in Transport mode, and
moves the playhead in one-bar
increments.
ASGN Sets currently selected channel’s
output.

US-428 and US-224 Locate controls

The table outlines the Locate controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
<< LOCATE Moves playhead to previous marker position.
LOCATE >> Moves playhead to next marker position.
SET Creates a new marker at the current playhead
position.

US-428 and US-224 Bank controls

The table outlines the BANK controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
< BANK Shifts fader bank left by one bank. (A bank is a group
of channels.) The LED is lit if the leftmost fader bank
has not been reached.
BANK > Shifts fader bank right by one bank. The LED is lit if
the rightmost fader bank has not been reached.

US-428 and US-224 transport controls

The table outlines the transport controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
REW Moves the playhead backward by one bar.
F FWD Moves the playhead forward by one bar.
STOP Stops playback.
PLAY Starts playback.
RECORD Begins recording.

Chapter 21    Tascam US-428 and US-224 234

 Yamaha 01V96
22
Set up your 01V96
Follow the steps below before using your 01V96 with Logic Pro.
•• Make sure that your 01V96 device is connected to the computer via USB.
•• Make sure that the latest USB MIDI driver for the device is installed. Visit the manufacturer’s
website to download the most recent driver version, if necessary.

Set up your 01V96 with Logic Pro

1 On the 01V96 front panel, do the following:
•• Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly, until the Setup > MIDI/Host page is
visible.
•• Use the cursor buttons to move the first DAW parameter box in the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
section, and rotate the parameter wheel to select USB and 1–2.
•• Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button repeatedly, until the Setup > Remote page is
visible.
•• Rotate the parameter wheel to choose General DAW as the TARGET parameter.
•• Press the LAYER [REMOTE] button.
2 In Logic Pro:
When you open Logic Pro, the 01V96 device is installed automatically. You should see two 01V96
icons in the Setup window, aligned horizontally.

01V96 assignments
01V96 assignments overview
These sections outline the assignment of Yamaha 01V96 interface elements to Logic functions.
•• 01V96 Display Access controls on page 236
•• 01V96 Fader Mode controls on page 237
•• 01V96 LCD controls on page 239
•• 01V96 Selected Channel control on page 241
•• 01V96 data entry controls on page 241
•• 01V96 channel strips on page 242
•• 01V96 assignable keys on page 243

235
01V96 Display Access controls
The table outlines the DISPLAY ACCESS controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button (such as SHIFT/ADD) below a control description indicates that the
control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down. Modifier buttons that need to be
assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk (*) that precedes the control name.

Control Modifier Assignment

*DAW AUTO STATUS While held down in Channel
Display mode, the display shows
the automation mode of the 16
channel strips in the current bank
selection.
PAIR/GROUP Enters Group Edit mode:
•• When a channel strip group
is selected, channel strip
membership is indicated by a
lit SEL button. Use this button
to enable/disable the channel
strip’s group membership.
•• Virtual encoders 1 to 4 display
properties of the currently
selected group.
•• Virtual encoder buttons 1 to 4
enable/disable properties of the
currently selected group.
•• When INSERT/PARAM is set to
PARAM, the left and right Tab
Scroll buttons scroll through
the group properties. When set
to INSERT, the buttons scroll
through the groups for editing.
*DAW SHIFT/ADD Switches the Mixer to show all
channel strips that correspond to
tracks used in the Tracks window,
along with their signal flow.
EFFECT Opens or closes the Sample Editor.

Chapter 22    Yamaha 01V96 236

01V96 Fader Mode controls
The table outlines the FADER MODE controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button (such as SHIFT/ADD) below a control description indicates that the
control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down. Modifier buttons that need to be
assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk (*) that precedes the control name.

Control Modifier Assignment

AUX 1 In Insert Display mode:
•• Assigns Send 1 level of channel
strips to encoders.
•• Assigns Send 1 level of the
selected channel strip to virtual
encoders.
•• Assigns Sends 1 to 4 of the
selected channel strip to virtual
encoders. Use the ENTER button
to switch the bypass state of
Sends 1 to 4.
In Channel Display mode:
•• Assigns Send 1 level of channel
strips to encoders and virtual
encoders.
•• Shows current Send 1
destination assignment, when
button is held down.
*DAW SHIFT/ADD Same as AUX 5, but for Send 6.
AUX 2 Same as AUX 1, but for Send 2.
*DAW SHIFT/ADD Same as AUX 5, but for Send 7.
AUX 3 Same as AUX 1, but for Send 3.
*DAW SHIFT/ADD Same as AUX 5, but for Send 8.
AUX 4 Same as AUX 1, but for Send 4.
AUX 5 In Insert Display mode:
•• Assigns Send 5 level of channel
strips to encoders.
•• Assigns Send 5 level of the
selected channel strip to virtual
encoders.
•• Assigns Sends 5 to 8 of the
selected channel strip to virtual
encoders. Use the ENTER button
to switch the bypass state of
Sends 5 to 8.
In Channel Display mode:
•• Assigns Send 5 level of channel
strips to encoders and virtual
encoders.
•• Shows current Send 5
destination assignment, when
button is held down.

Chapter 22    Yamaha 01V96 237

Control Modifier Assignment
AUX 6 Switches SEL buttons and encoder
buttons between normal behavior
and setting a parameter’s default
value.
When the AUX 6 button is held
down:
•• Pressing a channel strip’s SEL
button resets the channel strip’s
volume level.
•• Pressing a channel strip’s
encoder button resets the
channel strip’s pan/surround
value (PAN also needs to be
selected in ENCODER MODE
section).
AUX 7 Assigns Pan to encoders; assigns
selected channel strip’s pan/
surround parameters to virtual
encoders.
AUX 8 Determines mode of channel strip
SEL buttons:
•• AUX 8 indicator off: SEL button
used for channel strip selection.
•• AUX 8 indicator on: SEL button
used for Insert selection.
HOME Enables or disables Flip mode.

Chapter 22    Yamaha 01V96 238

01V96 LCD controls
The table outlines the LCD controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button (such as SHIFT/ADD) below a control description indicates that the
control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down. Modifier buttons that need to be
assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk (*) that precedes the control name.

Control Modifier Assignment

Left/Right buttons Plug-in Edit mode: Shifts the
parameter display to show the
next/previous page of parameter
controls (usually four) for the
selected plug-in.
*DAW ALT/FINE Plug-in Edit mode: Shifts the
parameter display up/down by
one parameter for the selected
plug-in.
F1 Clears overload LEDs.
*DAW SHIFT/ADD Switches the Mixer to the All view,
displaying all channel strips that
exist in your project.
*DAW ALT/FINE Opens or closes a second Tracks
window.
F2 Selects Insert display mode.
F3 Selects Channel display mode.
F4 Selects Meter display mode.

Chapter 22    Yamaha 01V96 239

01V96 LCD display modes
Insert display mode
Press the F2 button to select Insert display mode. In this mode, the LCD displays effect edit
parameters. This mode also allows you to switch between different Insert slots, enabling each
effect to be edited.

Display Assignment
TIME CODE Active if counter is displaying SMPTE timecode.
BEATS Active if counter is displaying bars/beats/divisions/
ticks.
Counter Displays either SMPTE timecode or bars/beats/
divisions/ticks.
SELECT ASSIGN Displays the encoder assignment as follows: Pan, Snd1
to Snd8, S1As to S8As, In, Out.
COMPARE Switches the display between “track name/parameter
name” and “parameter name/parameter value” modes.
BYPASS Switches the bypass state of plug-in currently being
edited.
INSERT/PARAM Switches between Plug-in Assign and Plug-in Edit
modes.
Selecting virtual encoders 1 to 4 (Use cursor keys, and Pan Assignment mode:
then press ENTER button.) •• Parameter control 1 button centers pan or surround
angle.
•• Parameter control 2 button centers surround
diversity.
•• Parameter control 3 button centers surround LFE
level.
•• Parameter control 4 button resets spread.
Send Assignment mode:
•• Enables or disables Sends 1 to 4 or 5 to 8.
Plug-in Assignment mode:
•• Confirms the plug-in selection for Insert slots 1 to
4 or 5 to 8, and enters Plug-in Edit mode for the
selected Insert slot.
Plug-In Edit mode:
•• Sets value to default, or switches buttons with two
states.
Moving virtual encoders 1 to 4 (Use cursor keys, and Pan Assignment mode:
then rotate parameter wheel.) •• Parameter control 1 edits pan or surround angle.
•• Parameter control 2 edits surround diversity.
•• Parameter control 3 edits surround LFE level.
•• Parameter control 4 edits spread.
Send Assignment mode:
•• Controls the Send level of Sends 1 to 4 or 5 to 8.
Plug-in Assignment mode:
•• Chooses Insert slot 1 to 4 or 5 to 8.
Plug-in Edit mode:
•• Sets value.

Chapter 22    Yamaha 01V96 240

Channel display mode
Press the F3 button to select Channel display mode.

Control Assignment
Moving virtual encoders 1 to 4 (Use cursor keys, and Adjusts parameter selected in the ENCODER MODE
then rotate parameter wheel.) and AUX SELECT sections.
Selecting virtual encoders 1 to 4 (Use cursor keys, and When Send 1 to 8 is selected: edits send pre/post
then press ENTER button.) fader position, enables or disables send mute, or sets
send level to default value. Send, Input, or Output
Assignment mode: confirms selection.

Meter display mode

Press the F4 button to select Meter display mode.

Control Assignment
Level Meters Display momentary and peak level.

01V96 Selected Channel control

The table outlines the SELECTED CHANNEL control and assignment:

Control Assignment
Pan control Adjusts the pan of the currently selected channel
strip.

01V96 data entry controls

The table outlines the data entry controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button (such as SHIFT/ADD) below a control description indicates that the
control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down. Modifier buttons that need to be
assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk (*) that precedes the control name.

Control Modifier Assignment

Parameter wheel Default: adjusts the value of the
currently selected parameter.
*DAW SHUTTLE Switches the parameter wheel to
Shuttle mode.
*DAW SCRUB Switches the parameter wheel to
Scrub mode.
[DEC] button Default: exits folder. In Go to
Marker dialog: cancels dialog.
*DAW ALT/FINE Opens or closes the Audio Bin tab
in the Media area.
[INC] button Enters the selected folder.

Chapter 22    Yamaha 01V96 241

01V96 channel strips
The table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button (such as SHIFT/ADD) below a control description indicates that the
control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down. Modifier buttons that need to be
assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk (*) that precedes the control name.

Control Modifier Assignment

SEL Using *DAW AUTO OFF:
•• FADER MODE [AUX 8] off: selects
channel.
•• FADER MODE [AUX 8] on: selects
channel for insert assignment,
allowing you to insert effects.
Using the *DAW AUTO automation
modes (WRITE, TOUCH, LATCH,
READ):
•• Cycles through automation
modes. Sets the selected mode
when an automation mode
button is held down.
*DAW SHIFT/ADD Resets the volume level.
SOLO Enables or disables the Solo
button.
*DAW OPTION/ALL Disables the Solo button of all
channel strips.
ON Enables or disables the Mute
button.
*DAW OPTION/ALL Unmutes all channel strips.
Fader Adjusts volume, or duplicates
encoder assignment in Flip mode.

Chapter 22    Yamaha 01V96 242

01V96 assignable keys
These keys can be assigned to the following functions.

Note:  A modifier button (such as SHIFT/ADD) below a control description indicates that the
control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down. Modifier buttons that need to be
assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk (*) that precedes the control name.

Control Modifier Assignment

DAW WIN STATUS Opens or closes the Audio Bin tab
in the Media area.
DAW REC/RDY 1 to 16 Enables or disables the Record
Enable button of the specified
channel strip.
DAW WIN TRANSPORT Opens or closes the Control bar
window.
DAW BANK – Shifts channel strips by one bank
to the left.
DAW BANK + Shifts channel strips by one bank
to the right.
DAW SHIFT/ADD Enables a second function/use for
some buttons.
DAW OPTION/ALL While held down, Value Change
mode is set to Full. Turning the
encoder to the right sets the
maximum value. Turning it to the
left sets the minimum value. The
encoder also stops at its default
value. See description of other
buttons.
DAW GROUP STATUS Enters Group Edit mode:
•• When a channel strip group
is selected, channel strip
membership is indicated by a
lit SEL button. Use this button
to enable/disable the channel
strip’s group membership.
•• Virtual encoders 1 to 4 display
properties of the currently
selected group.
•• Virtual encoder buttons 1 to 4
enable/disable properties of the
currently selected group.
•• When INSERT/PARAM is set to
PARAM, the left and right Tab
Scroll buttons scroll through
the group properties. When set
to INSERT, the buttons scroll
through the groups for editing.
DAW SHIFT/ADD Switches the Mixer to show all
channel strips that correspond to
tracks used in the Tracks window,
along with their signal flow.

Chapter 22    Yamaha 01V96 243

Control Modifier Assignment
DAW SUSPEND GROUP Enables or disables the Group
Clutch.
DAW SHIFT/ADD Switches the Mixer to show all
channel strips that correspond to
tracks used in the Tracks window,
along with their signal flow.
DAW CREATE GROUP Creates a new group and enters
Group Edit mode (see above).
DAW SHIFT/ADD Switches the Mixer to the All view,
displaying all channel strips that
exist in your project.
The channel strips on your
DM1000 device will also reflect the
All Channel Strip view.
DAW WIN MIX/EDIT Switches between the Tracks
window and the Mixer.
DAW CHANNEL – Shifts channel strips by one
channel strip to the left.
DAW CHANNEL + Shifts channel strips by one
channel strip to the right.
DAW CTRL/CLUTCH While held down, all groups are
disabled.
DAW ALT/FINE While held down, Value Change
mode is set to Fine: value changes
work at maximum resolution. Also
see description of other buttons.
DAW MONI STATUS —
DAW UNDO Performs an Undo of the last
editing operation.
DAW SHIFT/ADD Performs a Redo of the last Undo
operation.
DAW OPTION/ALL Opens the Undo History window.
DAW SAVE Saves the project.
DAW OPTION/ALL Performs a Save As operation,
allowing you to save the project
with a different name.
DAW WIN MEM-LOC Opens or closes the Marker tab in
the Lists area.
DAW EDIT TOOL Selects the next tool. While held
down, numerical buttons select a
specific tool.
DAW WIN INSERT Opens or closes the Sample Editor.
DAW REC/RDY ALL Disables the Record Enable
buttons of all channel strips.
DAW SCRUB Enables or disables Scrub mode.
DAW SHUTTLE Enables or disables Shuttle mode.
DAW REW Shuttles backward.

Chapter 22    Yamaha 01V96 244

Control Modifier Assignment
DAW FF Shuttles forward.
DAW STOP Stop
DAW PLAY Play
DAW SHIFT/ADD Pause
DAW REC Record
DAW PRE Sets the left locator at current
playhead position.
DAW IN Sets the punch in locator at
current playhead position.
DAW OUT Sets the punch out locator at
current playhead position.
DAW POST Sets the right locator at current
playhead position.
DAW RTZ Moves the playhead to the left
locator position.
DAW END Moves the playhead to the right
locator position.
DAW ONLINE Activates or deactivates internal/
external synchronization.
DAW QUICK PUNCH Enables or disables Autopunch
mode.
DAW AUTO FADER Enables or disables volume
automation playback and
recording.
DAW AUTO PAN Enables or disables pan
automation playback and
recording.
DAW AUTO PLUGIN Enables or disables plug-in
parameter automation playback
and recording.
DAW AUTO MUTE Enables or disables mute
automation playback and
recording.
DAW AUTO SEND Enables or disables send level
automation playback and
recording.
DAW AUTO WRITE Sets all channel strips to Write
automation mode.
DAW OPTION/ALL Sets selected channel strip, or
channel strip group, to Touch
automation mode. While held
down, and with the STEREO
channel strip AUTO button
enabled, sets automation mode to
Touch.

Chapter 22    Yamaha 01V96 245

Control Modifier Assignment
DAW AUTO TOUCH Sets all channel strips to Touch
automation mode.
DAW OPTION/ALL Sets selected channel strip, or
channel strip group, to Latch
automation mode. While held
down, and with the STEREO
channel strip AUTO button
enabled, sets automation mode
to Latch.
DAW AUTO LATCH Sets all channel strips to Latch
automation mode.
DAW OPTION/ALL Sets selected channel strip, or
channel strip group, to Read
automation mode. While held
down, and with the STEREO
channel strip AUTO button
enabled, sets automation mode
to Read.
DAW AUTO READ Sets all channel strips to Read
automation mode.
DAW OPTION/ALL Sets all channel strips to Write
automation mode.
DAW AUTO OFF Sets selected channel strip,
or channel strip group, to Off
automation mode. While held
down, and with the STEREO
channel strip AUTO button
enabled, sets automation mode
to Off.
DAW OPTION/ALL Sets all channel strips to Off
automation mode.
DAW AUTO STATUS While held down in Channel
Display mode, the display shows
the automation mode of the 16
channel strips in the current bank
selection.

Chapter 22    Yamaha 01V96 246

 Yamaha 02R96
23
Set up your 02R96
Follow the steps below before using your 02R96 with Logic Pro.
•• Make sure that your 02R96 device is connected to the computer via USB.
•• Make sure that the latest USB MIDI driver for the device is installed. Visit the manufacturer’s
website to download the most recent driver version, if necessary.

Set up your 02R96 with Logic Pro

1 On the 02R96 device, do the following:
•• Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly, until the Setup > MIDI/Host page is
visible.
•• Use the cursor buttons to move to the first DAW parameter box in the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
section, and rotate the parameter wheel to select USB and 1–2.
•• Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly, until the Setup > Remote page is
visible.
•• Rotate the parameter wheel to choose General DAW as the TARGET parameter.
•• Press the LAYER [REMOTE] button.
2 In Logic Pro:
When you open Logic Pro, the 02R96 device is installed automatically. You should see three
02R96 (USB 1–3) icons in the Setup window, aligned horizontally.

02R96 assignments
02R96 assignments overview
These sections outline the assignment of Yamaha 02R96 interface elements to Logic functions.
•• 02R96 Display Access control on page 248
•• 02R96 Aux Select controls on page 248
•• 02R96 Encoder and Fader Mode controls on page 248
•• 02R96 Effect/Plug-in controls on page 249
•• 02R96 LCD on page 250
•• 02R96 assignable keys on page 251
•• 02R96 channel strips on page 252
•• 02R96 Machine Control parameters on page 252
•• 02R96 data entry controls on page 253

247
02R96 Display Access control
The table outlines the DISPLAY ACCESS control assignment:

Control Assignment
METER Clears overload LEDs.

02R96 Aux Select controls

The table outlines the AUX SELECT controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
AUX 1 Assigns Send 1 level to encoders, and Send 1 to
4 levels to virtual encoders. While held down, the
channel strip display shows the current Send 1
destination assignment.
AUX 2 Assigns Send 2 level to encoders, and Send 1 to
4 levels to virtual encoders. While held down, the
channel strip display shows the current Send 2
destination assignment.
AUX 3 Assigns Send 3 level to encoders, and Send 1 to
4 levels to virtual encoders. While held down, the
channel strip display shows the current Send 3
destination assignment.
AUX 4 Assigns Send 4 level to encoders, and Send 1 to
4 levels to virtual encoders. While held down, the
channel strip display shows the current Send 4
destination assignment.
AUX 5 Assigns Send 5 level to encoders, and Send 5 to
8 levels to virtual encoders. While held down, the
channel strip display shows the current Send 5
destination assignment.

02R96 Encoder and Fader Mode controls

The table outlines the ENCODER MODE and FADER MODE controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
PAN Assigns pan to encoders; assigns selected channel
strip’s pan/surround parameters to virtual encoders.
AUX Assigns Send 1 level to encoders, and Send 1 to
4 levels to virtual encoders. While held down, the
channel strip display shows the current Send 1
destination assignment.
FADER Enables or disables Flip mode.
AUX/MTRX Enables or disables Flip mode.

Chapter 23    Yamaha 02R96 248

02R96 Effect/Plug-in controls
The table outlines the EFFECT/PLUG-IN controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
Display Opens or closes the Sample Editor.
PLUG-INS Switches SEL buttons and encoder buttons between
normal behavior and setting a parameter’s default
value.
CHANNEL INSERTS Determines mode of channel strip SEL buttons:
•• Indicator off: SEL button used for channel strip
selection
•• Indicator on: SEL button used for Insert selection
2 Switches the display between “track name/parameter
name” and “parameter name/parameter value” modes.
3 Switches the bypass state of plug-in currently being
edited.
4 Switches between Plug-in Assign and Plug-in Edit
modes.
Parameter Up & Parameter Down Plug-in Edit mode: shifts the parameter display to
show the next/previous page of parameter controls
(usually four) for the selected plug-in.
Selecting virtual encoders 1 to 4 (Use cursor keys, and Pan Assignment mode:
then press ENTER button.) •• Parameter control 1 button centers pan or surround
angle.
•• Parameter control 2 button centers surround
diversity.
•• Parameter control 3 button resets surround LFE
level.
•• Parameter control 4 button resets spread.
Send Assignment mode:
•• Enables or disables Sends 1 to 4 or 5 to 8.
Plug-in Assignment mode:
•• Confirms the plug-in selection for Insert slots 1 to
4 or 5 to 8, and enters Plug-in Edit mode for the
selected Insert slot.
Plug-in Edit mode:
•• Sets value to default, or switches buttons with two
states.
Moving virtual encoders 1 to 4 (Use cursor keys, and Pan Assignment mode:
then rotate parameter wheel.) •• Parameter control 1 edits pan or surround angle.
•• Parameter control 2 edits surround diversity.
•• Parameter control 3 edits surround LFE.
•• Parameter control 4 edits spread.
Send Assignment mode:
•• Controls the Send level of Sends 1 to 4 or 5 to 8.
Plug-in Assignment mode:
•• Chooses Insert slot 1 to 4 or 5 to 8.
Plug-in Edit mode:
•• Sets value.

Chapter 23    Yamaha 02R96 249

02R96 LCD
The LCD displays different data, depending on the page selected with the F2, F3, and F4 buttons:
•• INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT Display view: Parameter details, plug-in selection, or plug-in parameters.
Press F2 to select this view.
•• Channel view: Encoder values and channel strip display. Press F3 to select this view.
•• Level meters view: Press F4 to select this view.

The following assignments are available in all three views:

Display Assignment
TIME CODE Active if counter is displaying SMPTE timecode.
BEATS Active if counter is displaying bars/beats/divisions/
ticks.
Counter Displays SMPTE timecode or bars/beats/divisions/
ticks.
SELECT ASSIGN Displays the Encoder assignment as follows: Pan, Snd1
to Snd8, S1As to S8As, In, Out.

Chapter 23    Yamaha 02R96 250

02R96 assignable keys
The table outlines the USER-DEFINED KEY controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
Display While held down, the display shows the automation
mode of the channel strips in the current bank
selection.
1 Switches between the Tracks window and the Mixer.
2 Enables or disables the Group Clutch.
3 Sets selected channel strip, or channel strip group, to
Write automation mode.
4 Sets selected channel strip, or channel strip group, to
Touch automation mode.
5 Sets selected channel strip, or channel strip group, to
Latch automation mode.
6 Sets selected channel strip, or channel strip group, to
Read automation mode.
8 Sets selected channel strip, or channel strip group, to
Off automation mode.
9 Shifts channel strips by one bank to the left.
10 Shifts channel strips by one bank to the right.
11 Enables or disables volume automation playback and
recording.
12 Enables or disables mute automation playback and
recording.
13 Enables or disables pan automation playback and
recording.
14 Enables or disables send level automation playback
and recording.
16 Enables or disables plug-in parameter automation
playback and recording.

Chapter 23    Yamaha 02R96 251

02R96 channel strips
The table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
Encoder Adjusts parameter selected in the AUX SELECT
section.
Encoder Select button Pan selected: sets pan to center position.
If EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [PLUG-INS] on Sends 1 to 8 is
selected: edits Send Pre/Post, switches Send Mute
state, or sets Send Level to default value.
Send Assign, Input, or Output: confirms selection.
AUTO Cycles through automation modes. When an
automation mode button is held down, sets this
automation mode.
SEL If EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [CHANNEL INSERTS] is off: selects
channel.
If EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [CHANNEL INSERTS] is on:
chooses channel for plug-in selection/insertion.
SOLO Enables or disables Solo button.
ON Enables or disables Mute button.
Fader Adjusts volume, or duplicates Encoder in Flip mode.

02R96 Machine Control parameters

The table outlines the controls in the MACHINE CONTROL section and their assignments:

Control Assignment
display Opens or closes the Marker tab in the Lists area.
1 to 8 Recalls markers 1 to 8.
REW Shuttles backward.
FF Shuttles forward.
STOP Stop
PLAY Play
REC Record

Chapter 23    Yamaha 02R96 252

02R96 data entry controls
The table outlines the data entry controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
SCRUB Enables or disables Scrub mode.
SHUTTLE Enables or disables Shuttle mode.
Parameter Wheel Default: adjusts the value of the currently selected
parameter. Scrub: Scrub mode. Shuttle: Shuttle mode.
ENTER Enters selected folder.
DEC Exits folder.
INC Switches between Cursor and Zoom modes.
Cursor Up Cursor mode: equivalent to computer keyboard Up
Arrow key.
Zoom mode: zooms out vertically.
Cursor Down Cursor mode: equivalent to computer keyboard Down
Arrow key.
Zoom mode: zooms out vertically.
Cursor Left Cursor mode: equivalent to computer keyboard Left
Arrow key.
Zoom mode: zooms out horizontally.
Cursor Right Cursor mode: equivalent to computer keyboard Right
Arrow key.
Zoom mode: zooms in horizontally.

Chapter 23    Yamaha 02R96 253

 Yamaha DM1000
24
Set up your DM1000
Follow the steps below before using your DM1000 with Logic Pro.
•• Make sure that your DM1000 device is connected to the computer via USB.
•• Make sure that the latest USB MIDI driver for the device is installed. Visit the manufacturer’s
website to download the most recent driver version, if necessary.

Set up your DM1000 with Logic Pro

1 On the DM1000 device, do the following:
•• Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly, until the Setup > MIDI/Host page is
visible.
•• Use the cursor buttons to move to the DAW parameter box in the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
section, and rotate the parameter wheel to select USB and 1–3.
•• Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, and then press the [F1] button. The Remote 1
page is displayed.
•• Rotate the parameter wheel to choose General DAW as the TARGET parameter.
•• Press the LAYER [REMOTE 1] button.
2 In Logic Pro:
When you open Logic Pro, the DM1000 device is installed automatically. You should see two
DM1000 icons in the Setup window, aligned horizontally.

DM1000 assignments
DM1000 assignments overview
These sections outline the assignment of Yamaha DM1000 interface elements to Logic functions.
•• DM1000 Display Access controls on page 255
•• DM1000 Aux Select controls on page 256
•• DM1000 Encoder and Fader Mode controls on page 257
•• DM1000 LCD controls on page 258
•• DM1000 LCD display modes overview on page 258
•• DM1000 data entry controls on page 260
•• DM1000 channel strips on page 261
•• DM1000 stereo channel strip control on page 261
•• DM1000 assignable keys on page 262

254
DM1000 Display Access controls
The table outlines the DISPLAY ACCESS controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT/ADD, shown below a control description indicates that
the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down. Modifier buttons that need to
be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk (*) that precedes the button name.

Control Modifier Assignment

AUTOMIX When AUTOMIX is held down in
Channel Display mode, the display
shows the automation mode of
the 16 channel strips in the current
bank selection.
PAIR/GROUP Enters Group Edit mode:
•• When a channel strip group
is selected, channel strip
membership is indicated by a
lit SEL button. Use this button
to enable/disable the channel
strip’s group membership.
•• Virtual encoders 1 to 4 display
properties of the currently
selected group.
•• Virtual encoder buttons 1 to 4
enable/disable properties of the
currently selected group.
•• When INSERT/PARAM is set to
PARAM, the left and right Tab
Scroll buttons scroll through
the group properties. When set
to INSERT, the buttons scroll
through the groups for editing.
*DAW SHIFT/ADD Switches the Mixer to show all
channel strips that correspond to
tracks used in the Tracks window,
along with their signal flow.
METER Clears overload LEDs.
*DAW SHIFT/ADD Switches the Mixer to the All view,
displaying all channel strips that
exist in your project.
*DAW ALT/FINE Opens or closes a second Tracks
window.
EFFECT Opens or closes the Sample Editor.

Chapter 24    Yamaha DM1000 255

DM1000 Aux Select controls
The table outlines tıhe AUX SELECT controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT/ADD, shown below a control description indicates that
the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down. Modifier buttons that
need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk (*) that precedes the
button name.

Control Modifier Assignment

AUX 1 In Insert Display mode:
•• Assigns Send 1 level of channel
strips to encoders.
•• Assigns Send 1 level of the
selected channel strip to virtual
encoders.
•• Assigns Sends 1 to 4 of the
selected channel strip to virtual
encoders. Use the ENTER button
to switch the bypass state of
Sends 1 to 4.
In Channel Display mode:
•• Assigns Send 1 level of channel
strips to encoders and virtual
encoders.
•• Shows current Send 1
destination assignment, when
button is held down.
*DAW SHIFT/ADD Same as AUX 5, but for Send 6
AUX 2 Same as AUX 1, but for Send 2
*DAW SHIFT/ADD Same as AUX 5, but for Send 7
AUX 3 Same aıs AUX 1, but for Send 3
*DAW SHIFT/ADD Same as AUX 5, but for Send 8
AUX 4 Same as AUX 1, but for Send 4
AUX 5 In Insert Display mode:
•• Assigns Send 5 level of channel
strips to encoders.
•• Assigns Send 5 level of the
selected channel strip to virtual
encoders.
•• Assigns Sends 5 to 8 of the
selected channel strip to virtual
encoders. Use the ENTER button
to switch the bypass state of
Sends 5 to 8.
In Channel Display mode:
•• Assigns Send 5 level of channel
strips to encoders and virtual
encoders.
•• Shows current Send 5
destination assignment, when
button is held down.

Chapter 24    Yamaha DM1000 256

Control Modifier Assignment
AUX 6 Switches SEL buttons and encoder
buttons between normal behavior
and setting a parameter’s default
value. When the AUX 6 button is
held down:
•• Pressing a channel strip’s SEL
button resets the channel strip’s
volume level.
•• Pressing a channel strip’s
encoder button resets the
channel strip’s pan/surround
value. (PAN also needs to be
selected in the ENCODER MODE
section.)
AUX 8 Determines mode of channel strip
SEL buttons when the STEREO
section AUTO button is off:
•• AUX 8 indicator off: SEL button
used for channel strip selection
•• AUX 8 indicator on: SEL button
used for Insert selection

DM1000 Encoder and Fader Mode controls

The table outlines the ENCODER MODE and FADER MODE controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
PAN •• Assigns pan/surround control to encoders.
•• In Insert Display mode, assigns pan/surround
parameters of the selected channel strip to virtual
encoders.
•• In Channel Display mode, assigns pan/surround
parameters of the 16 channel strips in current bank
selection to virtual encoders.
AUX •• Assigns Send level control to encoders.
•• In Insert Display mode, assigns Send level
parameter of the selected channel strip to virtual
encoders.
•• In Channel Display mode, assigns Send level
parameters of the 16 channel strips in current bank
selection to virtual encoders.
FADER/AUX Enables or disables Flip mode.

Chapter 24    Yamaha DM1000 257

DM1000 LCD controls
The table outlines the LCD controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT/ADD, shown below a control description indicates that
the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down. Modifier buttons that
need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk (*) that precedes the
button name.

Control Modifier Assignment

Left & Right Tab Scroll buttons Plug-in Edit mode: shifts the
parameter display to show the
next/previous page of parameter
controls (usually four) for the
selected plug-in.
*DAW ALT/FINE Plug-in Edit mode: shifts the
parameter display up/down by
one parameter for the selected
plug-in.

DM1000 LCD display modes

DM1000 LCD display modes overview
The LCD display contents reflect the page selected with the F2, F3, and F4 buttons.

All display modes show a number of LCD common elements.

•• Press the F2 button to select Insert display mode.
•• Press the F3 button to select Channel display mode.
•• Press the F4 button to select Meter display mode.

LCD common elements

The following elements are common across all pages in the LCD:

Display Assignment
TIME CODE Active if counter is displaying SMPTE timecode
BEATS Active if counter is displaying bars/beats/divisions/
ticks
Counter Displays either SMPTE timecode or bars/beats/
divisions/ticks.
SELECT ASSIGN Displays the encoder assignment as follows: Pan, Snd1
to Snd8, S1As to S8As, In, Out.

Chapter 24    Yamaha DM1000 258

Insert display mode
Press the F2 button to select Insert display mode. In this mode, the LCD displays parameters,
allowing you to edit effects. This mode also allows you to switch between different Insert slots,
enabling each effect to be edited.

Control Assignment
COMPARE Switches the display between “track name/parameter
name” and “parameter name/parameter value” modes.
BYPASS Switches the bypass state of plug-in currently being
edited.
INSERT/PARAM Switches between Plug-in Assign and Plug-in Edit
modes.
Selecting virtual encoders 1 to 4 (Use cursor keys, and Pan Assignment mode:
then press ENTER button.) •• Parameter control 1 button centers pan or surround
angle.
•• Parameter control 2 button centers surround
diversity.
•• Parameter control 3 button resets surround LFE
level.
•• Parameter control 4 button resets spread.
Send Assignment mode:
•• Enables or disables Sends 1 to 4 or 5 to 8.
Plug-in Assignment mode:
•• Confirms the plug-in selection for Insert slots 1 to
4 or 5 to 8, and enters Plug-in Edit mode for the
selected Insert slot.
Plug-In Edit mode:
•• Sets value to default, or switches buttons with two
states.
Moving virtual encoders 1 to 4 (Use cursor keys, and Pan Assignment mode:
then rotate parameter wheel.) •• Parameter control 1 edits pan or surround angle.
•• Parameter control 2 edits surround diversity.
•• Parameter control 3 edits surround LFE level.
•• Parameter control 4 edits spread.
Send Assignment mode:
•• Controls the Send level of Sends 1 to 4 or 5 to 8.
Plug-in Assignment mode:
•• Chooses Insert slot 1 to 4 or 5 to 8.
Plug-in Edit mode:
•• Sets value.

Chapter 24    Yamaha DM1000 259

Channel display mode
Press the F3 button to select Channel display mode. In this mode, the parameter controls, such as
pan and send level, for channel strips 1 to 16 are displayed.

Control Assignment
Selecting virtual encoders 1 to 4 (Use cursor keys, and When Send 1 to 8 is selected: edits Send pre/post
then press ENTER button.) fader position, enables or disables Send mute, or sets
Send level to default value.
Send, Input, or Output Assignment mode: confirms
selection.
Moving virtual encoders 1 to 4 (Use cursor keys, and Adjusts parameter selected in the ENCODER MODE
then rotate parameter wheel.) and AUX SELECT sections.

Meter display mode

Press the F4 button to select Meter display mode. In this mode, the level meters for channel
strips 1 to 16 are displayed.

Control Assignment
Level Meters Display momentary and peak level.

DM1000 data entry controls

The table outlines the data entry controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT/ADD, shown below a control description indicates that
the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down. Modifier buttons that
need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk (*) that precedes the
button name.

Control Modifier Assignment

Parameter wheel Default: adjusts the value of the
currently selected parameter.
* DAW SHUTTLE Switches the parameter wheel to
Shuttle mode.
* DAW SCRUB Switches the parameter wheel to
Scrub mode.
[DEC] button Default: exits folder.
In Go to Marker dialog: cancels
dialog.
* DAW ALT/FINE Opens or closes the Audio Bin tab
in the Media area.
[INC] button Enters the selected folder.

Chapter 24    Yamaha DM1000 260

DM1000 channel strips
The table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT/ADD, shown below a control description indicates that
the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down. Modifier buttons that
need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk (*) that precedes the
button name.

Control Modifier Assignment

Encoder Adjusts parameter selected in the
ENCODER MODE and AUX SELECT
sections.
Encoder Select button Pan selected: sets pan to center
position.
Send 1 to 8 selected: edits Send
pre/post position, Send mute on
or off, or sets Send level to default
value.
Send Assign, Input, or Output
selected: confirms selection.
SEL If AUTO off:
•• AUX 8 off: selects channel strip.
•• AUX 8 on: selects channel strip
for insert assignment.
If AUTO on:
•• Cycles through automation
modes. With an automation
mode button held down, sets
this automation mode.
*DAW SHIFT/ADD Resets the volume level.
SOLO Enables or disables the Solo
button.
*DAW OPTION/ALL Disables Solo button of all channel
strips.
ON Enables or disables the Mute
button.
*DAW OPTION/ALL Unmutes all channel strips.
Fader Adjusts volume, or duplicates
encoder assignment in Flip mode.

DM1000 stereo channel strip control

The table outlines the stereo channel strip control and its assignment:

Control Assignment
AUTO Switches channel strip SEL buttons between channel
and insert selection duties.

Chapter 24    Yamaha DM1000 261

DM1000 assignable keys
These keys can be assigned to the following functions.

Note:  A modifier button, such as SHIFT/ADD, shown below a control description indicates that
the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down. Modifier buttons that
need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk (*) that precedes the
button name.

Control Modifier Assignment

DAW WIN STATUS Opens or closes the Audio Bin tab
in the Media area.
DAW REC/RDY 1 to 16 Enables or disables the Record
Enable button of the specified
channel strip.
DAW WIN TRANSPORT Opens or closes the Control bar
window.
DAW BANK – Shifts channel strips by one bank
to the left.
DAW BANK + Shifts channel strips by one bank
to the right.
DAW SHIFT/ADD Enables a second function/use for
some buttons.
DAW OPTION/ALL While held down, Value Change
mode is set to Full. Turning the
encoder to the right sets the
maximum value. Turning it to the
left sets the minimum value. The
encoder also stops at its default
value. Also see description of other
buttons.
DAW GROUP STATUS Enters Group Edit mode:
•• When a channel strip group
is selected, channel strip
membership is indicated by a
lit SEL button. Use this button
to enable/disable the channel
strip’s group membership.
•• Virtual encoders 1 to 4 display
properties of the currently
selected group.
•• Virtual encoder buttons 1 to 4
enable/disable properties of the
currently selected group.
•• When INSERT/PARAM is set to
PARAM, the left and right Tab
Scroll buttons scroll through
the group properties. When set
to INSERT, the buttons scroll
through the groups for editing.
*DAW SHIFT/ADD Switches the Mixer to show all
channel strips that correspond to
tracks used in the Tracks window,
along with their signal flow.

Chapter 24    Yamaha DM1000 262

Control Modifier Assignment
DAW SUSPEND GRP Enables or disables the Group
Clutch.
*DAW SHIFT/ADD Switches the Mixer to show all
channel strips that correspond to
tracks used in the Tracks window,
along with their signal flow.
DAW CREATE GROUP Creates a new group and enters
Group Edit mode (see above).
*DAW SHIFT/ADD Switches the Mixer to the All view,
displaying all channel strips that
exist in your project.
The channel strips on your
DM1000 device will also reflect the
All Channel Strip view.
DAW WIN MIX/EDIT Switches between the Tracks
window and the Mixer.
DAW CHANNEL - Shifts channel strips by one
channel strip to the left.
DAW CHANNEL+ Shifts channel strips by one
channel strip to the right.
DAW CTRL/CLUTCH While held down, all groups are
disabled.
DAW ALT/FINE While held down, Value Change
mode is set to Fine: value changes
work at maximum resolution. Also
see description of other buttons.
DAW MONI STATUS —
DAW UNDO Performs an Undo of the last
editing operation.
*DAW SHIFT/ADD Performs a Redo of the last Undo
operation.
*DAW OPTION/ALL Opens the Undo History window.
DAW SAVE Saves the project.
*DAW OPTION/ALL Performs a Save As operation,
allowing you to save the project
with a different name.
DAW WIN MEM-LOC Opens or closes the Marker tab in
the Lists area.
DAW EDIT TOOL Selects the next tool. While held
down, numerical buttons select a
specific tool.
DAW WIN INSERT Opens or closes the Sample Editor.
DAW REC/RDY ALL Disables the Record Enable
buttons of all channel strips.
DAW SCRUB Enables or disables Scrub mode.
DAW SHUTTLE Enables or disables Shuttle mode.
DAW REW Shuttles backward.

Chapter 24    Yamaha DM1000 263

Control Modifier Assignment
DAW FF Shuttles forward.
DAW STOP Stop
DAW PLAY Play
*DAW SHIFT/ADD Pause
DAW REC Record
DAW PRE Sets the left locator at current
playhead position.
DAW IN Sets the punch in locator at
current playhead position.
DAW OUT Sets the punch out locator at
current playhead position.
DAW POST Sets the right locator at current
playhead position.
DAW RTZ Moves the playhead to the left
locator position.
DAW END Moves the playhead to the right
locator position.
DAW ONLINE Activates or deactivates internal/
external synchronization.
DAW QUICK PUNCH Enables or disables Autopunch
mode.
DAW AUTO FADER Enables or disables volume
automation playback and
recording.
DAW AUTO PAN Enables or disables pan
automation playback and
recording.
DAW AUTO PLUGIN Enables or disables plug-in
parameter automation playback
and recording.
DAW AUTO MUTE Enables or disables mute
automation playback and
recording.
DAW AUTO SEND Enables or disables send level
automation playback and
recording.
DAW AUTO WRITE Sets selected channel strip, or
channel strip group, to Write
automation mode. While held
down, and with the STEREO
channel strip AUTO button
enabled, sets automation mode
to Write.
*DAW OPTION/ALL Sets all channel strips to Write
automation mode.

Chapter 24    Yamaha DM1000 264

Control Modifier Assignment
DAW AUTO TOUCH Sets selected channel strip, or
channel strip group, to Touch
automation mode. While held
down, and with the STEREO
channel strip AUTO button
enabled, sets automation mode to
Touch.
*DAW OPTION/ALL Sets all channel strips to Touch
automation mode.
DAW AUTO LATCH Sets selected channel strip, or
channel strip group, to Latch
automation mode. While held
down, and with the STEREO
channel strip AUTO button
enabled, sets automation mode
to Latch.
*DAW OPTION/ALL Sets all channel strips to Latch
automation mode.
DAW AUTO READ Sets selected channel strip, or
channel strip group, to Read
automation mode. While held
down, and with the STEREO
channel strip AUTO button
enabled, sets automation mode
to Read.
*DAW OPTION/ALL Sets all channel strips to Read
automation mode.
DAW AUTO TRIM —
DAW AUTO OFF Sets selected channel strip,
or channel strip group, to Off
automation mode. While held
down, and with the STEREO
channel strip AUTO button
enabled, sets automation mode
to Off.
*DAW OPTION/ALL Sets all channel strips to Off
automation mode.
DAW AUTO STATUS While held down in Channel
Display mode, the display shows
the automation mode of the 16
channel strips in the current bank
selection.

Chapter 24    Yamaha DM1000 265

 Yamaha DM2000
25
Set up your DM2000
Follow the steps below before using your DM2000 with Logic Pro.
•• Make sure that your DM2000 device is connected to the computer via USB.
•• Make sure that the latest USB MIDI driver for the device is installed. Visit the manufacturer’s
website to download the most recent driver version, if necessary.

Set up your DM2000 with Logic Pro

1 On the DM2000 device, do the following:
•• Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly, until the Setup > MIDI/Host page is
visible.
•• Use the cursor buttons to move to the first DAW parameter box in the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
section, and rotate the parameter wheel to select USB and 1–3.
•• Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, and then press the [F1] button. The Remote 1
page is displayed.
•• Rotate the parameter wheel to choose General DAW as the TARGET parameter.
•• Press the LAYER [REMOTE 1] button.
2 In Logic Pro:
When you open Logic Pro, the DM2000 device is installed automatically. You should see three
DM2000 icons in the Setup window, aligned horizontally.

DM2000 assignments
DM2000 assignments overview
These sections outline the assignment of Yamaha DM2000 interface elements to Logic functions.
•• DM2000 Matrix Select controls on page 267
•• DM2000 Aux Select controls on page 268
•• DM2000 Encoder and Fader Mode controls on page 269
•• DM2000 Display Access controls on page 269
•• DM2000 Effect/Plug-in controls on page 270
•• DM2000 LCD on page 271
•• DM2000 Track Arming controls on page 271
•• DM2000 Automix controls on page 272
•• DM2000 Locator controls on page 274
•• DM2000 transport and cursor controls on page 275
•• DM2000 channel strips on page 277
•• DM2000 assignable keys on page 278

266
DM2000 Matrix Select controls
The table outlines the MATRIX SELECT controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
MATRIX 1 Switches SEL buttons and encoder buttons between
normal behavior and setting a parameter’s default
value. When the AUX 6 button is held down:
•• Pressing a channel strip’s SEL button resets the
channel strip’s volume level.
•• Pressing a channel strip’s encoder button resets the
channel strip’s pan/surround value. (PAN also needs
to be selected in the ENCODER MODE section.)
MATRIX 2 Switches the encoder buttons between Send Position
and Send Mute mode.
MATRIX 4 If ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4] is on, switches the
channel strip SEL buttons between Insert Select
(indicator off) and Insert Bypass (indicator on) modes.

Chapter 25    Yamaha DM2000 267

DM2000 Aux Select controls
The table outlines the AUX SELECT controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button (such as USER 4, preassigned to SHIFT/ADD) shown below a control
description indicates that the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down.
Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk (*)
that precedes the button name.

Control Modifier Assignment

AUX 1 In Insert Display mode:
•• Assigns Send 1 level of channel
strips to encoders.
•• Assigns Send 1 level of the
selected channel strip to virtual
encoders.
•• Assigns Sends 1 to 4 of the
selected channel strip to virtual
encoders. Use the ENTER button
to switch the bypass state of
Sends 1 to 4.
In Channel Display mode:
•• Assigns Send 1 level of channel
strips to encoders and virtual
encoders.
Shows current Send 1 destination
assignment, when button is held
down.
*USER 4 Same as AUX 5, but for Send 6
AUX 2 Same as AUX 1, but for Send 2
*USER 4 Same as AUX 5, but for Send 7
AUX 3 Same as AUX 1, but for Send 3
*USER 4 Same as AUX 5, but for Send 8
AUX 4 Same as AUX 1, but for Send 4
AUX 5 In Insert Display mode:
•• Assigns Send 5 level of channel
strips to encoders.
•• Assigns Send 5 level of the
selected channel strip to virtual
encoders.
•• Assigns Sends 5 to 8 of the
selected channel strip to virtual
encoders. Use the ENTER button
to switch the bypass state of
Sends 5 to 8.
In Channel Display mode:
•• Assigns Send 5 level of channel
strips to encoders and virtual
encoders.
Shows current Send 5 destination
assignment, when button is held
down.

Chapter 25    Yamaha DM2000 268

DM2000 Encoder and Fader Mode controls
The table outlines the ENCODER MODE and FADER MODE controls and their assignments:

Control Assignment
PAN •• Assigns pan/surround control to encoders.
•• In Insert Display mode, assigns pan/surround
parameters of the selected channel strip to virtual
encoders.
•• In Channel Display mode, assigns pan/surround
parameters of the 16 channel strips in current bank
selection to virtual encoders.
AUX/MTRX •• Assigns Send level control to encoders.
•• In Insert Display mode, assigns Send level
parameter of the selected channel strip to virtual
encoders.
•• In Channel Display mode, assigns Send level
parameters of the 16 channel strips in current bank
selection to virtual encoders.
ASSIGN 1 Assigns channel strip input assignment to encoders.
While held down, the channel strip display shows the
current channel strip input assignment.
ASSIGN 2 Assigns channel strip output assignment to encoders.
While held down, the channel strip display shows the
current channel strip output assignment.
ASSIGN 3 When encoders display a Send level, switches them
to Send Destination assignment mode. Press the
encoder button (or ASSIGN 3 again) to confirm the
assignment.
ASSIGN 4 Determines mode of channel strip SEL buttons:
•• Indicator off: SEL button used for channel strip
selection
•• Indicator on: SEL button used for insert selection
or insert bypass, depending on MATRIX SELECT
[MATRIX 4]
FADER Enables or disables Flip mode.
AUX/MTRX Enables or disables Flip mode.

DM2000 Display Access controls

The table outlines the DISPLAY ACCESS controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button (such as USER 4, preassigned to SHIFT/ADD) shown below a control
description indicates that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down.
Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk (*)
that precedes the button name.

Control Modifier Assignment

METER Clears overload LEDs.
*USER 4 Switches the Mixer to the All view,
displaying all channel strips that
exist in your project.
*USER 13 Opens or closes a second Tracks
window.

Chapter 25    Yamaha DM2000 269

DM2000 Effect/Plug-in controls
The table outlines the EFFECT/PLUG-IN controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button (such as USER 4, preassigned to SHIFT/ADD) shown below a control
description indicates that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down.
Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk (*)
that precedes the button name.

Control Modifier Assignment

Display Opens or closes the Sample Editor.
6 Switches display between “track
name/parameter name” and
“parameter name/parameter value”
modes.
7 Switches the bypass state of Insert
slot that is currently being edited.
8 Switches between Plug-in
Assignment and Plug-in Edit
modes.
Parameter Up & Parameter Down Plug-in Edit mode: shifts the
parameter display to show the
next/previous page of parameter
controls (usually four) for the
selected plug-in.
*USER 13 Plug-in Edit mode: shifts the
parameter display up/down by
one parameter for the selected
plug-in.
Selecting virtual encoders 1 to 4 Pan Assignment mode:
(Use cursor keys, and then press •• Parameter control 1 button
ENTER button.) centers pan or surround angle.
•• Parameter control 2 button
centers surround diversity.
•• Parameter control 3 button
resets surround LFE level.
•• Parameter control 4 button
resets spread.
Send Assignment mode:
•• Enables or disables Sends 1 to 4
or 5 to 8.
Plug-in Assignment mode:
•• Confirms the plug-in selection
for Insert slots 1 to 4 or 5 to 8,
and enters Plug-in Edit mode for
the selected Insert slot.
Plug-In Edit mode:
•• Sets value to default, or switches
buttons with two states.

Chapter 25    Yamaha DM2000 270

Control Modifier Assignment
Moving virtual encoders 1 to 4 Pan Assignment mode:
(Use cursor keys, and then rotate •• Parameter control 1 edits pan or
parameter wheel.) surround angle.
•• Parameter control 2 edits
surround diversity.
•• Parameter control 3 edits
surround LFE level.
•• Parameter control 4 edits
spread.
Send Assignment mode:
•• Controls the Send level of Sends
1 to 4 or 5 to 8.
Plug-in Assignment mode:
•• Chooses Insert slot 1 to 4 or 5
to 8.
Plug-in Edit mode:
•• Sets value.

DM2000 LCD
The table outlines the LCD assignments:

Display Assignment
TIME CODE Active if counter is displaying SMPTE timecode.
BEATS Active if counter is displaying bars/beats/divisions/
ticks.
Counter Displays SMPTE timecode or bars/beats/divisions/
ticks.
SELECT ASSIGN Displays the encoder assignment as follows: Pan, Snd1
to Snd8, S1As to S8As, In, Out.

DM2000 Track Arming controls

The table outlines the TRACK ARMING controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button (such as USER 4, preassigned to SHIFT/ADD) shown below a control
description indicates that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down.
Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk (*)
that precedes the button name.

Control Modifier Assignment

1 to 24 Enables or disables the Record
Enable button of the specified
channel strip.
*USER 5 Disables the Record Enable
buttons of all channel strips.
MASTER Disables the Record Enable
buttons of all channel strips.

Chapter 25    Yamaha DM2000 271

DM2000 Automix controls
The table outlines the AUTOMIX controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button (such as USER 4, preassigned to SHIFT/ADD) shown below a control
description indicates that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down.
Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk (*)
that precedes the button name.

Control Modifier Assignment

DISPLAY When DISPLAY is held down in
Channel Display mode, the display
shows the automation mode of
the channel strips in the current
bank selection.
REC Sets selected channel strip, or
channel strip group, to Write
automation mode. While held
down, and with the STEREO
channel strip AUTO button
enabled, sets automation mode
to Write.
*USER 5 Sets all channel strips to Write
automation mode.
ABORT/UNDO Sets selected channel strip, or
channel strip group, to Touch
automation mode. While held
down, and with the STEREO
channel strip AUTO button
enabled, sets automation mode to
Touch.
*USER 5 Sets all channel strips to Touch
automation mode.
AUTOREC Sets selected channel strip, or
channel strip group, to Latch
automation mode. While held
down, and with the STEREO
channel strip AUTO button
enabled, sets automation mode
to Latch.
*USER 5 Sets all channel strips to Latch
automation mode.
RETURN Sets selected channel strip, or
channel strip group, to Read
automation mode. While held
down, and with the STEREO
channel strip AUTO button
enabled, sets automation mode
to Read.
*USER 5 Sets all channel strips to Read
automation mode.

Chapter 25    Yamaha DM2000 272

Control Modifier Assignment
TOUCH SENSE Sets selected channel strip,
or channel strip group, to Off
automation mode. While held
down, and with the STEREO
channel strip AUTO button
enabled, sets automation mode
to Off.
*USER 5 Sets all channel strips to Off
automation mode.
OVERWRITE [FADER] Enables or disables volume
automation playback and
recording.
OVERWRITE [PAN] Enables or disables pan
automation playback and
recording.
OVERWRITE [EQ] Enables or disables plug-in
parameter automation playback
and recording.
OVERWRITE [ON] Enables or disables mute
automation playback and
recording.
OVERWRITE [AUX] Enables or disables send level
automation playback and
recording.

Chapter 25    Yamaha DM2000 273

DM2000 Locator controls
The table outlines the LOCATOR controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button (such as USER 4, preassigned to SHIFT/ADD) shown below a control
description indicates that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down.
Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk (*)
that precedes the button name.

Control Modifier Assignment

DISPLAY Opens or closes the Marker tab in
the Lists area.
1 to 8 Recalls markers 1 to 8.
*USER 4 Switches the Mixer to the All view,
displaying all channel strips that
exist in your project.
DISPLAY HISTORY [FORWARD] Selects tool:
1: Arrow
2: Pencil
3: Eraser
4: Text tool
5: Scissors
6: Glue tool
7: Solo tool
8: Mute tool
PRE Sets the left locator at current
playhead position.
IN Sets the punch in locator at
current playhead position.
OUT Sets the punch out locator at
current playhead position.
POST Sets the right locator at current
playhead position.
RETURN TO ZERO Moves the playhead to the left
locator position.
END Moves the playhead to the right
locator position.
ONLINE Activates or deactivates internal/
external synchronization.
QUICK PUNCH Enables or disables Autopunch
mode.

Chapter 25    Yamaha DM2000 274

DM2000 transport and cursor controls
The table outlines the transport and cursor controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button (such as USER 4, preassigned to SHIFT/ADD) shown below a control
description indicates that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down.
Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk (*)
that precedes the button name.

Control Modifier Assignment

REW Shuttles backward.
FF Shuttles forward.
STOP Stop
PLAY Play
*USER 4 Pause
REC Record
DISPLAYHISTORY [FORWARD] Selects the next tool. While held
down, numerical buttons select a
specific tool.
SCRUB Enables or disables Scrub mode.
SHUTTLE Enables or disables Shuttle mode.
Parameter wheel Default: adjusts the value of the
currently selected parameter.
*DAW SHUTTLE Switches the parameter wheel to
Shuttle mode.
*DAW SCRUB Switches the parameter wheel to
Scrub mode.
DEC button Default: exits folder. In Go to
Marker dialog: cancels dialog.
*USER 13 Opens or closes the Audio Bin tab
in the Media area.
INC button Switches between Cursor and
Zoom mode.
Cursor Up Cursor mode: equivalent to
computer keyboard Up Arrow key.
Zoom mode: zooms out vertically.
*USER 4 Zoom mode: individual track zoom
in.
*USER 13 Page Up.
*USER 5 + *USER 13 Scroll to top.

Chapter 25    Yamaha DM2000 275

Control Modifier Assignment
Cursor Down Cursor mode: equivalent to
computer keyboard Down Arrow
key.
Zoom mode: zooms out vertically.
*USER 4 Zoom mode: individual track zoom
out.
*USER 13 Page Down.
*USER 5 + *USER 13 Scroll to bottom.
Cursor Left Cursor mode: equivalent to
computer keyboard Left Arrow key.
Zoom mode: zooms out
horizontally.
*USER 4 Zoom mode: individual track zoom
reset for tracks of the same type.
*USER 13 Page Left.
*USER 5 + *USER 13 Scroll to left border.
Cursor Right Cursor mode: equivalent to
computer keyboard Right Arrow
key.
Zoom mode: zooms in horizontally.
*USER 4 Zoom mode: individual track zoom
reset of all tracks.
*USER 13 Page Right.
*USER 5 + *USER 13 Scroll to right border (of window
with key focus).
ENTER Enters the selected folder.

Chapter 25    Yamaha DM2000 276

DM2000 channel strips
The table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button (such as USER 4, preassigned to SHIFT/ADD) shown below a control
description indicates that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down.
Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk (*)
that precedes the button name.

Control Modifier Assignment

Encoder Adjusts parameter selected in the
ENCODER MODE and AUX SELECT
sections.
Encoder Select button Pan selected: sets pan to center
position.
If MATRIX 1 on Send 1 to 8 is
selected: edits Send pre/post
position, Send mute on or off, or
sets Send level to default value.
Send Assign, Input, or Output
selected: confirms selection.
AUTO Cycles through automation modes.
With an automation mode button
held down, sets this automation
mode.
SEL If ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4] off:
selects channel strip.
If ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4] on:
•• BYPASS off: selects channel strip
for plug-in selection.
•• BYPASS on: switches bypass
state of currently selected Insert
slot.
*USER 4 Resets the volume level.
MATRIX SELECT 1 Resets the volume level.
SOLO Enables or disables the Solo
button.
*USER 5 Disables Solo button of all channel
strips.
ON Enables or disables the Mute
button.
*USER 5 Unmutes all channel strips.
Channel strip display Displays channel strip name, or
send, input, or output assignment.
Fader Adjusts volume, or duplicates
encoder assignment in Flip mode.

Chapter 25    Yamaha DM2000 277

DM2000 assignable keys
The table outlines the USER-DEFINED KEY controls and their assignments.

Note:  A modifier button (such as USER 4, preassigned to SHIFT/ADD) shown below a control
description indicates that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down.
Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk (*)
that precedes the button name.

Control Modifier Assignment

DISPLAY Opens or closes the Audio Bin
window.
1 Opens or closes the Control bar
window.
2 Shifts channel strips by one bank
to the left.
3 Shifts channel strips by one bank
to the right.
4 Shifts to second function/use of
some buttons. (See descriptions of
other buttons.)
5 While held down, Value Change
mode is set to Full. Turning the
encoder to the right sets the
maximum value. Turning it to the
left sets the minimum value. The
encoder also stops at its default
value. Also see description of other
buttons.
6 Enters Group Edit mode:
•• When a channel strip group
is selected, channel strip
membership is indicated by a lit
SEL button. Use this button to
enable/disable channel strip’s
group membership.
•• Virtual encoders 1 to 4 display
properties of the currently
selected group.
•• Virtual encoder buttons 1 to 4
enable/disable properties of the
currently selected group.
•• When INSERT/PARAM is set to
PARAM, the left and right Tab
Scroll buttons scroll through
the group properties. When set
to INSERT, the buttons scroll
through the groups for editing.
*USER 4 Switches the Mixer to show all
channel strips that correspond to
tracks used in the Tracks window,
along with their signal flow.

Chapter 25    Yamaha DM2000 278

Control Modifier Assignment
7 Enables or disables the Group
Clutch.
*USER 4 Switches the Mixer to show all
channel strips that correspond to
tracks used in the Tracks window,
along with their signal flow.
8 Creates a new group and enters
Group Edit mode (see above).
*USER 4 Switches Mixer to All view,
displaying all channel strips that
exist in your project.
The DM2000 channel strips will
also reflect the All Channel Strip
view.
9 Switches between the Tracks
window and the Mixer.
10 Shifts channel strips by one
channel strip to the left.
11 Shifts channel strips by one
channel strip to the right.
12 While held down, all groups are
disabled.
13 While held down, Value Change
mode is set to Fine: value changes
work at maximum resolution. Also
see descriptions of other buttons.
14 —
15 Performs an Undo of the last
editing operation.
*USER 4 Performs a Redo of the last Undo
operation.
*USER 5 Opens the Undo History window.
16 Saves the project.
*USER 5 Performs Save As operation,
allowing you to save the project
with a different name.

Chapter 25    Yamaha DM2000 279